90203-1104DED E Operation Manual PDF

E Series Controller
Kawasaki Robot Operation Manual
PREFACE
This manual describes operating instructions for the Kawasaki Robot Controller E series. This
manual should be read with careful review of the related manuals listed below. Once the contents
of all the manuals are thoroughly read and understood, the robot can be used.
1. Safety Manual
2. Installation and Connection Manual for Arm
3. Installation and Connection Manual for Controller
4. External I/O Manual (for connecting with peripheral devices)
5. Inspection and Maintenance Manual
The contents of this manual are described on condition that installation and connection of the robot
are done in accordance with the above listed manuals.
This manual provides as much detailed information as possible on the standard operating methods
for the Kawasaki robot. However, not every possible operation, condition or situation that should
be avoided can be described in full. Therefore, should any unexplained questions or problems
arise during robot operation, please contact Kawasaki. Refer to the contact information listed on
the rear cover of this manual for the nearest Kawasaki office.
The explanations in this manual include information on optional functions, but depending on the
specification of each unit, not every optional function detailed here may be included with the robot.
Also, note that figures given here may differ partially from actual screens.
1. This manual does not constitute a guarantee of the systems in which the robot is utilized.
Accordingly, Kawasaki is not responsible for any accidents, damage, and/or problems relating
to industrial property rights as a result of using the system.
2. It is recommended that all personnel assigned for activation of operation, teaching, maintenance
or inspection of the robot attend the necessary education/training course(s) prepared by
Kawasaki, before assuming their responsibilities.
3. Kawasaki reserves the right to change, revise, or update this manual without prior notice.
4. This manual may not, in whole or in part, be reprinted or copied without the prior written
consent of Kawasaki.
5. Store this manual with care and keep it available for use at any time. If the robot is reinstalled
or moved to a different side or sold off to a different use, attach this manual to the robot without
fail. In the event the manual is lost or damaged severely, contact Kawasaki.
Copyright © 2012 Kawasaki Heavy Industries Ltd. All rights reserved.
i
E Series Controller
SYMBOLS
The items that require special attention in this manual are designated with the following symbols.
Ensure proper and safe operation of the robot and prevent physical injury or property damage by
complying with the safety matters given in the boxes with these symbols.
！ DANGER
Failure to comply with indicated matters can result in

imminent injury or death.
！ WARNING
Failure to comply with indicated matters may possibly lead

to injury or death.
！ CAUTION
Failure to comply with indicated matters may lead to

physical injury and/or mechanical damage.
[ NOTE ]
Denotes precautions regarding robot specification,
handling, teaching, operation and maintenance.
！ WARNING
1. The accuracy and effectiveness of the diagrams, procedures, and detail

explanations given in this manual cannot be confirmed with absolute
certainty. Should any unexplained questions or problems arise, please
contact Kawasaki.
2. Safety related contents described in this manual apply to each individual
work and not to all robot work. In order to perform every work in safety,
read and fully understand the safety manual, all pertinent laws, regulations
and related materials as well as all the safety explanations described in each
chapter, and prepare safety measures suitable for actual work.
ii
E Series Controller
INTRODUCTORY NOTES
1. HARDWARE KEYS AND SWITCHES (BUTTON)
E series controller provides hardware keys and switches on the operation panel and the teach
pendant for various kinds of operations. In this manual the names of the hardware keys and
switches are enclosed with a square as follows. The terms “key” or “switch” which should follow
the relevant names are sometimes omitted for simpler expression. When pressing two or more
keys at the same time, the keys are indicated by “+” as shown in the example below.
EXAMPLES
ENTER: expresses the hardware key “ENTER”.

TEACH/REPEAT: indicates the mode switch “TEACH/REPEAT” on the operation panel.
A+MENU: indicates pressing and holding down A then pressing MENU.
2. SOFTWARE KEYS AND SWITCHES
E series controller provides software keys and switches which appear on the screen of the teach
pendant for various kinds of operations depending on specifications and situations. In this manual,
the names of software keys and switches are enclosed by “< >” parentheses. The terms “key” or
“switch” which should follow the relevant names are sometimes omitted for simpler expression.
EXAMPLES
<ENTER>: expresses an “ENTER” key that appears on the teach pendant screen.
<NEXT PAGE>: expresses a “NEXT PAGE” key on the teach pendant screen.
3. SELECTION ITEMS
Very often an item must be selected from a menu or pull-down menu on the teach pendant screen.
In this manual the names of these menu items are enclosed in brackets [XXX].
EXAMPLES
[Auxiliary Function]: Expresses the item “Auxiliary Function” in a menu. To select it, move the
cursor to the relevant item by the arrow keys, and press the ↵ key. For
detailed description, this procedure should be described every time, but “select
[XXX] item” will be used instead for simpler expression.
iii
E Series Controller
CONTENTS
1.0 General ............................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Models of E Series Controllers..........................................................................................1-1
1.2 Applicable Standards ......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Specifications of E Series Controllers............................................................................... 1-3
1.4 Robot Arms to be Connected...........................................................................................1-14
1.5 Relevant Operation Manuals ...........................................................................................1-14
2.0 Switches, Keys and Displays.............................................................................................2-1

2.1 Overview of Controller...................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Switches on the Controller................................................................................................. 2-2
2.3 Overview of Teach Pendant............................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Switches on Teach Pendant and Functions of Hardware Keys ........................................ 2-5
2.5 Teach Pendant Display Screen ........................................................................................2-10
2.5.1 Active/Inactive .................................................................................................................2-10
2.5.2 Switching Active Areas.................................................................................................... 2-11
2.6 Operation Keys on Teach Pendant Screen ...................................................................... 2-11
2.6.1 Operation Keys Other Than F (Function) Keys.............................................................. 2-11
2.6.2 F Keys (Function Keys)...................................................................................................2-14
2.6.3 Operation Keys on Repeat Mode Screen ........................................................................2-16
2.7 Details of Display Areas of the Teach Pendant...............................................................2-17
2.7.1 Pull-Down Menu Functions ............................................................................................2-19
2.7.1.1 Program/Comment Area..................................................................................................2-19
2.7.1.2 Functions in Step Area.....................................................................................................2-25
2.7.1.3 Repeat Speed Display Area .............................................................................................2-30
2.7.1.4 Program Display Area (B Area) ......................................................................................2-33
2.8 Keyboard Screen..............................................................................................................2-37
2.8.1 Keyboard Operation.........................................................................................................2-37
2.8.2 USB Keyboard.................................................................................................................2-39
2.9 Monitor Screen.................................................................................................................2-40
2.9.1 Displaying Monitor Screen..............................................................................................2-40
2.9.2 Enlarging Monitor Screen Area.......................................................................................2-41
2.9.3 Switching between Monitor Screen and Function Key Screen......................................2-43
2.9.4 Example of Monitor Functions........................................................................................2-45
2.9.5 Explanation of Each Monitor ..........................................................................................2-50
2.10 Error Screen......................................................................................................................2-57
2.11 Warning Screen ................................................................................................................2-59
iv
E Series Controller
2.12 Help Screen ......................................................................................................................2-60
3.0 Procedures for Power ON/OFF and Stopping the Robot ................................................. 3-1
3.1 Power on Procedure ........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Controller Power on Procedure .........................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 Motor Power on Procedure................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2 Power OFF Procedure........................................................................................................3-2
3.3 Method for Stopping the Robot......................................................................................... 3-3
4.0 Manual Operation of Robot...............................................................................................4-1

4.1 Method for Basic Operation .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Names of Each Axis........................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Procedure for Manual Operation of the 6 Axes ................................................................4-1
4.1.3 Procedure for Manual Operation of the 7th Axis (Option)...............................................4-2
4.1.4 Manual Operation of Axes 8 to 18 (Option) .....................................................................4-3
4.2 Manual Operation Mode of Robot ....................................................................................4-3
4.2.1 Manual Operation Mode Based on Joint Coordinates......................................................4-3
4.2.2 Manual Operation Based on Base Coordinates ................................................................4-5
4.2.3 Manual Operation Based on Tool Coordinates................................................................. 4-7
5.0 Teaching ............................................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1 Preparation for Teaching.................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1 Confirming Operation of Emergency Stop Buttons ......................................................... 5-3
5.1.2 Display During Teaching................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Setting of Teach Lock ........................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2 Selecting Program and Step Number ................................................................................ 5-4
5.3 Element Instruction and Their Parameters........................................................................ 5-4
5.3.1 Interpolation Instruction..................................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.2 Speed Instruction................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.3.3 Accuracy Instruction.......................................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.4 Timer Instruction................................................................................................................ 5-8
5.3.5 Tool Instruction .................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.3.6 Clamp1/ Clamp 2/ Clamp-N Instruction........................................................................... 5-9
5.3.7 Work Instruction (Option) ................................................................................................. 5-9
5.3.8 Jump / End (J/E) Instruction............................................................................................5-10
5.3.9 Output (O) Instruction ..................................................................................................... 5-11
5.3.10 Input (I) Instruction..........................................................................................................5-12
5.3.11 Weld Information Instructions.........................................................................................5-13
5.4 Recording Pose and Auxiliary Data to a Step .................................................................5-14
v
E Series Controller
5.4.1 Normal Recording Procedure..........................................................................................5-15

5.5 Teaching Procedures ........................................................................................................5-15
5.5.1 Operating Switches ..........................................................................................................5-16
5.5.2 Teaching Procedure..........................................................................................................5-16
5.6 Procedure for Operating AS Language Teaching Screen ...............................................5-20
5.6.1 Creating a New Program .................................................................................................5-20
5.6.2 Adding a Step to Program................................................................................................5-25
5.6.3 Overwriting a Step in a Program .....................................................................................5-27
5.6.4 Inserting/Deleting a Step to/from Program .....................................................................5-27
5.6.5 Other Functions................................................................................................................5-27
5.7 Procedure for Operating Pose Teaching Screen..............................................................5-28
5.8 KI Instruction (Option) ....................................................................................................5-30
5.9 Selecting Parameter Column of Each Element Instruction
on Teach Screen (Option) ................................................................................................5-31
6.0 Repeat Operation................................................................................................................ 6-1

6.1 Preparing for Repeat Operation.........................................................................................6-1
6.2 Execution of Repeat Operation ......................................................................................... 6-1
6.3 Methods for Stopping Repeat Operation........................................................................... 6-3
6.3.1 Aborting the Program ........................................................................................................ 6-3
6.3.2 Ending Execution of the Program ..................................................................................... 6-4
6.4 Methods for Restarting Repeat Operation ........................................................................ 6-4
6.4.1 Restarting after Aborting Program .................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.2 Restarting after Ending Execution of Program................................................................. 6-4
6.4.3 Restarting after Stopping by Emergency Stop.................................................................. 6-4
6.5 Wait Cancel ........................................................................................................................ 6-5
7.0 Checking and Modifying Programs .................................................................................. 7-1

7.1 Check Go, Check Back...................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Step Data Modification...................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.1 Modifying Pose Data ......................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.2 Modifying Auxiliary Data ................................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.3 Modifying both Pose and Auxiliary Data - Overwriting the Step....................................7-4
7.2.4 Deleting Step...................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.5 Inserting Step...................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.3 Edit on the Program Edit Screen ....................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.1 How to Switch to the Program Edit Screen ...................................................................... 7-6
7.3.2 Keys on the Program Edit Screen...................................................................................... 7-8
7.3.3 Step Data Modification on Edit Screen...........................................................................7-10
vi
E Series Controller
7.3.3.1 Modifying both Pose and Auxiliary Data .......................................................................7-10

7.3.4 Batch Modification of Taught Data of Several Steps .....................................................7-12
7.4 Online Edit Function........................................................................................................7-14
7.4.1 Online Edit Screen ...........................................................................................................7-14
7.4.2 Functions on Online Edit Screen.....................................................................................7-14
8.0 Auxiliary Functions ........................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Overview of Auxiliary Functions ......................................................................................8-1
8.2 How to Use Auxiliary Functions .......................................................................................8-2
8.3 Auxiliary Functions List .................................................................................................... 8-3
9.0 Interface Panel.................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 Method for Switching to Interface Panel Screen ..............................................................9-1
9.2 Setting Method for Interface Panel Screen ....................................................................... 9-2
9.3 Setting Method for Devices...............................................................................................9-3
9.3.1 Pilot Lamp.......................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3.2 Push Button ........................................................................................................................ 9-4
9.3.3 Push Button with Lamp ..................................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.4 2-Notch Selector Switch .................................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.5 3-Notch Selector Switch .................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.6 Digital Switch..................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.7 Digital Display ................................................................................................................. 9-11
9.3.8 Variable Data Display ......................................................................................................9-12
9.3.9 String Display Window....................................................................................................9-13
9.3.10 Monitor Command Button ..............................................................................................9-15
9.3.11 Palletize Icon....................................................................................................................9-16
9.3.12 String Data Display..........................................................................................................9-17
9.3.13 2-Selector Switch with Lamp ..........................................................................................9-18
9.3.14 3-Selector Switch with Lamp ..........................................................................................9-19
9.3.15 Servo Dispenser ...............................................................................................................9-21
9.3.16 Label Colors .....................................................................................................................9-22
9.4 Page Title..........................................................................................................................9-23
10.0 Automatic Tool (Coordinates Data) Registration............................................................10-1

10.1 Overview of Automatic Tool Coordinates Registration Function..................................10-1
10.2 Required Data for Automatic Tool Registration .............................................................10-1
10.2.1 Teaching the Four Base Poses .........................................................................................10-2
10.2.2 Teaching the Tool Z Direction Designation ....................................................................10-2
10.2.3 Teaching the Tool Y Direction Designation....................................................................10-3
vii
E Series Controller
10.3 Cautions for Teaching Base Poses...................................................................................10-3

10.4 Operation Method for Automatic Tool Registration.......................................................10-4
10.4.1 Preparations for Automatic Tool Registration.................................................................10-4
10.4.2 Registering Base Poses Data ...........................................................................................10-5
11.0 Robot Motion Parameter Values Settings ....................................................................... 11-1

11.1 Robot Motion Parameter Values Setting Flowchart ....................................................... 11-2
11.2 Functions Affected by Robot Motion Parameters........................................................... 11-3
11.2.1 Variable Acceleration/Deceleration Function ................................................................. 11-3
11.2.2 Vibration Inhibitory Control............................................................................................ 11-4
11.2.3 Collision Detection Function (Option)............................................................................ 11-4
11.3 Setting Robot Installation Posture ................................................................................... 11-5
11.4 Setting Tool Load Information ........................................................................................ 11-6
11.4.1 How to Approximate Moments of Inertia around Tool Center of Gravity .................... 11-8
11.4.2 How to Set Tool Load Information ................................................................................. 11-9
11.5 Setting Load on Arm...................................................................................................... 11-11
12.0 Auto Load Measurement .................................................................................................12-1

12.1 Overview of Auto Load Measurement Function ............................................................12-1
12.2 Execution Procedures ......................................................................................................12-1
12.2.1 Positioning for Auto Load Measurement........................................................................12-2
12.2.2 Displaying Auto Load Measurement Screen ..................................................................12-3
12.2.3 Registering Tool Number for Auto Load Measurement.................................................12-3
12.2.4 Setting Operational Area for Auto Load Measurement..................................................12-5
12.2.5 Confirming Operational Area for Auto Load Measurement ..........................................12-7
12.2.6 Executing Auto Load Measurement................................................................................12-9
12.2.7 Registering Results after Auto Load Measurement...................................................... 12-11
13.0 Dedicated Instructions for Specific Fields of Robot Applications .................................13-1

13.1 Setting Data for Clamp Instructions................................................................................13-1
13.2 Spot Welding Dedicated Signal.......................................................................................13-2
13.3 Teaching Spot Weld Dedicated Instructions ...................................................................13-3
13.3. 1 Clamp Instruction.............................................................................................................13-3
13.3. 2 Weld Schedule (WS) Instruction.....................................................................................13-3
13.3. 3 Clamp Condition (CC) Instruction..................................................................................13-3
13.3. 4 Gun Retract/ Extend (OC) Instruction ............................................................................13-3
13.4 Setting of Each Data ........................................................................................................13-4
13.4.1 Setting Data Per Clamp Condition Number....................................................................13-4
13.4.2 Setting of Spot Welding Clamp Data ..............................................................................13-5
viii
E Series Controller
13.4.3 Setting of Spot Welding Controller .................................................................................13-7

13.4.4 Setting of Spot Weld Gun ................................................................................................13-9
13.5 Time Chart for Input/Output Signals............................................................................. 13-11
13.6 Clamp Instruction in Handling Operation.....................................................................13-12
13.6.1 Setting of Handling Clamp Data ...................................................................................13-12
13.6.2 Time Chart for Handling Signals...................................................................................13-13
14.0 Multi Function OX/WX Specifications (Option) ...........................................................14-1

14.1 OX Signal Specifications.................................................................................................14-1
14.1.1 Step Type ..........................................................................................................................14-1
14.1.2 Keep Type.........................................................................................................................14-1
14.1.3 Double Type (XOR).........................................................................................................14-2
14.1.4 Pulse Type ........................................................................................................................14-2
14.2 WX Signal Specifications................................................................................................14-2
14.3 Output Timing..................................................................................................................14-3
15.0 Data Transformation (Option) .........................................................................................15-1

15.1 Overview of Data Transformation Function...................................................................15-1
15.2 Offline Teaching Data......................................................................................................15-2
15.3 Tool Data ..........................................................................................................................15-3
15.4 Definition of Tool Posture ...............................................................................................15-4
15.5 Operating Procedures for Data Transformation Function ..............................................15-6
15.5.1 Operation Flow ................................................................................................................15-6
15.5.2 Preparing Data for Transformation..................................................................................15-7
15.5.3 Creating Data for Automatic Measurement of Online Tool Coordinates ......................15-7
15.5.4 Teaching Four Reference Points by Online Robot .........................................................15-8
15.5.5 Executing Automatic Tool Measurement........................................................................15-9
15.5.5.1 Gravity Compensation.....................................................................................................15-9
15.5.5.2 Automatic Measurement of Tool Coordinates for Online Robot................................. 15-11
15.5.5.3 Displaying and Recording Tool Coordinates Data for Online Robot ..........................15-12
15.5.6 Tool Coordinates Data Registration for Online Robot .................................................15-12
15.5.7 Gravity Compensation for Four Online Reference Points ...........................................15-13
15.5.8 Tool Data Registration for Offline Robot......................................................................15-14
15.5.9 Executing Data Transformation.....................................................................................15-15
15.5.9.1 Verifying the Tool Data for the Online and Offline ......................................................15-15
15.5.9.2 Setting the Four Reference Points and Tool Numbers..................................................15-15
15.5.9.3 Displaying Distances and Errors between the Four Reference Points.........................15-17
15.5.9.4 Executing Data Transformation.....................................................................................15-18
15.5.9.5 Gravity Compensation for Offline Data........................................................................15-19
ix
E Series Controller
15.5.10 Confirming Teaching Data after Data Transformation.................................................15-20

15.6 Transformation Errors During Data Transformation....................................................15-21
15.7 Error Handling ...............................................................................................................15-22
16.0 Sealing Specification (Option) ........................................................................................16-1

16.1 Flowchart for Sealing Operation .....................................................................................16-1
16.2 Setting of Necessary Items by Auxiliary Function .........................................................16-2
16.2.1 Setting of Application Field.............................................................................................16-3
16.2.2 Setting of Gun Condition.................................................................................................16-4
16.2.3 Defining Signals for Painting/Sealing.............................................................................16-5
16.3 Teaching Screen for Sealing Specification......................................................................16-6
16.4 How to Teach Auxiliary Data of Gun Instruction...........................................................16-6
16.5 Gun Schedule ...................................................................................................................16-8
16.6 Spray Enable/Disable.....................................................................................................16-10
16.7 Manual Output of Gun on Signals................................................................................. 16-11
17.0 Troubleshooting ...............................................................................................................17-1

17.1 Basic Procedure for Troubleshooting..............................................................................17-1
17.2 Calling Up the Initialization Screen ................................................................................17-3
17.3 System Initialization ........................................................................................................17-4
Appendix Error Message List......................................................................................................... A-1
x
E Series Controller 1. General
1.0 GENERAL
The E series controller is equipped with the latest electronic devices, computers and software to
make possible a wide variety of sophisticated robot control functions. All controllers have basic
control functions for positioning, speed, acceleration and I/O built in as standard specification.
Also, additional axes and control functions are available as options for specific applications.
1.1 MODELS OF E SERIES CONTROLLERS
E series controller (standard spec.) is provided depending on the region where the controller is
used and arm models to be connected.
1. Japan spec. controller (E10, E12, E13, E14, E20, E22, E23, E24, E73, E74, E94)
2. North America spec. controller (E30, E32, E33, E34, E76, E77, E97)
3. Europe spec. controller (E40, E42, E43, E44, E70, E71, E91)
For arm models to be connected, refer to Chapter 1.4.
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
North America and Europe specification robots comply with the following standards.
1. North America spec. robot
ANSI/RIA R15.06 Industrial Robots and Robot Systems -

Safety Requirements
ANSI/RIA/ISO Robots for Industrial Environment -

10218-1 Safety Requirements - Part 1 - Robot
ANSI/UL 1740 Standard for Robots and Robotic Equipment,

Third Edition
NFPA 79 Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
CSA Z434-03 Industrial Robots and Robot Systems -

General Safety Requirements
1-1
2. Europe spec. robot
EN ISO 10218-1 Robots for industrial environments -

Safety requirements - Part 1: Robot
EN ISO 13849-1 Safety of machinery - Safety related parts of

control systems - Part 1: General principles for design
EN 60204-1 Electrical equipment of industrial machines

General requirements
EN 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-4:

Generic standards - Emission standard for industrial environments
EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2:

Generic standards - Immunity for industrial environments
1-2
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS OF E SERIES CONTROLLERS
Main specifications of E series controllers are as follows.
1. Controller for Japan spec.
1. Model E10/E12/E13/E14
2. Construction Self-sustaining fully closed, indirect cooling system
3. Dimensions Refer to Installation and Connection Manual.
4. Number of controlled 6 axes for E10/E12/E14, 5 axes for E13 (depends on number of axes of arm)
axes option)
5. Drive system Full Digital Servo System
6. Type of control Teach mode Joint, Base, Tool, Fixed Tool (option) operation mode
Repeat mode Joint, Linear, Circular (option) interpolation
7. Teaching method Teaching or AS language programming
8. Memory capacity 8 MB
9. External operation signals External Motor Power Off, External Hold, etc.
10. General purpose Input signals 32 channels (Includes dedicated signals)
signals Output signals 32 channels (Includes dedicated signals)
11. Operation panel Teach/Repeat SW, Emergency Stop SW, Control power lamp
12. Cable length Power/Signal cable 5 m
Teach Pendant cable 5 m
13. Mass Refer to Installation and Connection Manual.
14. Power requirement AC200 V - AC220 V±10%, 50/60 Hz, 3 phases,
Max 5.6 kVA (E10), Max 10 kVA (E12/E13/E14)
15. Ground Less than 100 Ω (robot dedicated ground)
Leakage current: max. 100 mA
16. Ambient temperature 0 - 45 °C
17. Relative humidity 35 - 85 % (non-condensation)
18. Color Munsell: 10GY9/1 equivalent
19. Teach Pendant TFT color display (6.4 inch LCD) with touch panel
Emergency Stop,Teach Lock and Deadman Switches
20. Options
General purpose Input signals 64/96/128 channels
signals Output signals 64/96/128 channels
I/O connector D-SUB 37pin (male,female) with cover
Operation panel Motor Power ON, Cycle start, RUN/HOLD, Error reset, Error lamp
Power/Signal cable 10m, 15m
Teach Pendant cable 10m, 15m
Auxiliary storage USB memory
Brake release Brake release switch
AC Outlet AC100V Outlet
PC cable 1.5 m, 3 m
Teach Pendant option Teach Pendant Stand, Cable hook, connector for TP less
Others Cooler, LED Light, Field BUS, Software PLC, Analog input/output,
Conveyor Synchronization, Vision and so on
21. Others Consult Kawasaki about maintenance parts and spare parts.
1-3
1. Model E10/E12/E13/E14 (with Insulating Transformer)

axes option)
14. Power requirement AC400 / 440 V±10%, 50/60 Hz, 3 phases, Max 10 kVA
15. Ground Less than 100 Ω (robot dedicated ground)
20. Options
Power requirement AC200 - 220 V±10%, 50/60 Hz, 3 phases, Max 10 kVA
Earth Leakage Breaker Leakage current trip level: 30mA
PC cable 1.5 m, 3 m
1-4
1. Model E20/E22/E23/E24
axes option)
Max 5.6 kVA(E20), Max 10 kVA(E22/E23/E24)
20. Options
I/O connector D-SUB 37pin(male,female) with cover
PC cable 1.5 m, 3 m
1-5
1. Model E73/E74
4. Number of controlled 6 axes
axes 8 (max.) axes (two built-in amp. addition, option)
Max 1.5 kVA(E73), Max 3 kVA(E74)
16. Ambient temperature 0 - 45 ℃ (Holizontal mount), 0 - 40℃ (Vertical mount)
18. Surface Treatment Zinc Plating, Trivalent chromate finish
Emergency Stop,Teach Lock and Deadman Switches(3 position)
20. Options
General purpose Input signals 64/96 channels
signals Output signals 64/96 channels
Motor brake release Manual brake release switch BOX
PC cable 1.5 m, 3 m
Teach Pendant option Connector for TP less, Small TP
Others Field BUS, Software PLC, Analog input/output,
1-6
1. Model E94
2. Enclosure Open construction *
3. Dimensions Refer to Installation and Connection Manual
4. Number of controlled Max.6 axes
axes
5. Servo control and Full Digital Servo System
drive system
Repeat mode PTP, CP control mode
Joint, Linear, Circular (option) interpolation
9. External operation External Motor Power Off, External Hold, etc.
signals
13. Mass Refer to Installation and Connection Manual
Max 4 kVA
20. Options
Enclosure Enclosed indirect cooling system (Ambient temperature 0 - 40 °C )
PC cable 1.5 m, 3 m
Teach Pendant option Connector for TP less
NOTE* Cooling of the electronic components in this open construction E9x controller is
achieved by circulation of ambient air. The enclosure is designed so that it protects
personnel from contact with hazardous parts inside the controller but it cannot protect
invasion of conductive dust like metal dust, non-conductive dust which becomes
conductive due to condensation or moisture and water. In this case please select the
optional “Enclosed indirect cooling system”.
1-7
2. Controller for North America spec.
1. Model E30/E32/E33/E34
axes option)
7. Teaching method Teaching in block (block teaching) or AS language programming
Max 4.9 kVA(E30), Max 9.9 kVA(E32/E33/E34)
Emergency Stop,Teach Lock and Deadman switches
20. Motor brake release Manual brake release switch
21. Options
Power/Signal cable 5m, 7m, 15m
Power requirement AC200-220 V, AC380-415 V, AC440-480 V, AC515 V, AC575 V±10%
50/60 Hz, 3 phases, Max 9.9 kVA(E32/E33/E34)
PC cable 1.5 m, 3 m
AC outlet AC-110-120 V Outlet (depends on supply power voltage)
Teach Pendant option Teach Pendant Stand, Cable hook, connector for nonuse
Conveyor synchronization, Vision and so on
1-8
1. Model E76/E77
Max 1.5 kVA (E76), Max 3 kVA (E77)
Emergency Stop,Teach Lock and Deadman Switches (3 position)
20. Options
PC cable 1.5 m, 3 m
1-9
1. Model E97
2. Enclosure Open construction *
axes
drive system
signals
Max 4 kVA
20. Options
Enclosure Enclosed indirect cooling system (Ambient temperature 0 - 40 °C )
PC cable 1.5 m, 3 m
NOTE* Cooling of the electronic components in this open construction E9x controller is
achieved by circulation of ambient air. The enclosure is designed so that it protects
personnel from contact with hazardous parts inside the controller but it cannot protect
invasion of conductive dust like metal dust, non-conductive dust which becomes
conductive due to condensation or moisture and water. In this case please select the
optional “Enclosed indirect cooling system”.
1-10
3. Controller for Europe spec.
1. Model E40/E42/E43/E44
3. Dimensions Refer to Instruction Manual.
axes option)
11. Operation panel Fast Check/Teach/Repeat SW, Emergency Stop SW, Control power lamp
13. Mass Refer to Instruction Manual.
Max 4.9 kVA(E40), Max 9.9 kVA(E42/E43/E44)
20. Safety Circuit Category: 3, Performance Level: d (EN ISO13849-1: 2008) *
21. AC Outlet AC220 - 240V Outlet (depends on Primary input voltage)
22. Motor brake release Manual brake release switch
23. Options
PC cable 1.5 m, 3 m
NOTE* Category and Performance level (PL) are determined by the whole system and conditions.
The safety circuit of this controller is available in the system of category: up to 3, PL: up
to d.
1-11
1. Model E70/E71
3. Dimensions Refer to Instruction Manual.
11. Operation panel Fast Check/Teach/Repeat SW, Emergency Stop SW, Control power lamp
13. Mass Refer to Instruction Manual.
Max 1.5 kVA (E70), Max 3 kVA (E71)
Emergency Stop,Teach Lock and Deadman Switches (3 position)
21. Options
PC cable 1.5 m, 3 m
to d.
1-12
1. Model E91
2. Enclosure Enclosed, indirect cooling type
axes
drive system
signals
11. Operation panel FastCheck/Teach/Repeat SW, Emergency Stop SW, Control power lamp
14. Power requirement AC200 V - AC230 V±10%, 50/60 Hz, 1 phase,
Max. 4 kVA
16. Ambient temperature 0 - 40℃
18. Surface Treatment Munsell: 10GY9/1
21. Options
PC cable 1.5 m, 3 m
to d.
1-13
1.4 ROBOT ARMS TO BE CONNECTED
Robot arms from small to large-size can be connected to the E series controllers. The table
below shows rough arm-controller combinations. For further information, please refer to our
catalogues and standard specifications.
E70/73/76 E71/74/77 E91/E94/ E10/20/ E12/22/ E13/23/ E14/24/

E97 30/40 32/42 33/43 34/44
Extra small R series:
robot 03N
Small robot R series: Y series Y series
05N/05L/ R series: R series:
06L/10N 10L/20N 05-20
Medium/Lar R series: ZD series
ge robot 30-80
B series
Z series
MT series
Extra large MX series
robot MD series
1.5 RELEVANT OPERATION MANUALS
This manual explains the standard functions common to all E series controller models (standard
spec.) and some of the additional functions available as options. For optional functions not
described in this manual, see the separate-volume option manuals.
1-14
E Series Controller 2. Switches, Keys and Displays
2.0 SWITCHES, KEYS AND DISPLAYS
This chapter describes overview of the controller, the various kinds of switches which are
equipped with this controller, and the hardware keys and the displays on the teach pendant
(hereinafter called TP).
2.1 OVERVIEW OF CONTROLLER
The figure below shows the external front view of this controller. A controller power switch, an
accessory panel, an operation panel, etc. are equipped on the front side of the controller. Use the
TP by connecting the cable to the connector on the front side of the controller, and place it on the
hook of the controller when not in use.
Accessory panel
Operation panel
Controller
power switch
Hook TP connector
Coin lock
Teach pendant
Description
Controller power switch Power ON/OFF switch for this controller
Provides the keys necessary for robot teaching and data editing, and
Teach pendant
a screen for displaying and operating various kinds of data.
USB port for external storage device and RS-232C port for PC
Accessory panel
connection are provided inside.
Operation panel Provides various kinds of switches necessary for operating the robot.
TP connector Connector to connect the TP
Hook Hook to hang TP cable on
Coin lock Lock for locking the controller door
2-1
！ DANGER
If TP cable is removed and replaced by short circuit connector, and
then later reinserted into the connector, be sure to confirm operation of
the E-STOP switch on the TP without fail before using the robot.
2.2 SWITCHES ON THE CONTROLLER
This section describes switches and lamps equipped on the operation panel and optional operation
panel of the controller.
No. Switch and Lamp Function
1 TEACH/REPEAT Switches the mode to Teach* or Repeat**. (Japan spec.
(Teach/Repeat switch) and North America spec.: standard)
100%/TEACH/REPEAT Switches the mode to Fast check, Teach* or Repeat**.
(100%/Teach/Repeat switch) (Japan spec.: optional, North America spec.:
Operation panel
unavailable, Europe spec.: standard)

2 CONTROL POWER Lights when the controller power is ON.
(Controller power lamp)
3 Emergency stop button Intercepts motor power and stops the robot when this
button is pressed in an emergency. At the same time,
the <MOTOR> lamp and <CYCLE> lamp on TP are
turned OFF. However, the controller power is not cut
OFF.
4 CYCLE START When pressed in repeat mode, repeat operation*** starts
(Cycle start button with lamp) and this lamp lights.
5 MOTOR POWER Turns motor power ON when pressed. The lamp
(Motor power button with lamp) lights for successful powering up.
Optional operation panel
6 HOLD/RUN Allows robot to move (RUN) or stops the robot

(Hold/Run switch) temporarily (HOLD). HOLD/RUN is also provided
on the TP. However, when using the optional
operation panel, robot cannot be activated unless both
switches are set to RUN. For example, when this
switch is set to HOLD, robot remains in HOLD even if
A+RUN on TP is pressed.
7 ERROR RESET Turns OFF error lamp when pressed to release the
(Error reset button) error. If errors continue to occur, the errors cannot be
released.
8 ERROR (Error lamp) Lights when errors occur.
*
NOTE Selected when teaching an instruction or its parameter to a robot or when operating a
robot manually using the operation box called TP. Repeat operation is not possible
while in teach mode though check operation is possible.
NOTE** The mode for repeat operation
NOTE*** Condition in which the robot automatically works and executes a memorized program
continuously.
2-2
Operation panel
Japan spec. (Standard) North America spec. (Standard)
1 2 3 1 2 3
Europe spec. (Standard)
1 2 3
Optional operation panel
4 5 6 7 8
2-3
2.3 OVERVIEW OF TEACH PENDANT
Figures below (top) show the overview of TP. TP provides hardware keys and switches which
are necessary for manual operation of robot and data editing, and a screen for editing/displaying
various kinds of data. Figure (bottom) shows the arrangement of the hardware keys.
Emergency Operation
stop switch screen
Teach lock
switch
Hardware keys
Deadman
switches
This teach pendant is compatible with most robot models and applications, except
explosion-proof painting applications. For arc welding applications, the hard key layout sheet
differs from that shown above.
2-4
2.4 SWITCHES ON TEACH PENDANT AND FUNCTIONS OF HARDWARE KEYS
The function of each switch and hardware key on the TP is as follows.
Switches Function
Cut OFF the motor power and stops the robot. To release emergency stop,
turn this button to the right until the button returns to its original position.
Emergency stop
Turning ON this switch (in teach mode) enables manual and check motions.
Turning OFF this switch (in repeat mode) enables repeat operations.
Note: Make sure this switch is turned ON before starting teaching operation to
Teach lock
prevent robot from being operated in repeat mode erroneously.
This is the enable switch. Robot axes cannot operate manually without
pressing this switch. Motor power cuts OFF and robot stops if switch is fully
depressed to its third deadman position, or if it is released completely.
Deadman
Keys Function Functions when pressing A key
Used with other key. The function on the

upper part of the key is enabled when it is
pressed with this A key.
Displays a pull-down menu of an active

area.
Moves the cursor. Used to move the A + ↑: Moves to a previous step in

cursor between items and screens, or to teaching or editing.
change the step. A + ↓: Moves to a next step in
teaching or editing.
Functions in same manner as ↵ key, except

that this key does not register data input by
keyboard screen.
Erases data in the input box, calls R code Captures a displayed screen image
input box, returns to the previous screen, and save it in USB memory as a
etc. The R codes list appears when graphics file (PNG).
pressing A＋HELP with the R code input
box displayed.
2-5
When the Fast Check function is enabled,

pressing CHECK + this key conducts
check operations at fast speed. Called
Fast Check key hereinafter.
(E2x: optional, E3x: unavailable, E4x:
standard)
Advances a step in check mode. Used as Advances a step when [Continuous
a step forward key for a single step Step Mode] in Aux. 0807 is set to
operation in repeat mode. [Disable] and the check mode is set
to [Check Once].
Moves back a step in check mode. Moves back a step when
[Continuous Step Mode] in Aux.
0807 is set to [Disable] and the
check mode is set to [Check Once].
Sets speed level for manual and check Pressing this key after pressing KIn,
operations. R, etc., displays help information.
While in teach screen or interface
1→2→3→4→5→1
panel, press A + this key to display
Note: Default is slow speed (speed 2). (Not customer-created help screen.
1 for inching) While in auxiliary function, press A
+ this key to display help
information for that auxiliary
function. See Chapter 2.12 for
details.
Selects the coordinate system for manual Selects the type of interpolation
operation. Press this key to switch among instruction. Press A + this key to
switch among interpolated motion
operation modes. modes:
Joint → Base → Tool → Joint Joint→Linear→Lin(ear)2→
This key is called COORD(INATES) key Cir(cular)1→Cir(cular)2→
hereinafter.
F Lin(ear)→F Cir(cular)1→
Note: Default is Joint coordinate system.
F Cir(cular)2→X Lin(ear)→Joint.
Displays the step selection menu. Displays the program selection
menu.
Switches illumination of upper (/lower)

LED to enable AXIS to operate external
axis groups: JT15-JT18 (/JT8-JT14).
2-6
Increases robot motion speed in teach or Turns ON the motor power when the
check mode. motor power is OFF. Conversely,
Note: Effective only while being pressed. turns OFF the motor power when
the motor power is ON.
Note: Motor power cannot be turned
OFF during robot motion.
Sets how program is repeated in check Starts cycle operation in repeat
mode. Toggles between Once and mode.
Continuous.
Note: Turning OFF controller power
switches to Check Once mode.
Inserts new steps to a program.
Deletes recorded program steps.
Edits auxiliary data.
Adds a new step following the current step. Overwrites the new step onto the
current step.
Modifies pose data.
Switches the signal data for clamp 1 Switches both the signal data for
instruction: ON→OFF→ON. clamp 1 instruction and the actual
clamp 1 signal.: ON→OFF→ON.
Switches the signal data for clamp 2 Switches both the signal data for
instruction: ON→OFF→ON. clamp 2 instruction and the actual
clamp 2 signal.: ON→OFF→ON.
2-7
Switches clamp-n signal ON or OFF. A + CLn + NUMBER (1～8)

When pressed, LED on key turns ON(red)/ switches both the signal data for
OFF. CLn + NUMBER (1～8) switches clamp instruction and the actual
the signal data for the specified clamp-n clamp signal of the specified clamp
instruction.: ON→OFF→ON. LED turns no.: ON→OFF→ON.
red when clamp-n signal is ON.
Moves each axis from JT1 to JT7. Called
AXIS keys hereinafter.
“.”. “-”.
Inputs “0”. Inputs “,”.
Inputs “1”. Turns ON the specified actual clamp

signal forcibly.
Inputs “2”. Turns OFF the specified actual

clamp signal forcibly.
Inputs “3”. Calls up input screen for the clamp

auxiliary (OC) instruction data
during block teaching.
Inputs “4”. Calls up input screen for the output

(OX) instruction data during block
teaching. Inputs “A” for non-block
teaching.
Inputs “5”. Calls up input screen for the input
(WX) instruction data during block
teaching. Inputs “B” for non-block
teaching.
2-8
Inputs “6”. Calls up input screen for the WS

instruction data during block
teaching. Inputs “C” for non-block
teaching.
Inputs “7”. Calls up input screen for the speed
teaching. Inputs “D” for non-block
teaching.
Inputs “8”. Calls up input screen for the
accuracy instruction data during
block teaching. Inputs “E” for
non-block teaching.
Inputs “9”. Calls up input screen for the timer
teaching. Inputs “F” for non-block
teaching.
Deletes data before the cursor. Calls up input screen for the tool
teaching.
Shows/hides the interface panel screen. Calls up input screen for the CC
Other screens are not displayed when instruction data during block
pressing this key. Called teaching.
I/F Screen Change key hereinafter.
Specifies KI-instruction number directly. Calls up input screen for the

workpiece instruction data during
block teaching.
Activates program editing function. Switches the setting of J/E (Jump /

(Selects screens other than block teaching End) instruction.
screen, such as: AS language teaching,
pose teaching, program editing screens.)
Registers input data
Changes the active screen each time it is Closes the currently activated
pressed. Called Screen Change monitor screen.
hereinafter.
2-9
Puts the robot into hold (stop) state. Puts the robot into run (active) state.
2.5 TEACH PENDANT DISPLAY SCREEN
A liquid crystal display is provided on the TP. The screen is divided into 3 areas: A, B and C.
A area
B area
C area
B and C areas have active and inactive states, and the functions inside active areas are operable.
The procedures below describe how to distinguish between active and inactive states and to
switch between the two states.
2.5.1 ACTIVE/INACTIVE
To distinguish which area is active or currently selected, windows and characters in the B and C
areas have different colors in teach and repeat modes. Refer to the table below.
B area C area
Teach mode Repeat mode Teach mode Repeat mode
Active Blue Green Blue
Inactive Gray
2-10
2.5.2 SWITCHING ACTIVE AREAS
Pressing Screen Change makes either the B or C area active. Pressing B area directly also
activates the B area.
[ NOTE ]
1. Switching of active areas or screens is not possible when error messages,
warnings and confirmation boxes are on screen.
2. The screens cannot be switched by an external signal.
2.6 OPERATION KEYS ON TEACH PENDANT SCREEN
TP screen consists of several operation keys and display areas.
This section describes the function of the operation keys, including:

F (function) keys, operation keys other than the F keys, and operation keys displayed only on
repeat mode screen. Appearance of TP screen differs slightly depending on robot application.
The screen for spot welding and handling applications is shown below.
2.6.1 OPERATION KEYS OTHER THAN F (FUNCTION) KEYS
This section describes operation keys 1-6 shown below. When pressing A, keys 4 and 6 change
as shown below right.
When pressing A
1 2 3
4 4
5 6 6
2-11
When pressed with A

No. Operation key Functions
Operation key Function
1 Unavailable Activates/stops a robot.
When robot is stopped,
“HOLD” is displayed.
When robot is activated,
“RUN” is displayed as
shown on the left.
2 Unavailable Turns ON/OFF motor
power.
When motor power turns
ON, the key lights up as
shown on the left.
3 Unavailable Turns ON the cycle
operation.
The key lights up as shown
on the left while cycle
operation is ON.
4 Displays the Auxiliary For standard spec., displays
Function screen when this the Auxiliary Function
key is pressed. screen when this key is
pressed.
For servo welding

gun/sealing spec., displays
the screen for setting the
data of spot welding/sealing
operation.
2-12
When pressed with A

Operation key Function
5 <Coord(inates)> key. Sets
the coordinate system for
manual operation in teach
mode. Key changes as
follows each time it is
pressed:
Joint (coordinates) → Base
(coordinates) → Tool
(coordinates) → Joint
(coordinates)
This icon is displayed during

QTOOL ON, and the tool
number is displayed on
lower right of icon.
Toggles among T1 → T2 →
…→ T9.
Fixed tool number displays

on lower right of icon when
robot system is specified as
Fixed Tool Mode (option).
Toggles among:
F1 → F2 → F3…→ F9.
6 Selects the speed level for Selects the speed level for
manual operation. the check speed. Pressing
Pressing the key switches the key switches between
between levels (1 to 5, 1 for levels (1 to 5).
inching)
Note: Pressing JOG in
teach (manual) speed
1 or 2 moves robot in
teach speed 3.
2-13
2.6.2 F KEYS (FUNCTION KEYS)
The table below describes the function of the F keys (1-12) on teach mode screen for handling/
spot welding specification. When A is pressed, F keys change as shown on the right. Note
that different F keys appear on repeat mode screen. For more details, refer to Chapter 2.6.3.
The F keys for sealing specification, refer to Chapter 16.
F keys (normal state) F keys when pressed with A
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
Operation When pressed with A key

No. Functions
key Operation Functions
1 Unavailable Unavailable
2 (Unavailable when the icon is Selects whether or not to

shown shaded.) enable RPS. The current
status is indicated on the F
key. When RPS is enabled,
“RPS” is displayed in the
status area on the right part of
the teach screen. Press this
key to switch between RPS
ON and RPS OFF.
3 Displays indicated items of Displays indicated items of
Monitor 1.(e.g., axis data).. Monitor 1.(e.g., axis data).
4 Displays indicated items of Displays indicated items of

Monitor 2. (e.g., axis data). Monitor 2. (e.g., axis data).
2-14
Operation When pressed with A key

No. Functions
key Operation Functions
6 Records jump and end (Unavailable when the icon is

instructions. Toggles between shown shaded.)
jump and end instructions: OFF
→ J → E → OFF
7 Displays name of IO signal Displays name of IO signal
taught in current step. Nothing taught in current step.
displays if signal not taught in Nothing displays if signal not
selected step. taught in selected step.
8 Sets the tool number as the (Unavailable when the icon is
parameter value for the tool shown shaded.)
instruction. Number shown on
key is currently selected tool
number.
9 (Unavailable when the icon is Turns ON/OFF manual
shown shaded.) welding. Red sparks are
shown when welding is ON.
10 Turns ON/OFF the clamp Unavailable for pneumatic
instruction for spot welding by gun. For servo weld gun,
using pneumatic gun,. Set data see the optional manual
(O/C) of OC instruction and set “Servo Weld Gun Instruction
number (0-9) of CC instruction Manual”.
are displayed at the bottom of
the icon. For details, see
Chapter 5. For servo weld gun,
see the optional manual “Servo
Weld Gun Instruction Manual”.
12 Sends output signal manually. Sends output signal

Also resets all the signals when manually. Also resets all
setting the signal number to 0. the signals when setting the
signal number to 0.
2-15
2.6.3 OPERATION KEYS ON REPEAT MODE SCREEN
This section describes functions of operation keys displayed on repeat mode screen (labeled 1 and
2 in screen below). When A is pressed, key 2 changes as shown on the right.
F key (normal status) F key when pressing A
When pressed with A

Operation key Functions
*
1 Sets repeat conditions . Unavailable
Current setting is
displayed on the key.
2 (Unavailable when the Used to execute steps

icon is shown shaded.) one by one when [Step
Once] is selected.
NOTE* There are four (4) repeat conditions as shown in the table below. Pressing this key
displays keys for selecting Step Once/Continuous and Repeat Continuous/Once as shown
below. Press the key and set repeat conditions. The repeat conditions can also be set
by the method shown in Chapter 2.7.1.3.
2-16
Step
ONCE CONTINUOUS
Executes one step and then stops. The steps are executed continuously.
(Cycle operation stays ON.) Program execution stops when the last
ONCE
Pressing A + <Step Forward> executes step* is reached.

the next step.
Program execution stops at the last step*.
Steps are executed one by one as above. The steps are executed continuously, and
Repeat
(Cycle operation stays ON.) when the last step* is reached, program
Pressing A + <Step Forward> executes repeats from the first step.
CONTINUOUS
the next step. When RPS is ON, execution program is

When the last step* is reached, program changed by program selection signal at
repeats from the first step. the step with END instruction.
When RPS is ON, execution program is This is the setting for normal repeat
changed by program selection signal at operations.
the step with END instruction.
NOTE* The step with either largest step number or END instruction
2.7 DETAILS OF DISPLAY AREAS OF THE TEACH PENDANT
A and B areas of the TP screen are divided into nine areas (1-10) as shown below. This section
describes their names and their functions. Icons on the upper right screen change according to
the robot status.
1 2 3 4 6
5
7
8
10
2-17
No. Areas Description

1 Teach/Repeat Area Displays the information on Teach/Repeat mode. The
color of the window changes to blue in Teach mode and to
green in Repeat mode.
2 Program/Comment Area Top row displays the current program number.
Second row displays the program comment. Pressing this
area displays a pull-down menu. For details, see Chapter
2.7.1.
3 Step Area Top row displays the current step number.
Second row displays the axis coincidence comment.
Pressing this area displays a pull-down menu. For details,
see Chapter 2.7.1.
4 PC Program Area Displays information about the currently executing PC
program. Max. five programs can be run, and three
programs run first are displayed here. The PC program
which is being executed has a * on its left.
5 Message Area Displays error messages and various information.
6 Repeat Speed Area Displays the monitor speed when operating robot in repeat
mode. Pressing this area displays a pull-down menu.
For details, see Chapter 2.7.1.
7 Element Instructions Displays the element instructions that are included in a
Setting Area compound instruction.
(Element instructions row)
8 Parameter Values Setting Displays parameter values, including auxiliary data and
Area excluding pose data, for element instructions in currently
(Parameter row) displayed step.
9 Program Area Displays the content of the taught program. Pressing this
(Auxiliary data row) area displays the pull-down menu. For details, see
Chapter 2.7.1.
10 Status Area Displays the current robot status.
(Area enclosed with a 1. Items that are always displayed in fixed places:
dotted line) Error, AUTO, CHK cont/CHK once, Waiting
2. Items that are displayed in various places as they occur:
(Some are not displayed depending on the spec.)
External hold, Emergency stop, Gun No., Dry run, etc.
3. Items that are displayed in fixed places when necessary:
Wait cancel
2-18
2.7.1 PULL-DOWN MENU FUNCTIONS
Pull-down menus are provided in the areas indicated by 2, 3, 6 and 9 in Chapter 2.7. The
pull-down menu functions of each area are explained below.
2.7.1.1 PROGRAM/COMMENT AREA
The pull-down menu in this area has seven functions. Refer to the figure below.
！ CAUTION
The TP display is pressure sensitive and items on screen can be

selected by fingers, pens, pointers, etc. However, use caution not
to soil or damage the screen’s liquid crystal during operations.
[ NOTE ]
1. The cursor is on [CALL PROGRAM] when the pull-down menu is displayed.
2. The pull-down menu closes when switching active areas or screens while the
menu is displayed.
1. [NOW PROGRAM]
Displays the name of the current program. When teaching a new program, nothing is
displayed.
2. [CALL PROGRAM]
The desired program can be created or an existing program can be selected by inputting its
number if the program name consists of “pg” and a number. (Only the program number
without “pg” is displayed.) Display the pull-down menu, and specify it by the following
method.
2-19
(1) Press NUMBER (0-9). (Specifies the program name.)
(2) Pressing ↵ displays the specified program name in the [NOW PROGRAM] and the
program/comment area.
[ NOTE ]
1. When inputting a wrong number, press R and re-enter.
2. This operation is possible only when the program name consists of “pg”
and numbers. Programs can have a max. of five digits in its name.
3. [Directory]
Displays a list of registered programs, and the desired program can be chosen from the list.
After displaying the pull-down menu, choose it by the following method.
(1) Move the cursor to [Directory] and press ↵ to display the program selection screen as
shown below. When the screen has more than one page, press <Next Page> or
<Prev. Page>.
(2) Move cursor to a desired program and press ↵. Or, move cursor to <Input> and press
↵ to display the keyboard screen, input the program name, and press ↵ or <ENTER> on
the keyboard screen*.
NOTE* Refer to Chapter 2.8 for more information about the keyboard screen.
(3) The selected program name is displayed in the program/comment area.

[ NOTE ]
1. When inputting a wrong program number in step (2), press BS and re-enter.
2. Close this function by pressing R at the program selection screen.
2-20
4. [Copy]
Copies the content of the selected program. After displaying the pull-down menu, copy it by
the following method.
(1) Move the cursor to [Copy] and press ↵ to display the program copy screen as shown below.
(2) Select the program to copy and press ↵ to display the keyboard screen as shown below.
Input the program name for the copy destination and press <ENTER> on the keyboard
screen. (An error occurs when an existing program name is input.)
(3) Teach screen is redisplayed after copying the selected program.
[ NOTE ]
Close the copy function by pressing R at the program
selection screen.
2-21
5. [Delete]
Deletes a selected program. After displaying the pull-down menu, delete it by the following
method.
(1) Move the cursor to [Delete] and press ↵ to display the delete screen as shown below.
Select the program to delete and press ↵. Or, move cursor to <Input> and press ↵ to
display the keyboard screen, input the program name, and press ↵ or <ENTER> on the
keyboard screen*.
(2) The confirmation box is displayed as shown below.
(3) Selecting [Yes] deletes the selected program and redisplays the teach screen.
(4) Selecting [No] redisplays the teach screen without deleting the selected program.
2-22
[ NOTE ]
1. [No] is selected by default when confirmation dialog is displayed.
2. Close the delete function by pressing R at the program selection screen.
6. [PG Comment Input]
Inserts comments in the comment area of the selected program. After displaying the
pull-down menu, input by the following method.
(1) Select the program to input a comment into. For the procedure for the program selection,
see “2. CALL PROGRAM” or “3. Directory”.
(2) Redisplay the pull-down menu, move cursor to [PG Comment Input] and press ↵ to
display the comment input screen as shown below
(3) Input a comment in the keyboard screen and press <ENTER> on the keyboard*.
(4) Teach screen is redisplayed, and the input comment (up to 18 one-byte characters) is now
displayed for the selected program.
2-23
[ NOTE ]
Close this function by pressing R at the comment input screen.
7. [Cancel register]
Clears the program from the program/comment area. After displaying the pull-down menu,
cancel the program by the following procedure.
(1) Move the cursor to [Cancel register] and press ↵ to display the confirmation box as
shown below.
(2) Selecting [Yes] cancels the program registration. Program and comment area become
blank. Selecting [No] keeps the program.
[ NOTE ]
[No] is selected when the confirmation box is displayed.
2-24
2.7.1.2 STEP AREA
The pull-down menu in this area has the following functions.
[ NOTE ]
The cursor is on [CALL STEP] when the pull-down menu is displayed.
1. [NOW STEP]
Displays the currently selected step number. When teaching a new program, nothing is
displayed.
2. [CALL STEP]
Selects a desired step by input of the step number. Display the pull-down menu, and specify
it by the following method.
(1) Press NUMBER (0-9). (Specifies the step number.)
(2) Pressing ↵ displays the specified program step in the [NOW STEP] and the step area.
[ NOTE ]
Displays the last step automatically when the input number
is larger than the last step number in the program.
3. [Bottom]
Selects the last step in the program. After displaying the pull-down menu, select the last step
by the following:
(1) Move cursor to [Bottom].
(2) Press ↵ to display the last step of the program in the [NOW STEP] and the step area.
2-25
！ DANGER
The robot starts to move to the selected step from its stopped pose if the
cycle operation is started after the step has been changed. Ensure all
safety measures are in effect so that the robot, workpiece(s) and tool (s) do
not crash into or interfere with peripheral equipment and that all
personnel are clear of the work cell.
4. [Copy]
Copies the content of selected steps. After displaying the pull-down menu, copy it by the
following method.
(1) Move the cursor to [Copy] and press ↵ to display the Transfer Data screen as shown
below.
(2) Move the cursor to a desired item referring the table below, and input data.
Item Description
[Source Program] Specifies the program to transfer.
[Source Step Number] Specifies the first program step to transfer.
[Number of Transfer Steps] Specifies the number of steps to transfer.
[Destination Program] Specifies the destination program to which the specified steps
are transferred.
[Destination Step Number] Specifies the first program step to receive the transferred steps
data from. Specifying 0 transfers the steps after the last step of
the destination program.
2-26
(3) Input required data, and press ↵.
(4) Confirmation box is displayed. If it is OK, select [Yes].
(5) The specified steps will be copied and placed as consecutive steps from the step specified
as the destination step number.
5. [Delete]
Deletes selected step(s). After displaying the pull-down menu, delete by the following
method.
(1) Move the cursor to [Delete] and press ↵ to display the step delete screen as shown below.
(2) Input the start step number to delete and press ↵. Then, input the end step number to
delete and press ↵.
2-27
(3) The confirmation box is displayed as shown below.
(4) Selecting [Yes] deletes the selected steps and returns to the teach screen.
(5) Selecting [No] returns to the teach screen without deleting the selected steps.
[ NOTE ]
1. [No] is selected by default when confirmation dialog is displayed.
2. Close the delete function by pressing R at the step delete screen.
6. [Input Comment]
Input comments in the comment area for the selected step. After displaying the pull-down
menu, input comment following the procedure below.
(1) Move cursor to [Input comment] and press ↵ to display the comment input screen as
shown below.
(2) Input a comment in the keyboard screen*.
2-28
(3) Pressing <ENTER> on the keyboard registers the comment input in step 2 (up to 30
one-byte characters) and returns to the teach screen. Press ←/→ to display the
comment.
[ NOTE ]
Close this function by pressing R at the comment input screen.
7. [Search Comment]
Searches the step where the comment data is registered. After displaying the pull-down menu,
execute search following the procedure below.
(1) Display the pull-down menu, move cursor to [Search Comment] and press ↵ to start
searching.
(2) The retrieved step number is displayed in the step area. When there are two or more
comments, the screen below is displayed. Select <To next> to continue or <Finish> to
end searching.
(3) The teach screen is redisplayed after the search is complete.
2-29
2.7.1.3 REPEAT SPEED DISPLAY AREA
The pull-down menu, which is displayed by pressing this area, contains eight functions. See the
figure below.
NOTE* The numbers are red and the background is blue in repeat speeds 1 % to 99 %.
At 100 %, numbers are white and the background is red.
[ NOTE ]
1. Pressing Repeat Speed Display Area again or R closes the pull-down menu.
Displaying another pull-down menu will also close this menu.
2. Except when data is changed by [▲+10 %] or [▼-10 %], the pull-down menu
is closed after the setting.
3. The cursor is on [Specify] when pull-down menu is displayed.
1. [Specify]
Sets the repeat speed as a percentage of the maximum speed. Display the pull-down menu
and select by the following method.
(1) Press NUMBER (0-9) to set the desired speed.
(2) Press ↵ to set the repeat speed to the value input above.
[ NOTE ]
1. Standard input values are 1-100.
2. Speed setting of over 100 is acceptable as option.
2-30
2. ▲+10 %
Increases repeat speed in 10 % increments from the current value. Display the pull-down
menu and set by the following method.
(1) Move cursor to [▲+10 %].
(2) Current repeat speed increases by 10 % every time [▲+10 %] or ↵ is pressed.

However, take note that pressing [▲+10 %] or ↵ the first time raises the speed to a 10 %
unit. For example, pressing [▲+10 %] or ↵ at 72 % setting changes the speed to 80 %.
After this, the speed increases by 10 %.
(3) Press R at the desired value.

[ NOTE ]
1. Highest possible setting is 100 % in this operation.
2. The numbers and the background turn white and red respectively
only at 100 % or more setting, and turn red and blue respectively
below 100 %.
3. ▼-10 %
Decreases the repeat speed in 10 % increments from the current value. Display the
pull-down menu and set by the following method.
(1) Move cursor to [▼-10 %].
(2) Current repeat speed decreases by 10 % every time [▼-10 %] or ↵ is pressed.

However, take note that pressing [▼-10 %] or ↵ the first time reduces the speed to a
10 % unit. For example, pressing [▼-10 %] or ↵ at the 38 % setting changes the speed
to 30 %. After this, the speed decreases by 10 %.
(3) Press R at the desired value.

[ NOTE ]
Lowest possible setting is 10 % in this operation.
2-31
4. [Repeat: Cont/Once]
Sets how to run the program, repeatedly or only once. Display the pull-down menu and
select by the following method.
(1) Move cursor to [Repeat: Cont/Once].
(2) Pressing ↵ toggles between: Repeat Cont → Repeat Once → Repeat Cont.
5. [Step: Cont/Once]
Sets how to execute the program steps, continuously or in one step increments. Display the
pull-down menu and select by the following method.
(1) Move cursor to [Step: Cont/Once].
(2) Pressing ↵ toggles between: Step Cont → Step Once → Step Cont.
[ NOTE ]
When set to Step Once, robot does not move to the next step even if
CHECK GO is pressed.
6. [RPS: ON/OFF]
Enables or disables the RPS function during repeat mode. RPS allows switching to the
program specified by external signals. Display the pull-down menu and select by the
following method.
(1) Move cursor to [RPS: ON/OFF].
(2) Pressing ↵ toggles between: RPS ON → RPS OFF → RPS ON. “RPS” is displayed in
the status area when it is enabled.
[ NOTE ]
Set RPS conditions in Aux. 0502.
2-32
7. [Dry Run]
To check the program contents or input/output signal condition without moving the robot,
select Dry Run ON. Display the pull-down menu and select by the following method.
(1) Move cursor to [Dry Run: ON/OFF].
(2) Pressing ↵ toggles between: Dry Run ON → Dry Run OFF → Dry Run ON. “Dry
RUN” is displayed in the status area when it is enabled.
Follow the procedure in Chapter 6.2 to perform operations after setting.
！ CAUTION
Setting Dry Run OFF allows the robot to move during repeat
operation. Be aware when setting Dry Run ON and OFF.
8. [Manual Weld Mode]
Used in servo weld gun application. For more details, refer to the optional manual, a separate
volume.
2.7.1.4 PROGRAM AREA (B AREA)
This area contains a pull-down menu and displays the following eight screens as shown below.
To display the pull-down menu, activate B area and press MENU, or press the B area window
directly.
NOTE* [Upsize]/[Down size] is displayed on the pull-down menu when the teach screen is
displayed on B area. [Teach screen] is displayed on the pull-down menu when screens
other than the teach screen (Auxiliary function, I/F panel etc.) are displayed on B area.
2-33
1.-(1) [Teach screen]
Displays the teach screen by default in the B area. Use this screen to teach or edit a robot
program. Clamp instructions data is displayed on the next page and subsequent pages, as
shown in lower screen below. Pressing A + ←/→ changes pages. See Chapter 5 for
more details on this screen.
Clamp 1 data Clamp 2 data
OC No.
ON/OFF
information CC No.
WS No.
1.-(2) [Upsize]/[Down size]

Selecting [Upsize] enlarges and displays the contents of B area in the combined area of B
and C areas. To restore the window size, select [Down size].
2. [Auxiliary function]
Displays the auxiliary function screen. Use this screen to set various kinds of robot data.
Refer to Chapter 8 for more details on this screen.
2-34
3. [I/F panel]
Displays the I/F(Interface) panel screen. This screen provides the switches, lamps and
functions necessary for operating robots and peripheral equipment. The screen below is an
example. See Chapter 9 for more details on this screen.
4. [Data storage]
Displays the data storage screen. This screen displays data such as joint angle, speed,
deviation, I/O, etc. in graph form. The screen below is an example. Refer to a separate
option manual for more details on this screen.
2-35
5. [Keyboard]
Displays the keyboard screen. Use this screen to input characters such as a program name,
the comments, etc. See Chapter 2.8 for more details on this screen.
6. [KLogic ladder display]
Displays the KLogic ladder screen. The screen below is an example. Refer to a separate
option manual for more details on this screen.
7. [Monitor 1]
Displays the Monitor 1 menu screen. Select the information to be monitored by this screen.
C area displays the monitor screen with the selected information. See Chapter 2.9 for more
details on this screen.
2-36
8. [Monitor 2]
Displays the Monitor 2 menu screen. Select the information to be monitored by this screen.
C area displays the monitor screen with the selected information. When selecting both
Monitor 1 and Monitor 2, both monitor screens are displayed side by side.
2.8 KEYBOARD SCREEN
The keyboard screen display covers 78 columns and 15 rows. The section below describes how
to input characters.
2.8.1 KEYBOARD OPERATION
Keyboard is shown below. Operation procedure is as follows.

Input here.
2-37
1. Method for moving the cursor
Pressing →: Moves the cursor to the right key.

Pressing ←: Moves the cursor to the left key.
Pressing ↓: Moves the cursor to the upper key.
Pressing ↑: Moves the cursor to the lower key.
2. Methods for selecting characters
There are two methods to select a character.

Press the character on the keyboard directly.
Move the cursor to the character to be input, and press ↵.
3. Using <SHIFT> - dual character keys
Characters shown on left side of key are input by default. Pressing <SHIFT> allows input of
characters on the right side. Pressing <SHIFT> again returns keys to their defaults.
4. Using <SHIFT> - upper case and lower case letters
Lower case letters are input by default. Pressing <SHIFT> allows inputting upper case letters
(capitals). Pressing <SHIFT> again returns the keys to lower case.
5. Operation of other keys
(1) When the information is too large to fit on one screen, the display scrolls and stops when
the screen is full. To continue viewing the information, press <NEXT>.
(2) BS deletes characters one by one. Pressing ←/→ moves the cursor in the input area.
(3) Pressing <CTRL+L> recalls the last character string that was input. Up to nine previous
strings (lines) can be recalled. Pressing <SHIFT> + <CTRL+N> recalls the next string
(line). For example, after pressing <CTRL+L> six times, pressing <SHIFT> +
<CTRL+N> three times recalls the third previous character string that was entered (string
two previous to the last one.)
[ NOTE ]
Cursor is on <!> and key input is set to lower case when the
keyboard is displayed initially.
2-38
2.8.2 USB KEYBOARD
For E series controller, USB keyboard is available while the keyboard screen is displayed on the
TP operation screen. To use the USB keyboard, connect it to the USB port inside the accessory
panel on the front side of the controller.
101 keyboard is usable as USB keyboard and has the following conditions of use.
1. Usable keys on USB keyboard are ones that are on the TP keyboard screen.
2. There is no “NEXT” key on USB keyboard. “NEXT” key is only available on the touch
panel.
2. “NEXT” key is
not available on
USB keyboard.
For setting procedures of USB keyboard, refer to Aux.0818.
2-39
2.9 MONITOR SCREEN
Up to two monitor screens (Monitor 1 and Monitor 2) can be displayed on the TP. Each of the
monitor displays accessed from this menu is updated in real time as the robot moves, as program is
executed, etc. Monitor screens are displayed in C area as shown on next page (or in center of
screen in other applications.). In the screen below, Axis data monitor and Output signal monitor
are displayed as Monitor 1 and Monitor 2, respectively. Some monitors can be displayed in the
combined area of both B and C areas.
2.9.1 DISPLAYING MONITOR SCREEN
This section describes how to display monitor screens.
1. Selecting from the pull-down menu
Press B area directly or MENU as shown in the screen below, and select [Monitor 1] or
[Monitor 2] from the pull-down menu.
2-40
The list of available monitor screens displays as shown below. Selecting an item from the
list displays the monitor information for that item.
2. Selecting by pressing the function key
Press <Monitor 1> or <Monitor 2> on the bottom part of the screen. The list of monitor
screens is displayed as shown above. Select the monitor information to display.
2.9.2 ENLARGING MONITOR SCREEN AREA
The screens of the following monitor information can be enlarged and displayed in the combined
area of both B and C areas.
5. Input signal
6. Output signal
9. I/O name monitor
13. Dedicated input signal monitor
14. Dedicated output signal monitor
25. Internal signal monitor
Follow the procedure below to enlarge and restore the monitor screens.
1. Display the monitor screen following the procedure in Chapter 2.9.1. The C area of this
screen displays Input signal monitor and the I/O name monitor as Monitor 1 and Monitor 2,
respectively.
2-41
2. Activate the monitor screen to enlarge. Display the pull-down menu by pressing the monitor
screen directly or pressing MENU.
3. Selecting [Upsize]* enlarges the monitor screen to B area. The other monitor screen closes.
NOTE* [Upsize] is not effective for the monitors which cannot be enlarged.
2-42
4. To restore the screen, press B area directly or MENU, and display the pull-down menu.
5. Selecting [Restore] restores the monitor screen.
2.9.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN MONITOR SCREEN AND FUNCTION KEY SCREEN
F keys cannot be used when a monitor screen is displayed. Follow the procedure below to
display the F keys on the front screen.
1. Press MENU with the monitor screen displayed. The pull-down menu is displayed.
2-43
2. Selecting [Function] from the pull-down menu displays the F keys on the front screen. The
monitor screen is now behind the F key screen.
3. Press MENU to display the pull-down menu* on the screen.
NOTE* When a monitor screen is not behind, the pull-down menu will not be displayed even
if MENU is pressed.
2-44
4. Selecting [Monitor] from the pull-down menu displays the monitor, which was behind the F
key screen, on the front screen.
2.9.4 EXAMPLE OF MONITOR FUNCTIONS
This section describes how to display monitor screens, using an example.
1. Displaying Axis data monitor on Monitor 1
(1) Select [Monitor 1] from the pull-down menu or press F key, <Monitor 1>, to display the
Monitor 1 menu.
2-45
(2) Select [2. Axis data monitor] from the Monitor 1 menu.
(3) Axis data monitor screen is displayed on Monitor 1.
2. Displaying Output signal monitor on Monitor 2
(1) Select [Monitor 2] from the pull-down menu or press F key, <Monitor 2>, to display the
Monitor 2 menu.
2-46
(2) Select [6. Output signal] from the Monitor 2 menu.
(3) Output signal monitor is displayed on Monitor 2.
3. Hiding the monitor screen and displaying the F keys
(1) Select [Function] from the pull-down menu of Monitor.
2-47
(2) F keys are displayed.
4. Hiding the F keys and displaying the monitor screen
(1) Select [Monitor] from the pull-down menu on the F key screen.
(2) Monitor screens are displayed.
2-48
5. Closing Monitor 2
Activate Monitor 2 by pressing Screen Change, and press A + Close. Or, select [1. Monitor
OFF] from the Monitor 2 menu.
6. Closing Monitor 1
Activate Monitor 1 by pressing Screen Change, and press A + Close. Or, select [1. Monitor
OFF] from the Monitor 1 menu.
2-49
2.9.5 EXPLANATION OF EACH MONITOR
This section describes each monitor. Each of the monitor displays accessed from this menu is
updated in real time as the robot moves, program is executed, etc.
1. [Monitor OFF]
Monitor screen closes and function keys appear on C area.
2. [Axis data monitor]

Displays current pose information
(position and posture) by joint
displacement values and transformation
values, X, Y, Z, O, A and T.
3. [Error log monitor]

Displays the error log.
5. [Input signal]
Displays the input signal status.
ON-signals are highlighted in yellow.
6. [Output signal]
Displays output signal status.
ON-signals are highlighted in yellow.
Signals can be forced to output using
this screen.
2-50
9. [I/O name monitor]

Displays the list of names set to each
signal and signal status. ON-signals
are highlighted in yellow. Signals
without a name are not displayed.
10. [Location & speed display]

Data selected from this menu is
displayed in real time.
10.1 [Joint angle]

Displays the current axis values (joint
angles).
10.2 [XYZOAT]
Displays the transformation values of
the tool coordinates relative to the base
coordinates.
10.3 [Joint command]

Displays axis command values.
10.4 [Joint deviation]

Displays axis deviation.
2-51
10.5 [Joint encoder value]

Displays current encoder values for
each axis.
10.6 [Joint speed]

Displays axis speeds.
10.7 [XYZOAT including external axis]

Displays the transformation values of
tool coordinates relative to the world
coordinates, incorporating the motion
of the external axis.
10.9 [XYZOAT command]

Displays the pose command values for
tool coordinates relative to the base
coordinates.
10.10 [Motor current]

Displays motor current to axis as the
current value of the q-coordinate axis.
10.11 [Motor speed]

Displays motor speeds of each axis.
2-52
10.14 [Motor current command]

Displays motor current command
values of the q-coordinate axis to each
axis motor.
10.15 [Encoder original data]

Displays encoder original data of each
axis.
11. [Operation logging]

Displays the operation log.
12. [Recorded I/O monitor]

Displays the numbers and names of the
I/O signals taught in the selected steps.
13. [Dedicated input signals monitor]

Displays the dedicated input signals
currently set. ON-signals are
highlighted in yellow.
2-53
14. [Dedicated output signals monitor]

Displays the dedicated output signals
currently set. ON-signals are
highlighted in yellow.
23. [Encoder Comm. Err Counter]

Displays the number of communication
errors that have occurred in each axis
encoder.
24. [DIAG monitor]

Displays information for the hardware
selected from this menu.
24.1 [Safe_cir monitor 1]

Monitors the safety circuit status on the
power sequence board.
24.2 [Safe_cir monitor 2]

Monitors the safety circuit status of the
servo board and the MC unit.
24.3 [Fan rotation speed monitor]

Displays rotation speeds of the fans
provided on each MC unit.
2-54
24.4 [PN voltage monitor]

Displays the PN voltages of each MC
unit.
24.5 [Regeneration duty monitor]

Displays duty ratios of each MC unit.
24.6 [Communication I/F monitor]

Displays the monitor screens for
communication interfaces.
24.6-1 [RS232C I/F monitor]

Conducts the RS232C I/F monitor
function test. When no error is
detected, displays “RS232C interface
works normally”. When error is
detected, displays “(D4000) [DIAG]
Error is detected in RS232C. (Code: xx)”.
24.6-2 [Ethernet I/F monitor]
Conducts the Ethernet port I/F monitor
function test. When no error is
detected, displays “Ethernet interface
works normally”. When an error is
detected, displays “(D4001) [DIAG]
Error is detected in Ethernet. (Code: xx)”.
2-55
24.7 [Lifetime alarm monitor]

Displays the lifetime of the MC unit and
TP backlight.
24.8 [CPU temperature monitor]

Displays the current temperature of the
CPU on the main CPU board (1TA
board). The displayed values indicate:
“current temperature”/“the temperature
at which error occurs”.
25. [Internal signal]
Displays internal signals of the I/O
signal monitor (signals 2000-2999 for
AS). ON-signals are highlighted in
yellow.
80. [KLogic monitor]

Displays menu to select either of Klogic
monitor items.
80.1 [Basic operation]

Displays KLogic information on basic
operations.
80.2 [Numeric operation]

Displays KLogic information on
numeric operations.
2-56
2.10 ERROR SCREEN
When an error occurs during operation of the robot, an error screen is displayed as shown below.
There are two ways to reset an error.
1. Procedure for error reset - 1
Move the cursor to <RESET> and press ↵ to close the error screen, and the message “Cleared
error state.” appears in the system message area.
2-57
2. Procedure for error reset - 2
(1) Move the cursor to <CLOSE> and press ↵ to close the error screen. This displays the
content of the error and <Error Reset> in the system message area.
(2) Press <Error Reset> to reset the error.
[ NOTE ]
1. The latest error is displayed. When several errors occur simultaneously, a
maximum of five errors can be displayed.
2. To redisplay the previous error screen, press the system message area without
pressing <Error Reset >.
3. Switching to other screens is not possible while the error screen is displayed.
4. If error state does not release even after pressing <Error Reset>, then the content
of the second error will be displayed.
2-58
2.11 WARNING SCREEN
This section describes the procedures for responding to a warning state.
When a warning state occurs, a screen is displayed as shown below.
There are two ways in which to respond to a warning state.
1. To reset,
(1) Move the cursor to <RESET> and press ↵.
(2) The warning screen closes and “Cleared error state.” appears in the system message area.
2. To close the screen,
(1) Move the cursor to <Close> and press ↵.
(2) The warning screen closes and the content of the warning and <Error Reset> appears in
the system message area.
(3) Press <Error Reset> to reset the warning. To redisplay the warning screen, press the
system message area without pressing <Error Reset>.
[ NOTE ]
Switching to other screens is not possible while warning screen is displayed.
2-59
2.12 HELP SCREEN
This section describes how to display the help screen.
1. Help screen on auxiliary functions
When the auxiliary function screen is displayed, pressing A+HELP displays the help screen on
auxiliary functions. When more than one page is available, scroll the screen by pressing
< >/< >.
«
2. Help screen created by customers
When either the teach screen or interface panel screen is displayed, pressing A+HELP displays
the text files created by customers as a help screen.
2-60
A help file can be created as follows.
(1) Create the help in a text file. Decorated characters such as boldface and italic face can
be displayed by adding the following tags at the head of the string. Several tags can be
added.
Tag Function
<b> Displays the line with the tag in bold.
<i> Displays the line with the tag in italic.
<title> Displays the line in title format. (The line cannot be displayed in either
bold or italic.)
<number> Indents by the specified number of spaces. (Range: 1-99)
(2) Save the text file with the following name.

Teach screen: Teach0J.txt *
Interface panel screen: Ifpnl10J.txt **
NOTE* 1. The number indicates the created file number.

2. The final alpha character indicates the language. (J: Japanese, E: English)
NOTE** 1. The first number indicates the page number, which corresponds to the page
number of the interface panel screen.
2. The second number indicates the created file number.
3. The final alpha character indicates the language. (J: Japanese, E: English)
(3) Save the file to a USB memory.
(4) Insert the USB memory into the USB port on the main CPU board, and open Aux. 0203.
(5) Copy the file to robot memory (CF) from the USB memory. See Aux. 0203 in Chapter
8 for details.
2-61
2-62
E Series Controller 3. Procedures for Power ON/OFF and
Kawasaki Robot Operation Manual Stopping the Robot
3.0 PROCEDURES FOR POWER ON/OFF AND STOPPING THE ROBOT
This chapter describes the power ON/OFF procedures for the robot controller and methods for
stopping the robot.
[ NOTE ]
This manual explains operation procedures assuming that the optional operation
panel is not used. When using the optional operation panel, both switches on
the TP and the optional operation panel can be used for turning ON/OFF motor
power and cycle operation start. However, for the robot activation (RUN),
robot will not activate unless both settings of the TP and optional operation panel
are RUN. That is, if the setting of the optional operation panel is HOLD, robot
cannot be activated even if A+RUN on the TP is pressed.
3.1 POWER ON PROCEDURE
Ensure that all personnel are clear of the work cell, and that all safety devices are in place and
operational. Follow the steps below to turn ON the controller power first, and then the motor
power.
！ WARNING
When turning ON the controller power and motor power of the
robot controller, thorough attention should be taken to prevent
personnel from entering the motion range of the robot and the
peripheral equipment controlled by the robot controller. The
robot may move or operate accidentally when turning ON the
motor power, if the robot servo system is damaged.
3.1.1 CONTROLLER POWER ON PROCEDURE
1. Confirm that the external power is supplied to the controller.
2. Press the CONTROLLER POWER on the upper left portion of the controller front.
3-1
3.1.2 MOTOR POWER ON PROCEDURE
1. Ensure that all personal are clear of the work cell, and that all safety devices are in place and
operational. (e.g.: door on safety fence is closed and safety plug is inserted, etc.)
2. Press A + MOTOR ON on the TP to turn ON. The motor power turns ON and the
<MOTOR> lamp on the top right of the TP screen illuminates at this time.*
NOTE* If motor power does not turn ON, read the contents displayed in the error screen and
system message area and restore the system accordingly, and then press
A + MOTOR ON again.
！ DANGER
Before turning ON the controller power and the motor
power, ensure that all personnel are clear of the work cell and
that no interfering objects are around the robot(s).
3.2 POWER OFF PROCEDURE
Stop the robot and shut down the controller in the reverse order in which it was turned ON.
However, in the case of emergency, press the EMERGENCY STOP immediately to cut OFF the
motor power. Refer to Chapter 3.3 for more details about emergency stop.
1. Confirm the robot has completely stopped. Refer to Chapter 3.3 for more details.
2. Press HOLD or A+<RUN> on the TP.
3. Press the EMERGENCY STOP on the controller or the TP to cut OFF the motor power.*
NOTE* In repeat mode, turning the TEACH/REPEAT on the controller to TEACH also cuts
OFF the motor power.
4. After the <MOTOR> lamp on the TP screen turns OFF, shut OFF the power by turning OFF
the CONTROLLER POWER on the upper left portion of the controller front.
3-2
！ WARNING
1. Refer to the “External I/O Manual”, a separate volume, for
power OFF methods using external signals.
2. When shutting down the controller power, press the
EMERGENCY STOP to cut OFF the motor power first,
then turn OFF the CONTROLLER POWER.
3.3 METHOD FOR STOPPING THE ROBOT
The methods for stopping the robot are different in teach mode and repeat mode.
1. In teach mode,
(1) Release the DEADMAN on the TP.
(2) Confirm that the robot has come to a complete stop, and press HOLD or A+<RUN> on
the TP.
2. In repeat mode,
(1) Set the [Step] to [Step Once], or repeat condition to [Repeat Once]. Refer to Chapter
2.7.1.3 for more details.
(2) Confirm that the robot has come to a complete stop, and press HOLD or A+<RUN> on
the TP.
！ CAUTION
1. After robot has stopped, cut OFF power to the motors to disable
any further motion by pressing EMERGENCY STOP.
2. Once motor power has been cut OFF, take measures to prevent
personnel from accidentally turning ON the power supply (tag
and lock out power switches, etc.).
3-3
3. In emergency stop,
When the robot works abnormally and there is a possibility of danger such as injury, press
immediately any EMERGENCY STOP wherever they are located, on the controller front,
TP, safety fence etc. to cut off the motor power.
Applying emergency stop may cause the error screen to pop up. To restart the robot from
this condition, reset errors before turning ON the motor power. Refer to Chapter 6.4 for
more details.
！ DANGER
Before moving the robot, ensure that all EMERGENCY STOP on

the TP, controller and external emergency stop switches, etc. are
working correctly.
3-4
E Series Controller 4. Manual Operation of Robot
4.0 MANUAL OPERATION OF ROBOT
This chapter describes methods for operating the robot manally, the names of operation axes, the
movement mode, etc.
4.1 METHOD FOR BASIC OPERATION
This section describes the standard methods for operating the robot manually.
4.1.1 NAMES OF EACH AXIS
A robot is normally equipped with six axes as shown in figure below. These axes are called JT1,
…JT6 in order of axis construction.
JT4
JT5
JT3
JT6
JT1
JT2
4.1.2 PROCEDURE FOR MANUAL OPERATION OF THE 6 AXES
To move a robot, follow the procedure described below.
1. Turn ON the CONTROLLER POWER and confirm that the controller power lamp
illuminates.
2. On the operation panel of the controller, turn the TEACH/REPEAT to the TEACH position,
and press HOLD or A+<RUN> to put the robot into HOLD state.
4-1
3. Turn ON the TEACH LOCK on the TP.
[ NOTE ]
Cycle operation cannot be executed if TEACH LOCK is OFF, even
though TEACH/REPEAT is set to TEACH.
4. Press COORD or <Coord> to set the manual operation mode: Joint, Base or Tool.
5. Set the manual speed by pressing TEACH SPEED or <MAN. SPEED>. To move only a
very small, specified distance, select speed 1 for inching.
6. When steps 1 to 5 are complete, turn ON the motor power by pressing A + MOTOR ON on
the TP.
7. Press A+RUN or A+<HOLD> on the TP.
8. While depressing DEADMAN on back of TP, move robot by pressing the AXIS (marked 1 -
6). The robot will continue to move as long as the keys are pressed.
9. Releasing the AXIS or the DEADMAN on the TP stops the robot.
！ WARNING
Whenever the robot is operated manually inside the safety fence,

position yourself so that you can press the EMERGENCY STOP
to stop the robot at any time in emergency.
10. Finish the manual operation.
4.1.3 PROCEDURE FOR MANUAL OPERATION OF THE 7TH AXIS (OPTION)
The seventh axis (option) is an additional axis such as traverse axis, servo weld gun driving axis,
etc. Manual operation method is the same as when operating the standard six axes. While
depressing DEADMAN switch on TP, move axis by pressing the AXIS (marked 7).
4-2
4.1.4 MANUAL OPERATION OF AXES 8 TO 18 (OPTION)
This controller can control a maximum of 18 axes. Manual operation of these axes is the same
as that for the seventh axis. To operate, first select either group JT8 to JT14 or JT15 to JT18 by
pressing Ext. Axis(Robot).
Press Ext. Axis(Robot) once to illuminate LED on bottom of this key. Then, operate JT8 to
JT14 by AXIS, the same as when operating axes JT1 to JT7.
Press Ext. Axis(Robot) twice to illuminate LED on top of this key. Then, operate JT15 to JT18
by AXIS, the same as when operating axes JT1 to JT4.
4.2 MANUAL OPERATION MODE OF ROBOT
This section describes the manual operation mode.
4.2.1 MANUAL OPERATION MODE BASED ON JOINT COORDINATES
Press COORD or <Coord> to change the mode display to manual operation based on joint
coordinates. When this mode is selected, the robot axes can be moved individually as shown in
the figure below. When pressing several AXIS at the same time, the robot axes can be moved
simultaneously in combination.
JT4
JT5
JT3
JT6
JT1
JT2
4-3
Each axis movement based on joint coordinates
JT1: Left and right rotation of arm JT4: Rotation of wrist axis (1)
JT2: Back and forth motion of arm JT5: Rotation of wrist axis (2)
JT3: Up and down motion of arm JT6: Rotation of wrist axis (3)
4-4
4.2.2 MANUAL OPERATION BASED ON BASE COORDINATES
Press COORD or <Coord> to change the mode display to manual operation based on the base
coordinates. When this mode is selected, the robot axes can be moved based on the base
coordinate system. When pressing several AXIS at the same time, the robot axes can be moved
in combination.
Base coordinate operation will differ in motion direction depending on the coordinates
transformation to the null-base coordinates. Figure below is based on the null-base coordinates.
Base coordinates
4-5
Compound movement based on the base coordinates. When looking in the positive direction of
each base coordinate, clockwise rotation is positive.
X: Motion of arm parallel to base RX Rotation around base X coordinate

X coordinate (Wrist orientation (- dir. toward viewer) (Tool center
is constant.) point (TCP) does not move.)
Y: Motion of arm parallel to base Y RY Rotation around base Y coordinate

coordinate (Wrist orientation is (+ is JT2 forward dir.) (TCP does
constant.) not move.)
Z: Motion of arm parallel to base Z RZ Rotation around base Z coordinate

coordinate (Wrist orientation is (+ dir. toward viewer) (TCP does
constant.) not move.)
4-6
4.2.3 MANUAL OPERATION BASED ON TOOL COORDINATES
Press COORD or <Coord> to change the mode display to manual operation based on the tool
coordinates. When this mode is selected, the robot axes can be moved based on the tool
coordinate system.
Tool coordinate system is defined on the tool which is installed on JT6. The tool coordinates
change whenever the pose of the robot changes. Operations based on this tool coordinate
system will differ in motion direction depending on the coordinates transformation to the null-tool
coordinates. Tool coordinates also change when wrist orientation changes as shown in figures
below, even though only the forearm moves without moving wrist axes.
When forearm is horizontal.
When forearm faces downward.
4-7
Compound movement based on the tool coordinates
When looking in the positive direction of each tool coordinate, clockwise rotation is positive.
x: Motion of arm parallel to tool X rx: Rotation around tool X
coordinate (Wrist orientation is coordinate (- dir. toward viewer)
constant.) (TCP does not move.)
y: Motion of arm parallel to tool Y ry: Rotation around tool Y

coordinate (Wrist orientation is coordinate (- dir. toward viewer)
z Motion of arm parallel to tool Z rz: Rotation around tool Z

coordinate (Wrist orientation is coordinate (+ is JT2 forward dir.)
4-8
E Series Controller 5. Teaching
5.0 TEACHING
Teaching is defined as programming the robot to do the required tasks. E series controller
enables you to create programs by various methods in the combination of following three
classification items.
1. Robot to use: Actual on-line robot (On-line teaching)

Virtual robot or actual off-line robot (Off-line teaching)
Combination use of two kinds of robots
2. Teaching apparatus to use: TP
PC
combination use of both apparatuses
3. Instructions to use: compound (package) instruction
mono-function instruction (AS instruction, KI instruction)
combination use of two kinds of instructions
In teaching in block (hereinafter simply called block teaching), a program is created by using
compound instructions, each of which is composed of element instructions (interpolation, speed,
accuracy, timer, I/O signals, etc.) which are necessary for each application field of robot (spot
weld, arc weld, sealing … application). Parameter values for each element instruction
(alphanumeric characters indicating quantity, condition and items to be selected) are recorded all
at once to each step of the program. The recorded data consists of position and orientation data
(called “pose” hereinafter) and auxiliary data or “step status” called in the sense that they indicate
the “status” of the parameters to be recorded to each step. To make data modification easier,
some auxiliary data of element instructions such as speed, accuracy, and timer are recorded
indirectly using numbers which represent the levels of the parameter values of the corresponding
element instructions. The actual amounts corresponding to each number are set by auxiliary
functions. For pose data, pressing REC automatically records the current robot pose as a
parameter value for the interpolation instruction at the step.
Auxiliary data to be recorded differs depending on the application field of the robot. The
following types of data are recorded as auxiliary data: robot motion conditions, input/output
control conditions, tool operation conditions when controlling operation of tools by the robot
controller (servo spot weld gun, servo torch for arc welding, etc.), and other special conditions.
Parameter values are selected and set via the TP using hardware keys and on-screen keys and
buttons. When an application such as spot welding requires a large number of auxiliary data,
and data setting is difficult using the hardware keys, the TP provides special setting screens.
5-1
When pose data is taught off-line, data transformation is necessary to compensate the difference
of the robot-to-workpiece poses between in off-line and online teaching.
On the other hand, AS language programming is usually done by teaching AS instructions and
their parameter values are directly specified to each program step via the keyboard. AS
language programming can teach mono-function instructions not included in ordinary block
instructions. AS language may create and edit a program for new applications, but the
programming by block teaching may need to add new element instructions for new applications.
For AS language instructions, refer to the “AS Language Reference Manual”.
This manual explains how to create a program in block teaching using an actual robot and TP.
5.1 PREPARATION FOR TEACHING
To ensure safety during teaching, follow the items below before starting operations.
1. Ensure that all EMERGENCY STOP are working correctly.
2. Display signs stating clearly “TEACHING IN PROGRESS” in places where personnel can
see them.
3. Turn ON the TEACH LOCK on the TP.
！ WARNING
For teaching or teaching monitoring duties, qualify only persons

who have completed the Kawasaki approved training course(s).
！ CAUTION
Backup all data taught during teaching operations for any
contingency, to ensure the latest condition can be restored.
5-2
5.1.1 CONFIRMING OPERATION OF EMERGENCY STOP BUTTONS
Emergency stop buttons are used for stopping a moving robot immediately when there is a
possibility of danger such as injury. Before operating a robot, ensure the following items for all
emergency stop buttons: on the controller, the TP, and any other equipment.
1. Press the EMERGENCY STOP on the operation panel, the TP, the interface panel, etc.
Confirm that the motor power cuts off and the <MOTOR> lamp turns OFF when each of the
buttons is pressed.
2. After EMERGENCY STOP is pressed, reset the error and confirm that the motor power can
be turned ON.
！ DANGER
Ensure that all EMERGENCY STOP are working correctly

before moving a robot.
！ CAUTION
When EMERGENCY STOP is pressed, brakes are applied

immediately to the robot and motion stops. Any sudden stop places
excessive stress on the mechanical parts of the robot arm. Therefore,
avoid using EMERGENCY STOP except in emergency.
[ NOTE ]
1. Emergency stop is possible at any time in either teach or repeat modes.
2. After EMERGENCY STOP is pressed, error messages are displayed on
the TP.
3. Motor power ON is not possible in error state. Release the error(s) by
error reset, etc. before attempting to restart the robot.
5.1.2 DISPLAY DURING TEACHING
Display signs around the work area/cell indicating “TEACHING IN PROGRESS” to prevent
accidents caused by unauthorized personnel.
5-3
5.1.3 SETTING OF TEACH LOCK
Turn ON the TEACH LOCK on the TP. The robot will not move once this switch is set to ON,
even if TEACH/REPEAT is carelessly set to repeat mode. Conversely, when the
TEACH LOCK is OFF, the robot cannot be operated manually in teach mode.
5.2 SELECTING PROGRAM AND STEP NUMBER
Specify the desired program and step numbers before starting teaching operation.
1. Press <PROGRAM> or A＋PROGRAM on
TP to display pull-down menu.
2. Input the desired program number in [CALL

PROGRAM] using NUMBER.
3. Press ↵ to set the specified program number.
If a new program number is specified, “0” is displayed in the step area. The data is recorded to
the first step for a new program, or to the next to the last step in an existing program. To add
new step(s) to existing program, select the last step in the program by pressing <STEP>/ STEP.
[ NOTE ]
When selecting an existing program, maximum of 7 lines starting
from step 1 are displayed in program display area.
5.3 ELEMENT INSTRUCTION AND THEIR PARAMETERS
This section explains the element instructions and how to set their parameter values (auxiliary
data). Element instructions necessary for the robot in doing given work are preset and displayed
on the element instructions row, as shown in the following screen. Under each element
instruction, the parameter value for that instruction is displayed.
Some element instructions are not displayed on the element instructions row due to limited space,
although their parameters are displayed on the parameter row. For example, in spot weld
application with servo weld gun, gun status instruction is not displayed on element instructions
row, but the set parameter values for the instruction are displayed on the parameter row.
Also, some element instructions, such as comment instructions, etc., are not displayed even on the
5-4
parameter row, and these instructions require extra procedures to view/edit their contents.
The parameter values are selected/set using operation keys and F keys (function key).
Element instructions, and their related parameter values and keys used for setting, are
summarized in the table below for each application. The element instructions are shown in the
order they are displayed. Shaded element instructions are unique to that application.
Element instructions
row
Program Parameter row

area
Handling specification
Element J/E
Accu- WK
intruc- Interpolation Speed Timer Tool Clamp (jump Output Input
racy (Work)*
tion /End)
JOINT/LINEAR/LIN2/ 1-64 1-64
Parameter No disp., No disp.,
CIR1/CIR2/FLinear/ 0-9 0-4 0-9 1-9 J, E or or
values 1-2 C
FCIR1/FCIR2/XLIN 1-96 1-96
A＋TOOL
A＋ A＋ A＋ CL 1 / A＋ A＋J/E A＋ A＋
Keys A＋INTERP or
SPD ACC TMR CL 2 Work or <J/E> OX WX
<Tool>
NOTE＊ This instruction is optional.
Pneumatic gun spot welding specification＊

Element J/E
Interpo- Accu-
intruc- Speed Timer Tool Clamp (jump Output Input Spot weld
tion lation racy /End)
JOINT/LINEAR/LIN2/ No
Paramet 1-64 1-64 ON/ 1-15 0-9 O/C
CIR1/CIR2/FLinear/ 0-9 0-4 0-9 1-9 display, J, E
er val. or 1-96 or 1-96 OFF (WS) (CC) (OC)
FCIR1/FCIR2/XLIN 1-2
A＋
CL1/
A＋ A＋ A＋ TOOL CL1/ A＋J/E A＋ A＋ A＋ A＋ A＋
Keys A＋INTERP CL2/
SPD ACC TMR or CL2 or <J/E> OX WX WS CC CL.AUX
CLn
<Tool>
NOTE＊ For servo welding gun, refer to the relevant optional manual, a separate volume.
The next sections explain the element instructions.
5-5
5.3.1 INTERPOLATION INSTRUCTION
To set the interpolation mode (e.g. linear or joint) for the motion from the previous step to the
current step where this instruction is taught, press A + INTERP.
The display toggles: Joint→Linear→Lin(ear)2→Cir(cular)1→Cir(cular)2→F Lin(ear)→F

Cir(cular)1→F Cir(cular)2→X Lin(ear)→Joint, every time keys are pressed (except in
painting/sealing specification).
Linear 9 1 0 1 1 C J [-12. 13. -14*] [12. 13. 14. 15*]
Mode Description
Robot moves to the target point so that the difference of each axis value between
the two taught points decreases at the same proportion in all axes. Select this
Joint
mode when priority is given to the time it takes to move between the two points,
rather than the path the robot takes.
TCP moves to the target point along linear path between the two taught points,
Linear while decreasing the difference in orientation of the tool coordinates (OAT)
between the two points at the same proportion as the distance to the target point.
TCP moves to the target point along linear path between the two taught points,
Linear2 while decreasing the difference of wrist axes (JT4, JT5, JT6) values between the
two points at the same proportion in all wrist axes.
Select this mode to specify a robot pose at the middle point between two points
(start and end points), when TCP moves along a circular path specified by these 3
Circular1 points. TCP moves along circular path, while robot moves changing the
orientation of the tool coordinates (OAT) in the same way as in linear interpolation
mode.
Select this mode to specify the pose robot takes at the end point, when TCP moves
along circular path specified by the 3 points. TCP moves along circular path
Circular2
while the robot moves changing the orientation of the tool coordinates (OAT) in
the same way as in linear interpolation mode.
F Linear/ Select these modes to move a workpiece based on the fixed tool coordinates.
F Circular1/
F Circular2
Robot stops when sensing signal input during motion to the target point in linear
X Linear
interpolation mode. Select this mode to use sensing function.
5-6
5.3.2 SPEED INSTRUCTION
Pressing A＋SPEED displays the screen below. Press NUMBER keys and enter the speed
number (0-9). Press ↵ to confirm the input number. This sets the motion speed level from the
previous step to the current step.
The actual speed represented by the speed number is set in <Aux.>/[Auxiliary Function]-[3.Aux.
Data Setting]–[1.Speed].
Linear 9 1 0 1 1 C J [-12. 13. -14*] [12. 13. 14. 15*]
An absolute velocity/ traveling (moving) time can also be input, as shown below.
Direct speed setting:

(Setting range is 0 –10, when optional direct speed setting is enabled.)
Input 10 as the speed number and press ↵. An input box appears to enable entry of the motion
speed in unit of second or unit of mm/s using NUMBER keys. Press ↵ to confirm. The unit
of speed differs according to the interpolation mode being set.
For joint interpolation mode: motion speed between two taught points, in unit of second
For linear interpolation mode: speed of linear motion between taught points, in unit of mm/s
Direct input: 9 mm/s (This will read as 9 seconds if

interpolation mode is “Joint”.)
Linear 9.00 1 0 1 0 J [-12. 13. -14*] [12. 13. 14. 15*]
[ NOTE ]
This function is enabled/ disabled by option setting
according to the specification.
5-7
5.3.3 ACCURACY INSTRUCTION
Pressing A＋ACC displays the screen below. Input the desired accuracy number (0-4) via the
NUMBER keys. Press ↵ to confirm the input number. This sets the level of accuracy needed
for axis coincidence with the taught point in the current step.
The actual accuracy represented by the accuracy number is set in <Aux.>/[Auxiliary

Function]-[3.Aux. Data Setting]–[2.Accuracy]. The accuracy is set as the approaching distance
to the target point. When the command value to TCP enters the set accuracy range, it is
processed as “axis coincidence”. When 0 is set, robot moves so that the current TCP coincides
with the target point regardless of the values set in Aux. 0302.
[ NOTE ]
For E controller, the axis coincidence is acknowledged when the command
values coincides with the target values for setting the accuracy level to 1. For
the controller before E, the axis coincidence is acknowledged when the current
values coincides with the target values for setting the accuracy level to 1 (1
mm) by default.
Linear 9 2 0 1 1 C J [-12. 13. -14*] [12. 13. 14. 15*]
5.3.4 TIMER INSTRUCTION
Pressing A＋TMR displays the screen below. Input the desired timer number (0-9) via the
NUMBER keys. Press ↵ to confirm the input number. This sets the time to wait after axis
coincidence with the taught point in the current step.
The actual waiting time represented by the timer number is set in <Aux.>/[Auxiliary
Function]-[3.Aux. Data Setting]－[3.Timer].
Linear 9 1 0 1 1 C J [-12. 13. -14*] [12. 13. 14. 15*]
5-8
5.3.5 TOOL INSTRUCTION
Pressing <Tool> or A＋TOOL displays the screen below. Input the desired tool number (1-9)
via the NUMBER keys. Press ↵ to confirm the input number. This sets the tool used when
moving to the taught point.
The tool data represented by the tool number is set in <Aux.>/[Auxiliary Function]-[3.Aux. Data
Setting]－[4.Tool Coord].
Linear 9 1 0 1 1 C J [-12. 13. -14*] [12. 13. 14. 15*]
5.3.6 CLAMP1/ CLAMP 2/ CLAMP-N INSTRUCTION
Set the clamp instruction to be executed after axes coincidence in the taught step by specifying
ON/OFF as the parameter value. To select the parameter value (ON/ OFF) for clamp 1 or clamp
2, press CL1 or CL2. The parameter value switches ON→OFF→ON every time key(s) is
pressed. The display on parameter row changes: clamp instruction number (1 or 2)→no display
→clamp instruction number. For clamp 3 or higher (clamp-n), select ON/ OFF by CLn＋
NUMBER. The parameter value (ON/ OFF) for clamp-n instruction is displayed on the page
for clamp-n data. When teach screen is displayed, pressing A＋←/→ displays the page for
clamp-n data.
When CLAMP 1 with ON is selected
Linear 9 1 0 1 1 C J [-12. 13. -14*] [12. 13. 14. 15*]
5.3.7 WORK INSTRUCTION (OPTION)
Pressing A＋WORK toggles the parameter value: no compensation→work compensation→no

compensation, and the display changes: no display→C→no display. When the taught point is
a point for 3D sensor compensation function (Option), select Work C. If not, select 0 (no
display).
Linear 9 1 0 1 1 C J [-12. 13. -14*] [12. 13. 14. 15*]
5-9
5.3.8 JUMP / END (J/E) INSTRUCTION
Pressing <J/E> or A＋J/E toggles the parameter value: not set→JUMP instruction→END
instruction→not set, and the display changes: no display→J→E→no display. These
instructions determine how the program steps are executed after executing the step where these
instructions are taught. The instructions are processed as follows:
Not set: Executes steps in order. Continues currently executed program.

J: JUMP instruction. Jumps to a different program (selected program).
E: END instruction. Ends program execution.
Linear 9 1 0 1 1 C J [-12. 13. -14*] [12. 13. 14. 15*]
JUMP (J) instruction: Processing differs depending on whether RPS is disabled or enabled.
1. When RPS is disabled, JUMP instruction is ignored and the next step is executed.
2. When RPS is enabled, the program is executed as shown in the table below:
JUMPOFF signal
ON OFF
1. JUMP ON signal has precedence over JUMP OFF signal.
2. When JUMP ON signal is input, program selection signal is read and
JUMPON signal
program execution jumps to the designated program.

ON
3. Acceptable range for destination program number: 0 – 999.
4. When a non-existing program is selected, error occurs and program
execution stops. Motor power turns OFF at the same time.
1. Executes the next step. 1. Pauses at the step and waits for
OFF
one of the signals to turn ON.
END (E) instruction : Processing differs depending on whether RPS is disabled or enabled.
1. When RPS is disabled,
(1) Ignores END instruction and returns to the first step in program.
(2) Steps following the END instruction are also ignored.
5-10
2. When RPS is enabled,
(1) When RPS ON signal is input, reads program selection signal and jumps to the program
specified by the signal.
(2) Acceptable range for designation program number: 0 – 999.
(3) When a non-existing program is selected, error occurs and program execution stops. Motor
power turns OFF at the same time.
5.3.9 OUTPUT (O) INSTRUCTION
Pressing OX displays the screen for setting output signals. Enter the output signal number via
NUMBER keys and press ↵. This sets which signal to output after axis coincidence with the
taught point.
Linear 9 1 0 1 1 C J [-12. 13. -14*] [12. 13. 14. 15*]
[ NOTE ]
1. Signal numbers set randomly are displayed in ascending order by their absolute
value the next time they are displayed. 2. When setting more than one signal,
place a period between the signal numbers.
3. To delete a signal number displayed on the dialog box, move the cursor to the right
of the signal number and press BS.
4. * are displayed on the parameter row for signals unable to be displayed due to
limited space. All signals set are output at program execution. (To check all
signals, open Recorded I/O Monitor screen.)
5. To specify the order of outputting the signals, record the signals in separate steps.
6. When OX.PREOUT is ON, the signal is output immediately after the robot starts its
motion to the taught step. When OX.PREOUT is OFF, the signal is output
immediately after axis coincidence with the taught step.
7. For the instruction that explicitly turns the specified signal OFF (with minus (-)
sign), use Multi function OXWX (option).
5-11
To name the output signal, open the Auxiliary function screen. Select [6.Input/Output Signal]－
[6.Signal name]-[1.OX(Output)]. Pressing <Input> displays the character input screen.
Follow the procedures in Chapter 2.8 and input the desired name.
5.3.10 INPUT (I) INSTRUCTION
Pressing WX displays the screen for setting input signals. Enter the input signal number via
NUMBER keys and press ↵. This sets the input signal that the robot will wait for, after axis
coincidence with the taught point.
Linear 9 1 0 1 1 C J [-12. 13. -14*] [12. 13. 14. 15. 18*]
[ NOTE ]
1. Signal numbers set randomly are displayed in ascending order by their absolute value
the next time they are displayed.
2. There is no function to wait for input signal to turn OFF.
3. When setting more than one signal, place a period between the signal numbers.
4. To delete a signal number displayed on the dialog box, move the cursor to the right of
the signal number and press BS.5. Robot can begin to detect input signals only after axis
coincidence with taught step.
6. When switching output signal to ON or OFF in the same step, input signal is detected
after the execution of output signal.
7. In a step where more than one signal is recorded, all signals are detected under AND
condition. Detection cannot be done under OR condition or combination of both.
8. When more than one signal is set, robot waits for all taught signal conditions are
satisfied.
9. To specify the order in which the signals are input, record the signals in separate steps.
10. For the instruction that waits until the signal explicitly turns OFF (with minus (-)
sign), use Multi function OXWX (option).
To name the input signal, open the Auxiliary function screen. Select [6.Input/Output Signal]－
[6.Signal Name]－[2.WX(Input)]. Pressing <Input> displays the character input screen.
Follow the procedures in Chapter 2.8 and input the desired name.
5-12
5.3.11 SPOT WELD INSTRUCTIONS
In teaching for spot welding, set the following four kinds of auxiliary data for each spot weld
instruction. : ON/OFF (Weld gun), WS (Weld Schedule) number, CC (Clamp Condition) number,
and O/C (retract/ extend) for 2 stroke retractable gun. To teach these data, follow the procedure
below.
1. ON/OFF of clamp instruction
To set clamp instruction ON / OFF, follow the procedure described below.
(1) Pressing CL1 (CL2) switches the teaching data for clamp1 (clamp2): ON → OFF → ON.
(2) Pressing A + CL1 (CL2) switches the teaching data and the actual output signal* for
clamp1 (clamp2): ON → OFF → ON.
(3) Pressing CLn + NUMBER (1-8) switches the teaching data for clamp-n: ON → OFF →
ON.
Example: Pressing CLn + 3 teaches ON/OFF for CL3 instruction.
(4) Pressing A + CLn + NUMBER (1-8) switches the teaching data and the actual output
signal* for clamp-n: ON → OFF → ON.
NOTE* A + CL operation activates actual devices connected with clamp signals. Be careful
when turning a clamp signal from ON to OFF or OFF to ON during teaching with a
workpiece grasped in handling specification, the hand will open and the workpiece
may fall.
2. WS number of WS (Weld Schedule) instruction
Pressing A＋WS displays the screen below. Enter the WS number via NUMBER keys and
press ↵.
5-13
3. CC number of Clamp Condition instruction
Pressing A＋CC displays the screen below. Enter the CC number via NUMBER keys and
press ↵.
4. O/C of OC instruction
Pressing A＋CL.AUX switches the parameter values between O and C.
Parameter values for the four instructions above are displayed on the same page per clamp
instruction, as shown in example screen below. In this screen, the four kinds of auxiliary data
for CL1 instruction are set as follows in step 1: Clamp is ON, WS is 1, CC is 9 and O/C is C.
Setting ranges for the four parameter types:

Clamp: ON or OFF
WS: 0 − 15
CC: 0 − 9
O/C: O or C
Refer to Chapter 13 for more details about spot welding specifications.
5.4 RECORDING POSE AND AUXILIARY DATA TO A STEP
This section explains how to record pose and auxiliary data to a step, following the procedures in
earlier sections.
5-14
5.4.1 NORMAL RECORDING PROCEDURE
Pressing REC records the data to the step after the last step currently displayed in program.
Repeat the data setting procedures until program is complete. Step number increments by one
every time REC is pressed.
Move robot Set parameters for element instructions Record data to the step
［ NOTE ］
Error occurs when the setting procedures explained in this chapter are
performed in program steps other than the last step of the program.
5.5 TEACHING PROCEDURES
This section describes how to create a program in block teaching. This example teaches the four
points shown in the figure below.
Point 1 Point 4
Point 2 Point 3
Pose data at each point and basic auxiliary data are basically taught in block teaching. This
example does not cover the teaching of signals that are transmitted/received between the
controller and the peripheral devices.
！ CAUTION
Tool coordinates data must be registered before program teaching in
Aux.0304. These values define the pose (position and orientation) of the tool
mounted on the robot. If a program is taught without registering the tool
coordinates data and they are registered after program teaching, the robot
will not operate as taught. To register them, refer to Chapter 8.
5-15
5.5.1 OPERATING SWITCHES
Confirm the EMERGENCY STOP condition and set the other switches and keys before actual
teaching.
1. Checking EMERGENCY STOP

Confirm that the EMERGENCY STOP operates properly before entering the safety fence.
(1) Press the EMERGENCY STOP on the TP and the controller, and confirm that motor power
is shut off and <MOTOR> lamp turns OFF.
(2) Reset the error and confirm that the motor power can be turned ON.
2. Setting switches
(1) Turn ON the CONTROLLER POWER on the controller. The CONTROL POWER
lamp illuminates.
(2) Set the TEACH/REPEAT on the controller to TEACH.
(3) Press the A + Motor ON on the TP. The <MOTOR> lamp illuminates.
(4) Press HOLD on the TP to set to HOLD.
(5) Press the TEACH LOCK on the TP to turn ON.
5.5.2 TEACHING PROCEDURE
The following is a brief description of teaching procedures. Refer to Chapter 5.2 and the
following sections for more details.
！ WARNING
The following operations are performed inside the safety fence.
Therefore, teaching must be conducted by two people, one who conducts
teaching operation and a supervisor, both of whom have completed
special education for teaching operation.
5-16
1. Select a program on the TP. Refer to Chapter 5.2 for the setting procedure. In this example,
program No. 10 is selected. The teach screen is as follows.
2. The following instructions and their parameter values are taught in this example.
Motion Element instruction and

points parameter values
Step Teaching contents
(teaching
Interp Speed Accuracy Timer Tool
points)
1 1 Teach pose at the point where robot Joint 9 4 0 1
starts operation.
2 2 Robot moves from point 1 to point 2 Linear 7 3 1 1
at speed level 7 and positioning
accuracy level 3 by linear
interpolation, and waits per timer
instruction.
at speed level 5 by linear
interpolation, and changes tools from
tool 1 to tool 2.
at speed level 6 by linear
interpolation, and changes tools from
tool 2 to tool 1.
5 1 Robots moves from point 4 to point 1 Joint 7 3 0 1
at speed level 7 by joint interpolation.
3. Move robot to point 1 by AXIS for step 1.
5-17
4. Set the parameter values of speed instruction* and accuracy instruction** to 9 and 4
respectively.
NOTE* To set a parameter value of the speed instruction:

Input speed number as parameter value by NUMBER on the screen displayed by
pressing A＋SPEED and press ↵.
**
NOTE To set a parameter value of the accuracy instruction:
Input accuracy number as parameter value by NUMBER on the screen displayed
by pressing A＋ACC and press ↵.
5. Set the other parameter values by the same method described above.
6. Press REC to store all data taught to step 1, including pose and auxiliary data. The teach
screen appears as shown below.
7. Move robot to point 2 by AXIS for step 2.
8. Set the parameter values of interpolation instruction* to Linear, speed instruction to 7,

accuracy instruction to 3 and timer instruction** to 1. To set parameter values of the speed
and accuracy instructions, refer to the procedures described above.
NOTE* To set a parameter value of the interpolation instruction

Pressing A＋INTERP changes the display on parameter row as follows:
Joint→Linear→Lin(ear)2→Cir(cular)1→Cir(cular)2→F Lin(ear)→F Cir(cular)1
→F Cir(cular)2→X Lin(ear)→Joint.
When the desired interpolation mode appears, then the setting is complete.
NOTE** To set a parameter value of the timer instruction:

Input timer number as parameter value by NUMBER on the screen displayed by
pressing A＋TIMER and press ↵.
5-18
10. Move robot to point 3 by AXIS f or step 3.
11. Set the parameter values of interpolation instruction to Linear, speed instruction to 5, accuracy
instruction to 3 and tool instruction* to 2. To set parameter values of the speed, accuracy and
interpolation instructions, refer to the procedures described above.
NOTE* To set a parameter value of the tool instruction:

Input tool number as parameter value by NUMBER on the screen displayed by
pressing <Tool> or A＋TOOL and press ↵.
14. Set the parameter values of interpolation instruction to Linear, speed instruction to 6 and
accuracy instruction to 3. To set parameter values, refer to the procedures described above.
5-19
17. Set the parameter values of interpolation instruction to joint and speed instruction to 7.
To set parameter values, refer to the procedures described above.
Teaching operations for pg10 are complete.
！ CAUTION
1. As precaution, save always latest data to external memory devices such as

USB memory, etc. after creating program.
2. To avoid deletion of saved data, be sure to store USB memory securely.
5.6 PROCEDURE FOR OPERATING AS LANGUAGE TEACHING SCREEN
This section describes how to create a new program or edit via specialized AS language, etc., on
the TP. For details on creating more complicated programs via PC, refer to the “AS Language
Reference Manual”, a separate volume.
5.6.1 CREATING A NEW PROGRAM
1. Programming by using pre-registered instructions
AS language instructions for E series controller are divided into six categories according to
their functions, and registered as shown on the following pages. Refer to a separate manual,
“AS Language Reference Manual” for the meaning of each instruction and how to use.
(1) Select a program to create on the teach screen. For selecting a program, refer to Chapter
2.7.1.1.
5-20
(2) Press I to display the screen below, and select [AS Language Teach] from the pull-down
menu.
(3) As an example, teach TWAIT 1 in the first step. Press <IN/OUT> on the screen below.
Pre-registered AS
language
instruction group
(4) The screen below is displayed.
5-21
(5) Move cursor to TWAIT, press ↵, and then press 1 to input as shown below.
(6) Pressing ↵, records the first step as shown in screen below.
(7) Teach JMOVE #POINT1 in the second step. As described in (3) above, display the
screen and press <MOTION INS> to display the screen below.
5-22
(8) Move cursor to JMOVE and then press ↵ to input as in screen below.
(9) Press <POS./VAR.> to display the list of registered pose variables. In the screen below,
as #POINT1 has not been entered yet, select <CHARACTER>.
(10) The keyboard screen is displayed as shown below. Input #POINT1 here.
5-23
(11) Pressing <ENTER> or ↵ displays the screen as shown below.
(12) Pressing ↵ records the instruction as the second step.
In the same way, input each step by selecting the AS language and/or registered variables to
create a new program.
2. Free programming
Input instructions and variables freely by the keyboard screen as follows. The example
procedure below demonstrates how to create a step which includes IF x<3 GOTO 10.
(1) Pressing <CHARACTER> on the AS language teach screen displays the screen below.
5-24
(2) Input x<3 goto 10 after IF via keyboard and press <ENTER> or ↵ to display the screen
below.
(3) Press ↵ to record the instruction IF x<3 GOTO 10 to Step 3.
5.6.2 ADDING A STEP TO PROGRAM
This section describes how to add a new step to a program. As an example, add the LMOVE
#t4 instruction after the last step 3.
1. Select the last step. For details on selecting a last step, refer to Chapter 2.7.1.2.
2. Display AS language instruction teaching screen by following step 1-(1) and (2) in Chapter
5.6.1.
5-25
3. Press <MOTION INS> in the screen below.
4. Move cursor to LMOVE and press ↵. Input pose variable #t4 as shown in screen below by
following steps 1-(9) to (11) in Chapter 5.6.1.
5. Pressing ↵ adds instruction LMOVE #t4 as the last step 4 in the screen below.
5-26
5.6.3 OVERWRITING A STEP IN A PROGRAM
This procedure is basically the same as Chapter 5.6.2 except for the following items.
1. In step 2. of the procedure, select the step to overwrite. For details on selecting steps, refer
to Chapter 2.7.1.2.
2. In step 5. of the procedure, pressing A+O.WRITE overwrites the selected step with the new
contents.
5.6.4 INSERTING/DELETING A STEP TO/FROM PROGRAM
To insert a step into a program, use I command. To delete, use DELETE command. For
details about these commands, refer to the “AS Language Reference Manual”, a separate volume.
5.6.5 OTHER FUNCTIONS
This section describes special functions of the AS language teaching screen.
1. Registration of AS language
Instructions which are frequently or occasionally used can be registered by Aux. 0307. (Up to
15) For more details, refer to Aux. 0307 in 8. Auxiliary Functions. To display the
registered AS items, select <USER DEF.> in the screen below.
To select the registered instructions and to input data, refer to Chapter 5.6.1 and follow the
same procedure as when selecting another instruction group.
5-27
5.7 PROCEDURE FOR OPERATING POSE TEACHING SCREEN
This section describes how to teach pose information.
1. Select teach screen, and then select a desired program. To select teach screen, refer to Chapter
2.7.1.4, for programs, to Chapter 2.7.1.1.
2. Press I and select [Pose Teach] from the pull-down menu to display the screen below.
3. Select an interpolation mode. Pressing ↓ toggles as follows. (Pressing ↑ toggles in reverse

order.)
Variable Teach → (Continuous) Variables Teach → JMOVE → LMOVE → C1MOVE* →
C2MOVE* → FJMOVE* →FLMOVE* → FC1MOVE* → FC2MOVE* → HMOVE* →
Variable Teach
NOTE* These interpolation modes are optional specifications.
When selecting [Variable Teach] for [Interp(olation)]
4. Input the variable name of the pose to be taught. Move cursor to [Variable] by → and press ↵
to display the screen below.
5-28
5. Input variable name “#point1” via keyboard and press <ENTER> or ↵ to display the screen
below.
6. Move robot to the desired pose and press REC to record the pose to variable #point1.
A confirmation is displayed in the system message area as shown below.
When selecting [(Continuous) Variables Teach] for [Interp(olation)]
Basically, the teaching procedure is the same as in a variable teach, except that consecutive
variable names count up automatically every time REC is pressed. For example, if the variable
name is #point, the number of the variable name increments with each recording.
#point1 → #point2 → #point3 → #point4……
5-29
When specifying a motion instruction for [Interp(olation)]
A motion instruction and a pose variable are taught all at once. For example, to add motion
instruction JMOVE and pose variable name #t1 to the last step, follow below:
1. Execute steps 1. to 5. of Chapter 5.7. In step 1. of the procedure, select the last step. In
step 3. of the procedure, select the motion instruction JMOVE. In step 5., input #t1.
2. Move robot to the desired pose and press REC to add JMOVE #t1 to the last step.
When overwriting
1. Select teach screen, and then select a desired program. To select teach screen, refer to
Chapter 2.7.1.4, and to select a program, Chapter 2.7.1.1.
2. Select the step to overwrite. For details on selecting a step, refer to Chapter 2.7.1.2.
3. Execute steps 2. to 5. of Chapter 5.7. In step 3. of the procedure, select JMOVE. In step 5.
of the procedure, input #t1.
4. Move robot to the desired pose and press A + O.WRITE to overwrite the specified step with
JMOVE #t1.
5.8 KI INSTRUCTION (OPTION)
Pressing KIn displays the screen below. Enter the KI instruction number via NUMBER and
press ↵. Parameter values setting dialog box appears for the selected KI instruction. Input the
desired parameter values and press ↵. Note that the KI instructions are not displayed in element
instructions row.
5-30
5.9 SELECTING PARAMETER COLUMN OF EACH ELEMENT INSTRUCTION ON

TEACH SCREEN (OPTION)
When the optional function of "Teaching by Cursor Key" is set effective, the cursor key ←/→ is
available to select the parameter column of each element instruction composing of the compound
instruction as follows.
1. Select the parameter column of the desired element instruction by ←/→. The background
color of the currently selected parameter column turns red.
2．Set the parameter value (auxiliary data) for each element instruction as follows. For element
instructions and their parameters, refer to 5.3.
(1) For interpolation instruction

Each time pressing ↵, parameter value changes as follows: Joint → Linear → Circular 1
→ ….
(2) For speed , accuracy, timer, tool instructions

Press NUMBER and enter the desired number.
5-31
(3) For clamp-n instruction

Specifying the desired clamp instruction number using NUMBER switches the parameter
value (ON/ OFF) of the specified clamp instruction.
Example:
1) Input 1 via NUMBER.
2) The parameter value for clamp 1 instruction (Clamp 1 signal) turns ON and “1” is
displayed on the parameter column of CLAMP.
3) Inputting 1 via NUMBER at the state of step 2) above turns the parameter value for
clamp 1 instruction to OFF and “1” on the parameter column of CLAMP disappears.
5-32
4) For JUMP / END (J/E) instruction

Each time pressing ↵, parameter value changes as follows: not set→JUMP instruction
→END instruction→not set.
5) For OUTPUT (O)/ INPUT (I) instruction

Selecting the parameter column of OUTPUT (O) or INPUT (I) instruction and pressing
↵ displays the input screen below. For the setting procedure, refer to 5.3.9 and 5.3.10.
5-33
5-34
E Series Controller 6. Repeat Operation
6.0 REPEAT OPERATION
Repeat operation plays back the contents of a program that was taught to the robot. This chapter
describes how to run the robot in repeat operation.
6.1 PREPARING FOR REPEAT OPERATION
Because the robot often moves at high speed during repeat operation, strictly observe the
precautions below before starting in repeat mode.
！ WARNING
1. Ensure that all personal are outside the safety fence and clear of the
robot/system operating area.
2. Confirm that all EMERGENCY STOP work correctly.
3. Confirm that there are no abnormalities with the robot installation,
installed tools, and peripheral equipment such as controller, etc.
4. Confirm that the robot does not interfere with safety fences and
peripheral equipment.
5. Ensure that the robot is located at the home pose.
6.2 EXECUTION OF REPEAT OPERATION
This section explains the basic method for starting the robot in repeat mode using the controller
operation panel and the TP. Refer to the “External I/O Manual”, a separate volume, for
procedures on starting repeat operation using external signals.
Repeat Operation Procedure
1. Turn ON the CONTROLLER POWER located on the controller front, and confirm that the
controller power lamp illuminates.
2. Press HOLD or A+<RUN> and confirm that the HOLD lamp illuminates on upper right of
TP screen. Turn the TEACH/REPEAT on the operation panel to REPEAT.
3. Select the program/steps to be run. Refer to Chapter 2.7.1.1 and Chapter 2.7.1.2 for more
details.
4. Set the repeat conditions. Refer to Chapter 2.7.1.3 for more details. Table below outlines
the actual repeat conditions that can be set.
6-1
No. Setting Items Setting Contents

1 Repeat Speed Sets the repeat operation speed as a percentage of the max. speed.
2 Repeat Cont/Once Sets the program to be run either continuously or only once.
Sets the program’s steps to be run either in one step increments or
3 Step Cont/Once
continuously.
Enables/disables switching to a specified program by external
4 RPS Mode
signal.
To check taught contents, Dry Run ON enables running a program
5 Dry Run OFF/ON
without robot motion.
Manual Weld Used for the servo weld gun application. For more details, refer
6
Mode to the relevant operation manual, a separate volume.
5. Turn OFF the TEACH LOCK on the TP.
6. Press A+MOTOR ON, and confirm that the <MOTOR> lamp illuminates on the upper right
screen of the TP.
7. Press the A+CYCLE START, and confirm that the <CYCLE> lamp on the upper right
screen of the TP illuminates.
8. Press A+RUN or A+<HOLD>. Robot starts a repeat operation. Confirm that the
<CYCLE> operation lamp illuminates on upper right of TP screen.
[ NOTE ]
1. While the TEACH LOCK is ON, repeat operation is not possible.
2. Pressing A+CYCLE START starts from the step displayed on the TP, and
the robot moves to the next step in the program sequence after completing
that step. If the program needs to be started from a different step than the
one currently displayed, the step select function can be used to place the
program at the desired step.
！ DANGER
1. This operation starts the robot repeat operation. Reconfirm all

safety precautions and that personnel are outside the safety fence, etc.
2. Prepare the area so that EMERGENCY STOP can be pressed at
anytime in case of emergency.
6-2
6.3 METHODS FOR STOPPING REPEAT OPERATION
There are two ways to stop a robot during repeat operation, aborting the program or ending the
execution of the program.
！ WARNING
When an abnormal state arises on the robot during repeat operation,

immediately press HOLD or A+<RUN>, or press any
EMERGENCY STOP.
[ NOTE ]
During cycle operation, it is possible to change the repeat speed, repeat
Cont/Once, or the step Cont/Once settings, but changing a program or step
is not possible.
[ NOTE ]
The EMERGENCY STOP (located on the TP, etc.) should be pressed anytime an
operator needs to stop robot motion immediately. However, this is not
recommended as a routine method for stopping robot motion. When
EMERGENCY STOP is pressed, power to the motors turns OFF immediately and
brakes are applied. However, normal deceleration of the robot does not occur in
an emergency stop, and the mechanical unit may be subjected to severe dynamic
shock loads. Accordingly, avoid using EMERGENCY STOP except in an
emergency.
6.3.1 ABORTING THE PROGRAM
1. Press HOLD or A+<RUN>, or set repeat condition to [Step Once]. Refer to Chapter
2.7.1.3 for more details.
2. When the robot has come to a complete stop, press one of the EMERGENCY STOP to cut
off the motor power. Or, turning the TEACH/REPEAT on the controller from REPEAT to
TEACH will also cut off the motor power.
6-3
6.3.2 ENDING EXECUTION OF THE PROGRAM
1. Set repeat condition to [Repeat Once]. Refer to Chapter 2.7.1.3 for more details.
2. When the robot has come to a complete stop, press one of the EMERGENCY STOP to cut
off the motor power. Or, turning the TEACH/REPEAT on the controller from REPEAT to
TEACH also will cut off the motor power.
6.4 METHODS FOR RESTARTING REPEAT OPERATION
The procedure for restarting the repeat operation will be different depending on how the program
was stopped. Select the appropriate procedure from the subsections below.
6.4.1 RESTARTING AFTER ABORTING PROGRAM
If the CYCLE lamp on the TP is turned OFF, confirm that the tasks described in steps 2 to 5 in
Chapter 6.2 have been done correctly, and start from step 6. If the <CYCLE> lamp illuminates,
press A+RUN or A+<HOLD>. Robot restarts repeat operation.
！ DANGER

anytime, in case of emergency.
6.4.2 RESTARTIGN AFTER ENDING EXECUTION OF PROGRAM
Restart by following the instructions from step 2 in Chapter 6.2.
6.4.3 RESTARTING AFTER STOPPING BY EMERGENCY STOP
When the EMERGENCY STOP has been pressed during automatic operation, follow the
procedure below to restart the repeat operation.
1. Release the emergency stop state/button.
2. If the error message is displayed, reset error(s).
6-4
3. Press HOLD or A+<RUN>.
4. Turn ON the motor power.
5. Press A+CYCLE START or A+<CYCLE>.
6. Press A+RUN or A+<HOLD>. Robot restarts repeat operation.
！ DANGER

anytime, in case of emergency.
6.5 WAIT CANCEL
The waiting state shows that the robot is stopped and is waiting for receipt of the input signal
taught to that step before moving to the next step.
When a waiting state occurs, the waiting cancel screen below left appears automatically
depending on setting condition in Aux. 0502, or “Waiting” is displayed in the status area (screen
below right). When all of the waiting conditions are cancelled, the robot moves to the next step.
！ DANGER
When all of the waiting conditions are cancelled, the robot

moves to the next step automatically. Be aware of how and
when the robot will move.
6-5
[ NOTE ]
1. If cycle start is stopped by an interruption (error, switching to teach mode, etc.) while
the waiting cancel screen is displayed, then the screen closes automatically and the
previous screen is displayed.
2. The waiting cancel screen can be displayed even in check mode if a step contains a
waiting condition. However, the waiting cancel screen will close automatically when
releasing the CHECK GO or CHECK BACK on the TP.
This procedure explains how to cancel a waiting state.
1. Displaying waiting cancel screen
The waiting cancel screen appears automatically when system switch WAITREL_AUTO is
set to effective (ON) in Aux. 0502. When set to ineffective (OFF), [Waiting] and <Cancel
Waiting> are displayed in the screen without displaying the waiting cancel screen. In this
case, press A + <Cancel Waiting> as shown in screen below to display the cancel screen.
2. Cancel method
The waiting conditions can be cancelled in two ways depending on whether the wait signal is
taught by compound instruction in block teaching or by AS language instruction.
(1) Canceling wait signals taught in block teaching
The waiting signals are displayed on the waiting cancel screen upon entering a waiting
state. In the screen below, I10, I15, and I20 must be input to cancel the waiting state.
Cancel signals individually or all at once as described below. Selecting [Close] returns to
the teach screen without canceling the waiting state. Refer to 1. Displaying waiting
cancel screen to redisplay the waiting cancel screen.
6-6
To cancel waiting conditions all at once:

Selecting [I break] cancels all of the waiting conditions and closes the waiting cancel
screen.
To cancel waiting conditions individually:

Selecting the desired signal number cancels the waiting condition. The cancelled
condition is displayed in red. The waiting cancel screen closes automatically when all of
the remaining conditions are cancelled by the above procedure.
(2) Canceling wait signals taught by the AS language
The screen below is displayed upon entering a waiting state. Selecting [AS] cancels all of
the waiting conditions and closes the waiting cancel screen. Selecting [Close] returns to
the teach screen without canceling the waiting state. Refer to 1. Displaying waiting
cancel screen to redisplay the waiting cancel screen.
！ DANGER
When all of the waiting conditions are cancelled, the robot

moves to the next step automatically. Be aware of how and
when the robot will move.
6-7
[ NOTE ]
When using the following functions during the display of the waiting cancel
screen, the waiting screen closes and the selected function activates.
(1) Program selection
(2) Step selection
(3) Menu selection
(4) I selection
(5) Repeat condition setting
(6) Switch to the auxiliary function screen
(7) Switch to the interface panel
6-8
E Series Controller 7. Checking and Modifying Programs
7.0 CHECKING AND MODIFYING PROGRAMS
This section describes the procedure for checking and modifying a taught program. Before
checking robot movement in check mode, check the contents of taught program as shown below.
1. Check by teach screen

Check the taught auxiliary data. In the teach screen, pressing A + ↓/↑ displays the taught
auxiliary data, etc., for all the steps.
2. Check by edit screen

Press I and select [Program Edit] from the pull-down menu to display the screen below left.
Select the desired program and press ↵ to display the screen below right. In this screen, the
taught pose data and the other data can be checked. Press A + ←/→ to display spot weld
clamp and pose data. For details about program edit screen, refer to Chapter 7.3.
3. Check by monitor screens

To check the taught data, such as I/O signals, use the monitor screens. For details, refer to
Chapter 2.9.
7-1
7.1 CHECK GO, CHECK BACK
This section describes how to check a taught program in check mode by operating the robot.
Press <MAN. SPEED >/ TEACH SPEED to change the check speed level (1-5). The actual
speed corresponding to each check speed level (1-5) is set in <AUX>/ [Auxiliary Function] -
[4. Basic Setting] – [1. Teach/Check Speed]. First, the procedure for checking the movement of
a robot arm is described.
1. Press <Program>/ A + PROGRAM, and select the desired program number. Then, press ↵.
2. Press <Step>/ STEP, and select the desired step number. Then, press ↵. If the specified
step does not exist, the last taught step of the program is displayed. If there are no recorded
steps, step 0 is selected.
3. Pressing DEADMAN＋CHECK GO/CHECK BACK executes Check Go/Back in check

mode.* Check Once and Check Continue can be switched by pressing CONT.
In Check Once setting, robot proceeds to the next/previous step each time CHECK GO/
CHECK BACK is pressed. In Check Continue setting, pressing and holding CHECK GO/
CHECK BACK makes the robot execute steps continuously in forward or reverse order,
respectively. **
NOTE* Turn ON motor power and release HOLD, etc. beforehand so that the robot can
move.
**
NOTE Verify the mode as “CHK once” or “CHK cont”, displayed in the status area on
right side of TP screen.
[ NOTE ]
1. Check Back checks the program backwards. After checking the selected step, the
check procedure goes on to the step before the selected step. Check is executed in
the same manner at whichever step is chosen.
2. Check Back can be executed continuously but robot reaches the taught point
regardless of accuracy setting, and then proceeds to the step before. Thus, at steps
with rough accuracy setting, the path taken by the robot differs between Check Go
and Check Back.
3. When checking a weld point, welding is executed at “Weld ON”, per the weld
condition taught to the step. There is a system switch to select weld ON/OFF.
4. Wear measurement by clamping without workpiece or Reference plate is executed
with Check Back. However, the data calculated from these measurements are not
reflected in the current wear data.
7-2
7.2 STEP DATA MODIFICATION
This section describes how to edit a recorded program data. Program data can be modified on
the program edit screen. For details, refer to Chapter 7.3.
7.2.1 MODIFYING POSE DATA
Use the procedure below when modifying only the pose data without changing the auxiliary data.
2. Press <Step>/ STEP, and select the desired step number. Then, press ↵.
3. Select the manual operation speed level by pressing <MAN. SPEED>/ TEACH SPEED.
4. Select the operation mode by pressing <Coord>/ COORD.
5. Move the robot to a desired pose by pressing DEADMAN + AXIS.*

move.
6. Press A＋POS MOD.
7. Confirmation message appears. If it is OK to modify the selected step, select [Yes] using the
arrow key and press ↵.
8. The pose data is modified.
[ NOTE ]
The same step is selected before and after this operation.
(The next step is not selected automatically.)
7.2.2 MODIFYING AUXILIARY DATA
Use the procedure below when modifying only the auxiliary data without changing the pose data.
7-3
3. Change the auxiliary data to the desired value(s). Refer to Chapter 5 for setting each
auxiliary data.
4. Press A＋AUX MOD.
5. Confirmation message appears. If it is OK to overwrite the selected step, select [Yes] using
the arrow key and press ↵.
6. Auxiliary data is modified (overwritten).
[ NOTE ]
7.2.3 MODIFYING BOTH POSE AND AUXILIARY DATA - OVERWRITING THE STEP
This section describes how to edit both pose and auxiliary data simultaneously.
3. Select the manual operation speed level by pressing <MAN. SPEED>/ TEACH SPEED.
4. Select the operation mode by pressing <Coord>/ COORD.

move.
auxiliary data.
7. Press A＋O.WRITE.
7-4
8. Confirmation message appears. If it is OK to overwrite the selected step, select [Yes] using
the arrow key and press ↵.
9. Both pose and auxiliary data are modified (overwritten) simultaneously.
[ NOTE ]
7.2.4 DELETING STEP
This section describes how to delete a specific step in a program.
3. Press A + DEL.
4. Confirmation message is displayed. If it is OK to delete, select [Yes] and press ↵.
5. Specified step is deleted.

[ NOTE ]
A step can also be deleted in the program edit screen. For details,
refer to Chapter 7.3.3.
7.2.5 INSERTING STEP
This section describes how to insert a program step in the taught program.
7-5

move.
auxiliary data.
5. Press A + INS to insert the step.
[ NOTE ]
1. The step is inserted before the specified step.
2. The same step is displayed before and after the insertion.
3. When inserting several steps consecutively, for each step set the desired
conditions then insert the step. Perform operations in this order.
7.3 EDIT ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN
The program edit screen can also be used to edit a taught program. The program edit screen has
copy and paste functions enabling easy edit and modification of the program. In addition,
programs currently in repeat operation can also be edited. This section explains these functions.
7.3.1 HOW TO SWITCH TO THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN
Switch to the program edit screen as follows.
1. Select [Program Edit] from the pull-down menu displayed by pressing I.
7-6
2. Program selection screen is displayed as shown below. Move the cursor to a desired
program and press ↵. Or input a program name with a keyboard screen displayed by
pressing <Input>, and press <ENTER>.
3. Selecting a program displays the program edit screen as shown below.
[ NOTE ]
When following screens are displayed, pressing I is invalid.
1. Data setting screen of auxiliary functions
2. Error/warning/confirmation/inquiry screen
3. OX/WX signal setting screen
7-7
7.3.2 KEYS ON THE PROGRAM EDIT SCREEN
Pressing keys on the right of the program edit screen directly functions the pressed keys. Details
of keys are explained below.
1. Delete
(1) Select a step to delete by pressing ↑/↓ and press <Delete>. In addition select the last
step to delete by pressing ↑/↓ when deleting several steps.
(2) Pressing ↵ deletes selected steps. Press <Complete> to determine the edit.
[ NOTE ]
A confirmation message will be displayed if screen is closed without
pressing <Complete>. Select <Yes> to overwrite the data. Select
<No> to redisplay the previous screen without overwriting the data.
2. Copy range
(1) Select a start step to copy by pressing ↑/↓ and press <Copy range>. Select the last step
to copy by pressing ↑/↓.
(2) Pressing ↵ copies the content of selected steps temporarily.
3. Copy
Move cursor to the step where the steps will be inserted by pressing ↑/↓ and press <Copy>.
Contents stored by <Copy range> will be copied as the consecutive steps from the specified
step. Press <Complete> to determine the edit.
[ NOTE ]
A confirmation message will be displayed if screen is closed without
pressing <Complete>. Select <Yes> to overwrite the data. Select
<No> to redisplay the previous screen without overwriting the data.
7-8
4. Cancel
(1) Pressing <Cancel> ends the program edit without saving the edit.
(2) When the step is changed, a confirmation screen appears as shown below. Selecting
[Yes] saves the change and ends the program edit. Selecting [No] ends the program edit
without saving the change.
5. Complete
Pressing <Complete> saves and ends the program edit.
7-9
7.3.3 STEP DATA MODIFICATION ON EDIT SCREEN
This section describes how to edit a recorded step.
7.3.3.1 MODIFYING BOTH POSE AND AUXILIARY DATA
This section describes how to edit taught data (auxiliary and pose data) on the Edit screen.
1. Scroll pages by pressing A + ←/→ to display the screens below.
2. Select a desired item (parameter) by cursor.
3. Modify data by NUMBER. Methods of modifying data vary depending on the type of
parameter. See (1) and (2) below.
(1) Modifying data other than Output (O), Input (I) and Comment data.
1) Move the cursor to the taught data to modify .
2) Input desired values according to the following descriptions.
7-10
Taught data Description

Interpolation Specify interpolation mode: 0: Joint, 1: Linear, 2: Linear2, 3: Circular1,
4: Circular2, 5: F Linear, 6: F Circular1, 7: F Circular2, 8: X Linear 9: NOP
Speed Specify speed level: 0-9
Accuracy Specify accuracy level: 1-4
Timer Specify timer number: 0-9
Tool Specify tool number: 1-9
For the arc weld spec., this setting cannot be changed.
Clamp Specify clamp status: 0: No clamp, 1: ON
Specify auxiliary data for each spot weld instruction. See Chapter 5 for
details.
J/E Specify J/E instruction: 0: No Jump/End, 1: J, 2: E
Pose data Specify pose data.
3) Press ↵ and <Complete> after modification.
(2) Modifying Output (O), Input (I) and Comment data.
1) Move cursor to a desired item and press ↵.
2) Setting screen for the item is displayed. Modify the values or comments. See
Chapter 5 for details.
Item Description
Output (O) Currently recorded status is displayed. Specify and modify this
numerically.
Input (I) Currently recorded status is displayed. Specify and modify this
numerically.
Comment Pressing ↵ displays the comment input screen.
3）Press ↵ and <Complete> after modification.
7-11
7.3.4 BATCH MODIFICATION OF TAUGHT DATA OF SEVERAL STEPS
This section describes how to edit taught data in the several steps at the same time on the Edit
screen.
1. Press A to display the <Specify range.> on the right side of the screen. Press <Specify
range.> to select range specification mode. In range specification mode, the background
color of the selected steps changes as shown below.
2. Select all the desired steps to modify using ↑/↓.
3. Select a desired column using ←/→ and modify auxiliary data or comments. Modifying
procedure is the same in 7.3.3.
7-12
4. Pressing <Range Edit> displays the confirmation screen as shown below. Select <Yes> to
apply the modification in procedure 3 to all the other selected steps.
5．The data in the selected steps are chaged all together.
7-13
7.4 ONLINE EDIT FUNCTION
While in repeat mode, this function enables a limited degree of program editing. However, not
all editing functions are available during repeat mode.
7.4.1 ONLINE EDIT SCREEN
Online editing is available for:
1. Registered programs
2. Programs registered as subroutines of the main program
7.4.2 FUNCTIONS ON ONLINE EDIT SCREEN
1. How to edit
This screen has basically the same functions as those described in Chapter 7.3. However,
some data in a program undergoing online edit can not be overwritten. For details, refer to 2.
Save As below.
2. Save As
To save changes made to the data in auxiliary, pose, comment, and clamp (only for servo weld
gun spec.) instructions, follow the procedures below to save the program under a new file
name.
(1) After editing the data, press <Complete> to display the confirmation screen shown below.
7-14
(2) Select [Save as.] to display the program list as shown in the screen below. Press <Input>
and input a new program name. The changes to the data are saved in the new program.
(3) The edit screen for the new program is displayed. The screen below is for the program
named “pg3”.
7-15
7-16
E Series Controller 8. Auxiliary Functions
8.0 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes how the auxiliary functions are used for displaying information about
robot operations and for setting the required data for those operations.
！ WARNING
Auxiliary functions are a kind of teaching. Their usage is

limited to personnel who have completed special training and
are qualified for teaching or supervising robot operation.
！ CAUTION
In this chapter, optional functions are also described. Be

advised that some specifications may not include every
function described here.
8.1 OVERVIEW OF AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Auxiliary functions are hierarchically divided as shown in the screen in Chapter 8.3, and used for
the following purposes.
1. To display the main data that is used when operating the robot or editing a program:
Pose and speed information, Memory available, Dedicated input/output signals, etc.
2. To set the data for robot motion and operations;

Base coordinates, Tool coordinates, Motion limit, etc.
3. To perform maintenance operation such as adjusting the robot or troubleshooting:

Zeroing, Zeroing data set/ display, etc.
In addition, auxiliary functions are divided into 4 hierarchies as shown in the list in 8.3.
Auxiliary functions are usually represented by a four-digit combination number for large and
middle classifications, such as Aux.XXXX, or by a six-digit number for small classifications.
8-1
8.2 HOW TO USE AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
1. Press <Aux.> on operation screen to display the large classification screen. Or, activate B
area and press MENU to display the pull-down menu, and select [Auxiliary functions].
2. Refer to the list on next page and input the desired auxiliary function number (max. six-digit
number including small classification no.), then press ↵. The first 0 of the large classification no.
can be omitted. Or, move cursor to the desired group by ↑/↓, and press ↵ to open the function
list screen for that group. Then, select the desired auxiliary function. Moving cursor to any
on-screen item displays an explanation for that item on the bottom of the screen.
3. Input data. Input range is displayed on the bottom of the screen when moving cursor to the
desired item. Finally, press ↵ and setting is complete.
4. Press R to return to the previous page of the data setting screen. Press R several times or
select another screen from the pull-down menu on B area to close auxiliary function screen.
In addition to the procedure above, using an R code can also open the auxiliary function screen by
method 1 or 2 below.
1. Open teach screen and press R to display the R code input box, and input the desired R code
number. (R code number and auxiliary function number are the same.)
2. Open R code input box and press A＋HELP to display the R code list screen as shown in the
screen below. (Press < >/< > to scroll pages.) Select the desired R code, or input the R
«
code number (without “R”) into the box in the lower right corner.
8-2
8.3 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS LIST
Large Middle Small

Branch
Class. Function Name Class. Function Name Class. Function Name No. Function Name
No. No. No.
01 Program 01 Transfer Data
Conversion 02 Mirror Image
03 Transform Data 01 Start Data Transformation
02 Register Tool Coordinates
03 Measure Tool Coordinates
04 Compensate for Gravity
04 XYZ Shift
05 Joint Shift
06 Tool Shift
08 Inverse Program Copy
10 4 Ref. Points 01 4 Ref. Points Based Trans. Start
Based Trans. 02 Measure Tool Coordinates
03 Gravity/Ind. Diff. Comp.
13 C/V Position Value Shift
02 Saveload 01 Save
02 Load
03 File/Folder Operate
10 Autosave 01 Save Data 1
Configuration 02 Save Data 2
03 Save Data 3
04 Display of Autosave Log
03 Aux. Data 01 Speed
Setting 02 Accuracy
03 Timer
04 Tool Coordinates
05 Fixed Tool Coordinates
07 As Language Mode Setting
99 Block Instruction Change
04 Basic Setting 01 Teach/Check Speed
02 Home Position
03 Working Space
04 Load on Arm
05 Auto Tool Coordinates Register
06 Auto Load Measurement
8-3
07 Rotation for Spin Axis Set

09 Home Position Check Axis Set
05 Advanced 01 Zeroing 01 Zeroing
Setting 02 Zeroing Data Set/Display
03 Encoder Rotation Counter Reset
02 System Switch
03 Pos. Deviation Error Range at E-Stop
04 Encoder Value Error Range at Power-ON
05 Robot Installation Posture
06 Base Coordinates
07 Motion Limit
08 Slow Repeat
09 Interface Panel
10 Collision 01 Set Threshold for Teach Mode
Detection 02 Set Threshold for Repeat Mode
Function 03 Register Threshold
04 Auto Calibration
05 Property
12 Deviation Limit For Continuing
15 Variable Acce/Decel Spec
18 Moving Area XYZ Limits
06 Input/Output 01 Dedicated Input Signals
Signal 02 Dedicated Output Signals
03 Dedicated Input/Output Signal Display
04 OX Specification Setting
05 Clamp 01 Application Field
Specification 02 Clamp Condition
10 Spot Weld Clamp Definition
11 Spot Weld Control Definition
12 Spot Weld Gun Definition
20 Handling Clamp Signal Definition
05 Gun 01 Application Field
Specifications 02 Gun Condition
30 Painting Sealing Signal Definition
06 Signal Name 01 OX (Output)
02 WX (Input)
03 INT (Internal)
8-4
07 Signal Setting of Arm ID Board

08 Signal Allocation
10 Input/Output Signals in Robot Arm
11 Number of I/O Signals
20 Klogic Control 01 Klogic Ladder Display
07 Log Function 02 Error Logging 01 All
Display 02 Operation Error (P)
03 Mechanical/Control Warning (W)
04 Error (E)
05 Fatal Error (D)
06 Property of Logging
03 Operation 01 All
Logging Display 02 Operation Logging
03 Command Logging
05 Property of Logging
04 Maintenance 01 Maintenance Log Registration
Log 02 Maintenance Log Display
03 Maintenance Log Deletion
06 Operating Data Display
07 Maintenance 01 Maintenance Support Aux.
Support 02 Error List
08 Command 01 Setting 01 JT Angle
Storage 02 XYZOAT
03 JT Command
04 JT Deviation
05 JT Speed
06 Motor Cur. Value
07 Motor Speed
08 Motor Cur. Command
09 Tool Speed
10 I/O Signal
11 Combination
09 Motor Torque 01 Peak Current
Information 02 Duty
03 Failure Prediction Setting
04 Base Data
8-5
17 Encoder Check 01 Logging Data Display

Function 02 Counter Reset
03 Alarm Function
19 Diag (Diagnostic) Function
24 Executed Program Logging
08 System 01 Memory Available
02 Inhibit Record
03 Reset Check Sum Error
04 Software Version
05 Initialize System
07 Check Specification
08 Environment Data
09 Time/Date
10 PC Program 01 Selects Start (PCEXECUTE)
Run/Stop 02 Selects Abort (PCABORT)
03 Selects Stop (PCEND)
04 Select Continue (PCCONTINUE)
05 Kill PC Prg. (PCKILL)
06 Selects Status (PCSTATUS)
11 Choose 01 Choose Language
Language 02 Language Allocation Function
12 Network Setting
14 Fast Check
18 USB Keyboard
19 Operation Panelless Setting
97 Selects Auxiliary Function
98 Change Operation Level
11 Handling/ 01 Palletizing Data 01 Pattern Set
Palletizing Set 02 Shift Frame Registration
03 Shift Frame Measurement
04 Shift Measurement
02 Conveyor 02 Data Set
Synchro 03 Environment Data Set
04 Simulation
06 Start Delay 01 Common Delay Distance
02 Individual Delay Distance
8-6
03 Multi Start 1. Display

Daly 2. Change
3. Delete
03 Sensing
23 Program Queue 01 Display/Change
02 Environment Set
12 Paint, Sealing 01 Flowrate Control
02 Speed Output 01 Linearization Table
02 Environment Set
03 Spray Enable/Disable
04 Output Ref 01 Flowrate Calibration Table
Flowrate 02 Pressure/Voltage Table
03 Flowrate Magnification Table
04 Applying Pressure Table
05 Set Primary Line Pressure
06 Set Press. and Temp. Limits
08 Environment set
10 Set Material Circulation Data
11 A/D D/A Monitor
12 Data Monitor
13 Clogging Pressure
14 Temperature/Voltage Table
15 Disconnect Pump Motor
17 Accel/Decel Setting for Pump Axis
05 3D-Sensor 01 Reference Points Registration
Compensation 02 Master/Slave
03 Allowable Deviation Range
04 XYZ Display
05 Offline Conversion
8-7
AUX. 0101 TRANSFER DATA
This function transfers program step(s) between different programs or to a specified step within
the same program.
1. Press <Program> and select the

program name, then press ↵.
Refer to Chapter 2.7.1.1 for
details about selecting a program
name.
2. Input data and press ↵.
3. Confirmation box is displayed.

Select [Yes] to execute or select
[No] to cancel.
4. The data has been transferred

when “Copy completed.” is
displayed.
8-8
[ NOTE ]
Designation of step No.:
When the number of transfer steps is set to 0, input error is returned.
When 0 is set for source step number, input error is returned.
When specified number of transfer steps is greater than that of the specified
program, up to the last step is transferred.
EXAMPLE INPUT
Start step No. 0 0 1 3
End step No. 0 5 0 1
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Error Error Error Only step 3 is transferred.
AUX. 0102 MIRROR IMAGE (OPTION)
This function transforms the taught data (pose

data in the step) into a mirror symmetry data with
respect to the robot’s YZ plane. It is possible to
make symmetric data without actual operation of
the robot, if the shape of the workpiece is
mirror-symmetry with respect to the YZ plane.

name.
8-9

[No] to cancel.
4. The transformation is stored

when “Setting complete.” is
displayed.
8-10
[ NOTE ]
Designation of step No.;

When the end step number is set to 0, only start step is transformed.
When 0 is set for start step number , input error is returned.
When specified end step number is greater than the last step number of the
specified program, up to the last step is transformed.
Example of input:
Start step No. 0 0 1 3
End step No. 0 5 0 1
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Error Error Only
step1/3 is transformed
！ CAUTION
This function is valid only for pose data taught by block teaching. The pose
data taught by AS program instruction cannot be transformed. This function
transforms based on the YZ plane of robot’s null base coordinates, not on the
base coordinates after base coordinates transformation. The YZ plane is
fixed as a reference plane for transformation and cannot be changed.
AUX. 0103 TRANSFORM DATA (OPTION)
This function creates the data necessary for on-line robots, based on the data taught by off-line
robot or CAD (ROSET). In this function, reference points data is required to fix the pose
relationship between workpiece and robot. For more details about this function, refer to Chapter
15.
8-11
AUX. 0104 XYZ SHIFT
This function shifts the pose data taught by block teaching along the X, Y and Z axes of the robot
base coordinates.

name.
2. Input the required data and

press↵.

[No] to cancel.

displayed.
8-12
See the NOTE in Aux. 0102 for specifying the start and end step numbers.
！ CAUTION
Execution of this function changes the taught data on the

memory. Save the current data on to USB memory before
execution to prevent inadvertent deletion.
AUX. 0105 JOINT SHIFT
This function shifts each axis data taught by block teaching.

name.

[No] to cancel.
8-13

displayed.
See the NOTE in Aux. 0102 regarding specifying the start and end step numbers.
！ CAUTION

memory. Save current data on to USB memory before
AUX. 0106 TOOL SHIFT
This function shifts the pose data taught by block teaching along the X, Y and Z axes of the robot
tool coordinates.

name.
8-14

[No] to cancel.

displayed.
See the NOTE in Aux. 0102 regarding specifying the start and end step numbers.
！ CAUTION

memory. Save current data on to USB memory before
AUX. 0108 INVERSE PROGRAM COPY (OPTION)
This function transfers the specified steps in [Source Program] to the specified range in
[Destination Program] in reverse order. This function works in the same manner as Aux. 0101
except program steps are copied in reverse order.
name.
8-15
2. Input the first step number to be

transferred in [Source Step
Number] and the number of steps
to be transferred in [Number of
Transfer Steps].
3. Input the destination step number

in [Destination Step Number].
(Inputting 0 copies the step after
the last step in the destination
program.)

[No] to cancel.
5. Copy is successful when “Copy

completed.” is displayed.
AUX. 0110 4 REF. POINTS BASED TRANS. (OPTION)
This function basically works in the same manner as Aux. 0103. This function is effective when
higher accuracy is required. This function contains the following three sub functions. For
more details, refer to the optional manual “Four Reference Points Based Transformation Manual”,
a separate volume.
8-16
AUX. 0113 C/V POSITION VALUE SHIFT (OPTION)
This function uniformly shifts the conveyor position by the specified distance.
Example:
If the conveyor origin shifts 1000 mm downstream after teaching current conveyor position of
1000 mm, the conveyor position can be shifted 1000 mm upstream by this function to
compensate for the conveyor origin shift and the conveyor position recorded in move instruction
of the program is overwritten as 2000 mm.
AUX. 0201 SAVE
This function saves programs and other data in the controller memory to USB memory or
compact flash card (hereinafter called CF) in file unit. USB memory is inserted into the USB
port inside the accessory panel on the controller. CF is built in the controller and has capacity of
about 20 MB.
1. Select the desired device. Move

cursor to [ USB] and press ↵ to
select USB memory, or to [ CF] and
press ↵ to select CF. USB memory
is selected by default when screen
opens.
2. Select the desired folder to save the

data to. Move cursor to desired
folder with and press ↵ to open
the folder. Confirm the specified
folder name is displayed in [Place of
File]. Pressing R moves back to the
parent folder.
8-17
3. Move cursor to [Place of File], and

press <File Type> in lower left portion
of screen. Select the desired file type
from the pull-down menu and press ↵.
4. Select the desired file name from the

list of file names. Or, move cursor to
[File Name] and press <Input File
name> in lower left portion of screen.
Input file name via the keyboard
screen, and press <ENTER>.
5. Screen at left appears by pressing

<SaveData>. Select the desired file
type.
8-18
6. If setting is correct, press <SAVE>.

Confirmation box is displayed.
Select [Yes] to execute or select [No]
to cancel.
7. Saving finishes when “File save

Selectable file types are below.
All Data
Saves all programs and other data in controller memory to the USB/CF memory.
All Data (Only selected program) (*.as)

Saves all data of the specified program with the specified file name* to USB/CF memory.
Program (*.pg)
Saves the specified program data to the file with the specified name* to USB/CF memory. If the
saved program calls other programs (subroutines), the called programs are also saved.
Robot Data (*.rb)

Saves system data such as dedicated signal setting data and zeroing data, etc. to the file with the
specified name* to USB/CF memory.
8-19
System Data (*.sy)

Saves system data with the specified file name* to USB/CF memory.
Auxiliary Data (*.au)

Saves parameter values of element instructions (auxiliary data) such as speed, accuracy, timer,
tool, etc., taught by block teaching with the specified file name* to USB/CF memory.
Interface Panel (*.if)

Saves data of devices set on the interface panel screen with the specified file name* to USB/CF
memory.
Error Logging (*.el)

Saves the error history of the last 1000 entries in memory, including error code, message, date,
time, under the specified file name* to USB/CF memory.
Data Storage (*.csv)

Saves the data storage data with the specified file name* to USB/CF memory.
Program Edit Logging (*.edl)

Saves the program edit histories stored in memory, including date and time, under the specified
file name* to USB/CF memory.
Operation Logging (*.ol)

Saves the operation histories stored in memory, including date and time, under the specified file
name* to USB/CF memory.
Brake Check Logging (*.bl) (option)

Saves the brake check histories stored in memory, including date and time, under the specified
file name* to USB/CF memory.
NOTE* A file name (number) must be specified when storing data to USB/CF memory. Enter a
name (number) for file identification, but a file extension, such as AS, PG, AU, RB is
automatically added to the file name (number) according to the selected file type. (The
file extension does not need to be input.)
8-20
If a file is identified with the same file number, or name, as an existing file, a backup file is
automatically created. “B” is added to the extension of the original file name indicating a
backup file. (i.e..BAS) Only one backup file is created, if additional files of the same name are
specified, the backup file data is overwritten.
The settings for reading data from USB memory to the PC vary depending on PC. Be sure your
PC is installed with the appropriate USB memory-compatible driver.
[ NOTE ]
The error message below may appear when an error occurs while
writing data to a file, for example when USB memory is full.
Data write error. (USB/CF)
8-21
AUX. 0202 LOAD
This function loads the data saved as files in the external memory device to the controller memory.
Use either a USB memory device or the CF as external memory device.
USB memory is inserted into USB port inside the accessory panel on controller. CF is built in
the controller and has capacity of about 20 MB.

press ↵. USB memory is selected by
default when screen is displayed.
2. Select the folder that includes the file

to be loaded. Move cursor to desired
parent folder.

8-22
4. Select the desired file to be loaded

from the list. Or, move cursor to
[File Name] and press <Input File
name> in lower left portion of screen.
Input file name via keyboard screen
and press <ENTER>.
5. If the setting is correct, press

<LOAD>. Confirmation box is
displayed. Select [Yes] to execute or
select [No] to cancel.
6. Confirmation message is displayed.

Input 0 (No) to cancel loading of the
robot data. Input 1 (Yes) to load the
robot data.
8-23
7. Loading finishes when “File load

Selectable file types are below.
All
Loads all programs and other data in the memory to the controller memory.
All Data (Only selected program) (*.as)

Loads all data of the specified program with the specified file name* to the controller memory.
Program (*.pg)
Loads the specified program data to the file with the specified name* to controller memory. If
the program calls other programs (subroutines), the called programs are also loaded.
Robot Data (*.rb)

Loads the system data such as dedicated signal setting data and zeroing data, etc. to the file with
the specified name* to the controller memory.
System Data (*.sy)

Loads system data with the specified file name* to controller memory.
Auxiliary Data (*.au)

Loads parameter values of element instructions (auxiliary data) such as speed, accuracy, timer,
tool, etc., taught by block teaching with the specified file name*to the controller memory.
Interface Panel (*.if)

Loads data of devices set on the interface panel screen with the specified file name* to the
controller memory.
8-24
Data Storage (*.csv)

Loads the data storage data with the specified file name* to controller memory.
NOTE* A file name (number) must be specified when loading data to controller memory.
Enter a name (number) for file identification, but a file extension, such as AS, PG, AU,
RB is automatically added to the file name (number) according to the selected file type.
(The file extension does not need to be input.)
AUX. 0203 FILE/FOLDER OPERATE
This function executes copy, deletion, and renaming of the file or folder in the external memory
device. Use either a USB memory device or the CF as external memory device. USB memory
is inserted into USB port inside the accessory panel on controller. CF is built into the controller
and is approximately 20 MB.
press ↵. USB memory is selected by
default when screen is displayed.
2. Select the folder that includes the

desired file. Move cursor to desired
previous folder.
8-25

Copy
1. Move cursor to the desired file or
folder name and press <Copy>.
2. Move cursor to the desired destination

folder name and press ↵.
8-26
3. Pressing A＋<PASTE> displays

confirmation box . Select [Yes] to
execute.
4. The file or folder is copied into the

specified folder.
New Folder
Pressing <New Folder> displays keyboard screen. Input a folder name and press <ENTER>.
8-27
Rename
folder and press <Rename>.
2. The keyboard screen is displayed.

Input a new name and press
<ENTER>.

Select [Yes] to execute.
8-28
Delete
folder and press A＋<Delete>.

Select [Yes] to execute.
AUX. 0210 AUTOSAVE CONFIGURATION
This function automatically saves data stored in the controller to the specified device at the
specified timing. Three kinds of saving conditions are available. Also displays the autosave
log.
1. Select the desired setting screen,

from [Save Data1] to [Save
Data3].
8-29
2. Screen at left is displayed when

[Save Data1] is selected. Set
[Autosave] to [Enable] by A＋
←/→.
3. Set [Day Of Week], [Time],

[Device]. Input 0 (USB) for
[Device].
4. Move cursor to [Save File Name]

and press <Input>. Input file
name via the keyboard screen
that appears, and press
<ENTER>.
5. Move cursor to the file type

displayed next to [Save Data].
[All Data] is shown at left.
Press <Save Data> to select the
desired file type, then press ↵.
6. Screen at left is displayed when

selecting [All Data (Only
Selected Program)] in step 5.
Specify the program name and
press ↵. (For details on
specifying programs, refer to
Chapter 2.7.1.1.) No need to
specify program, if program
already selected in step 5 and its
file type is other than [All Data
(Only Selected Program)].
7. Settings are stored when “Setting

complete.” is displayed.
8-30
AUX. 0301 SPEED
This function sets the speed data for auxiliary data [Speed0] - [Speed9], for SPEED instructions
in block teaching.
All speed data are normally set as a percentage (%) of the maximum speed.
For joint interpolation: Percentage of the maximum speed for each axis
For linear/circular interpolation: Percentage of the maximum speed in interpolation motion
For the maximum speed of each axis and interpolation, refer to Installation and Connection
Manual for the robot arm, a separate volume.
Input percentage (%) for each

speed level. If the setting is
correct, press ↵. The screen
enclosed by is displayed
when [ACCEL. AND DECEL.] is
set to [Enable] in Aux. 0399.
See below for the setting of
acceleration and deceleration.
The speed setting screen is

normally dispayed as shown
above. If the multifunction
speed option is set to ON, the left
screen is displayed to enable three
kinds of settings: absolute speed
(mm/s), motion time (s) and
percentage of max. speed.
When [ACCEL. AND DECEL.] is set to [Enable] in Aux. 0399, acceleration and deceleration can
be set. This function is useful for suppressing induced vibration on the tip of robot arm or to
make the tip move more smoothly by decreasing acceleration and deceleration.
All acceleration data are set as a percentage (%) of the max. acceleration.
All deceleration data are set as a percentage (%) of the max. deceleration.
When [ACCEL. AND DECEL.] is set to [Enable] in Aux. 0399, the AS language ACCEL or
DECEL instructions cannot affect the motion to points taught in block teaching.
8-31
[ NOTE ]
When [ACCEL. AND DECEL.] is set to [Disable] in Aux. 0399, the
acceleration/deceleration is equivalent to a 100 % setting when
[ACCEL. AND DECEL.] is set to [Enable].
AUX. 0302 ACCURACY
This function sets the accuracy values for auxiliary data [Accuracy 0] - [Accuracy 4] of
ACCURACY instruction in block teaching.
Input the accuracy values for each

accuracy level. If the setting is
correct, press ↵.
[ NOTE ]
1. Robot may stop due to axis uncoincidence error if the accuracy value is set
too small. Set a value larger than the repeatability. However, an axis
uncoincidence error may still occur even if the value is taught larger than
the repeatability, because the accuracy value set here is the deviation
between teach and repeat points, which will change depending on
particular robot motion and load conditions.
2. If wait conditions (timer, WS, etc.) are taught at point B (see next page)
and the wait release conditions are not satisfied, the robot moves up to
point B even if accuracy value is set larger (500 mm, for example).
8-32
Accuracy and trajectory
Motion type 1
For example the robot takes the motions below (A →B →C).
As soon as the current pose values for the robot enters the accuracy value range specified by
accuracy instruction (i.e. robot reaches point D), superposing of the command values for the
current and next motion paths begins. The robot will shift movement continuously toward the
next path according to these superposed command values. (see diagrams below.)
B Speed (v)
Trajectory per command Command value
Accuracy
Actual trajectory
(deviation due to delay)
D
A E (B) C Time (t)

A C
Robot reaches D
The greater the range specified by ACCURACY, the superposing will begin earlier. However,
acceleration on next path does not begin before the point where the robot starts to decelerate
(point E), therefore it can be said that the effect of ACCURACY instruction is saturated at a
certain value, i.e. there is no effect in setting the accuracy value greater than the distance between
point B and point E. (see the diagram below.)
Speed (v)
A E (B) C Time (t)
Even if command value reaches the accuracy point at this time, acceleration
for next path will not start until deceleration begins at point E.
If the acceleration and the deceleration values for motion from/to the point B are set smaller, the
superposing begins earlier and the robot will move in a trajectory with larger radius, but the total
time it takes to reach C does not differ significantly.
8-33
Speed (v)
A E (B) C Time (t)

Accuracy
Even if only the deceleration for the current path is decreased, the compound speed will not
exceed the specified maximum speed, since the superposing does not begin until the robot
reaches point F (the point where acceleration starts). In other words, the completion time of
deceleration and acceleration is the same (point B).
Speed (v)
Time (t)
A F (B) C
Motion type 2
In Motion type 2, the concept of accuracy and velocity in linear, circular motion is different
from that of Motion type 1. Motion type 1 and Motion type 2 can use the same programs
without modifications, but the actual motion path and motion speed will change.
(1) Accuracy setting
1) Accuracy in joint interpolated motion
The motion path of the robot corresponding to the set accuracy value is shown in the
figure below. In this example the accuracy values at point B are 1 mm, 100 mm, and
200 mm. In the same way as Motion type 1, the robot starts to shortcut before reaching
point B, but does not necessarily turn at the point where it enters the range of the set
accuracy value. How close the robot approaches point B before turning is determined
by the value of each axis calculated proportionally to the set accuracy value. If setting
an accuracy value that is larger than the half distance of the next path, the robot starts to
shortcut when the remaining distance of the current path becomes half the distance of the
next path from B to C.
8-34
Joint interpolated motion
Maximum shortcut: half the

distance of next path
2) Accuracy in linear and circular interpolated motion
The motion trajectory of the robot corresponding to the set accuracy value is as shown
in the figure below. In this example the accuracy values at point B are 1 mm, 100 mm,
and 200 mm. The robot starts turning at the point where it enters the range of the set
accuracy value. The robot follows a circular trajectory within the circle of the set
accuracy value. If setting an accuracy value that is larger than half the distance of the
next path, the robot starts to shortcut when the remaining distance of the current path
becomes half the distance of the next path from B to C. The accuracy value can be
effectively set up to the value equal to half the distance of the second path.
By shortcutting, the cycle time can be shortened. However, when the following
conditions are set, the processing of the ACCURACY instruction will be the same as in
Motion type 1.
· When a waiting instruction (TWAIT, SWAIT, etc.) is executed at point B
· When a workpiece/tool is changed at point B
· When the interpolation mode for the next point is changed to joint interpolation
· When the motion mode is changed at taught taught point (ordinary mode ↔ motion
based on the fixed tool coordinates)
· When the processing is branched by condition judgment such as IF, etc.
Linear Interpolated motion
Circular arc
Maximum shortcut: half the

distance of next path
8-35
(2) Speed characteristics
1) Speed in joint interpolated motion
The same as in Motion type 1
2) Speed in linear and circular interpolated motion
In Motion type 2, if the accuracy value is set larger and the configuration of the robot
does not change between two defined poses, the specified speed is attained even if the
distance between the two poses is small.
Speed(v)
Specified speed
Motion type 2
Motion type 1
Time(t)
Axis coincidence
(in Motion type 1)
However, when the following conditions are set, the speed characteristics will be the same as
in Motion type 1:
· When a waiting instruction (TWAIT, SWAIT, etc.) is executed at taught point
· When a workpiece/tool is changed at taught point
· When the interpolation mode for the next point is changed to joint interpolation
· When the motion mode is changed at taught point from ordinary mode (workpiece is fixed
and tool moves) to fixed tool dimensions
[ NOTE ]
When attempting to execute a program where the robot orientation changes
greatly within a short distance, the time it takes to change the orientation will
exceed the time it takes to move that distance at the specified speed. In this
case, the joint movements are given priority, thus the linear motion will not
reach the specified speed.
8-36
3. Speed in circular interpolation
In Motion type 2 the maximum speed is automatically set according to the robot’s capacity to
carry out proper circular interpolated motion.
In Motion type 2, the robot follows a circular trajectory within the circle of the set accuracy
value. The maximum speed of this trajectory is also set by the robot’s capacity.
AUX. 0303 TIMER
This function sets the actual waiting time in auxiliary data [Timer 1] – [Timer 9], for TIMER
instructions in block teaching.
Input waiting time for each timer. If

the setting is correct, press ↵.
AUX. 0304 TOOL COORDINATES
This function records data specific to auxiliary data [Tool 1] - [Tool 9], for TOOL instructions in
block teaching.
The set data includes:

1. X, Y, Z coordinate values of the tool coordinates origin measured, based on the wrist flange
coordinates (null tool coordinates), and rotation amount of tool coordinates, 2. Mass of tool,
center of gravity, moment of inertia, and 3. Tool shape.
1. Defines a reference point for positioning/trajectory control, and the moving direction of the
tool based on the tool coordinates.
2. Used for controlling motion through a variety of functions – acceleration/deceleration control,

vibration control, collision detection, etc.
8-37
3. Used for controlling teach/check speed based on the position of the edge point of the tool.
This function is effective when the edge points of the tool are farther than the TCP from the
flange surface, or when considering the tool shape including the workpiece on the tool end.
To take full advantage of robot performance, these data must be set properly.
Tool data registration
Flange
coordinates
Xf
Zf Center of gravity (COG)
Mass of tool (+workpiece): M kg
Yf Coordinate value on flange
coordinates: (Xg, Yg, Zg)
Moment of inertia around
gravity center: (Ix, Iy, Iz)
Ix
Xf′ Flange coordinates XfYfZf and
coordinates Xf′Yf′Zf′, defining the
Zf′ Iz moments of inertia around the
Iy center of gravity, are parallel.
Tool
coordinates Yf′
Tool center point (TCP) Zt
Coordinates value on flange
coordinates: (Xtcp, Ytcp, Ztcp) Xt
Tool coordinates rotation based
on flange coordinates: (O, A, T) Yt
Tool shape setting
Approximate the shape of the tool as a cube, etc., and register the edge points (max. 8 points) of the
cube as shown below left. Or, register only one feature point as shown below right.
Edge point 1
(feature point)
Edge point 8
Edge point 7
Edge point 6
Edge point 5 Edge point 2
Edge point 4
Edge point 1
Edge point 3
8-38
！ CAUTION
Be sure to register the correct mass, center of gravity

and moment of inertia. Registering the wrong values
may decrease the life service of component parts, cause
motor overload or deviation errors.
[ NOTE ]
1. Data defining the load mass, position of center of gravity and moments of inertia
about the center of gravity are used in robot motion controls for vibration
suppression, acceleration/deceleration and collision detection. Setting values for
these data, even approximately, is important for optimizing robot performance.
2. Approximate values for load mass and position of center of gravity can be obtained
by Aux. 0406.
3. If load mass is set to 0, calculations assume robot carries its rated load (both mass and
torque).
4. If all center of gravity positions (Xg, Yg, Zg) are set to 0, calculations assume robot
carries its rated load (both mass and torque).
5. If all moments of inertia (Ix, Iy, Iz) around center of gravity are set to 0, robot
operates at the max. allowed load of moment of inertia noted in specification sheet.
6. For safety, set 0 for the moments of inertia if Ix, Iy, Iz are unknown. In this case,
acceleration/deceleration is controlled at the max. allowed load of moment of inertia.
7. If load at end of robot arm is small enough to be considered a point mass, register a
small value for the moments of inertia, approx. 0.01. If setting 0, robot operates at
the max. allowed load of moments of inertia noted in specifications, and acceleration/
deceleration is constrained. In this case, setting a small value enables cycle time to
be shortened.
For more details about load condition registration, refer to Chapter 11.
1. Input data for each item. When

using several tools, press
<Next Page> to move to the next
page and input the tool data.
8-39
2. Press <Tool Shape> in previous

screen to display screen at left.
Set [Tool Shape] to [Enable] to
control teach/check speed based
on edge point(s) of the tool.
Then, input the position data of
the edge points (max. 8 points).
When using several tools, press
<Next Page> to move to next
page and input the tool data.
Pressing <Tool Coord> displays
Tool Coordinates screen.
3. After inputting all the data, press

↵. Values are stored when
“Setting complete.” is displayed.
(Press ↵ to set data in Tool
Coordinates screen or Tool
Shapes screen.)
X/Y/Z
XYZ coordinate values (Xtcp, Ytcp, Ztcp) of the tool coordinates origin viewed from the flange
coordinates.
O rotation
Rotation amount of tool coordinates (around Z axis) (O).
A rotation
Rotation amount of tool coordinates (around Y axis after the above rotation) (A).
T rotation
Rotation amount of tool coordinates (around Z axis after the above rotation) (T).
Load Mass
Mass of tool to be mounted, including mass of workpiece grasped in handling applications.
Center Of Gravity X/Y/Z

XYZ coordinate values (Xg, Yg, Zg) of COG of the tool viewed from the flange coordinates.
Moment of Inertia about X/Y/Z axis

Moment of inertia values (Ix, Iy, Iz) around center of gravity Xf′/Yf′/Zf′ axis.
8-40
Tool Shape Enable/Disable

To control teach/check speed based on the edge points of the tool, set [Tool Shape] to [Enable]
after setting data for Tool Shape. Set at least one edge point to use this function. Otherwise,
error “E1356 The tool shape is not set.” occurs.
X/Y/Z Edge Point 1 - 8

XYZ coordinate values of the edge point of the tool viewed from the flange coordinates.
Z
Z Z
Ｔ
Y
Y
Ｏ
Ø
Ø
Ａ
Y
X X
X
AUX. 0305 FIXED TOOL COORDINATES (OPTION)
This function specifies transformation values of the fixed tool coordinates when the tool is not
mounted at robot wrist but is fixed in space and the robot holds the workpiece and moves based
on the fixed tool. Up to nine fixed tool coordinates can be set.
Fixed tool coordinates are set by transformation values that express the pose of the fixed tool
coordinates viewed from the base coordinate system.
1. Move cursor to each item and

input data. When using several
tools, press <Next Page> to move
to the next page and input the
tool data.
8-41
2. Pressing <Tool Shape> displays

the left screen. For details on
setting Tool Shape, refer to Aux.
0304.
3. Press ↵ after inputting all the

fixed tool data. Values are
stored when “Setting complete.”
is displayed.
[ NOTE ]
1. The setting covers 9 pages. All data in these pages are recorded together.
2. If only X, Y, and Z values are set and 0 is set for O, A, and T, the fixed tool
coordinates will have the same orientation and face in the same direction as the
base coordinates.
For more details, refer to the optional manual “Motion Based on Fixed Tool Manual”, a
separate volume.
AUX. 0307 AS LANGUAGE MODE SETTING
Frequently-used AS instructions or statements can be registered by this function. Max. 15 of AS

language items can be registered.
1. Move cursor to [1] and press ↵.
8-42
2. On the keyboard screen, input the

desired AS instructions and press
<ENTER>.
3. Check the entry as shown on the

screen in step 1. If the setting is
correct, press ↵.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3.
[ NOTE ]
1. Instructions are registered from No.1 in entry order.
2. To move the registered instruction into other number box, select the desired
number box and input again by following the procedures above. Drag and
drop functions, etc. are not available.
AUX. 0399 BLOCK INSTRUCTION CHANGE
This function sets whether the acceleration/deceleration instruction is included in the compound
instructions used in block teaching. Setting [ACCEL. AND DECEL.] to [Enable] makes the
robot accelerate/decelerate at the values set to each block teaching speed (0 - 9) in Aux. 0301.
Setting [Disable] enables the acceleration/deceleration to be controlled by AS instructions of
ACCEL and DECEL. This function is also disabled when specifying the speeds directly.
Select either [Enable] or [Disable]

for [ACCEL. AND DECEL.] by A＋
←/→. If the setting is correct,
press ↵. Selection is stored when
8-43
AUX. 0401 TEACH/CHECK SPEED
This function sets the speeds corresponding to the speed levels [Speed 1] to [Speed 5] for
teach/check motion. [Speed 1] sets the inching increment.
Move cursor to each item and input

data. If the setting is correct, press
↵. Values are stored when “Setting
AUX. 0402 HOME POSITION (EQUIV. TO SETHOME, SET2HOME IN AS

LANGUAGE)
This function sets two home poses (Home Position 1 and 2) for robot operation. These poseｓ
are useful when:
1. Returning the robot to a pre-set home pose, using HOME instruction of AS language.
2. Externally outputting a signal to indicate that the robot has reached the set home pose.
1. Move cursor to each [JT] and

input the Home Position 1 data.
To store the current pose as the
home pose, press ↵.
2. To set Home Position 2, press

<Next Page> and input data. If
setting is correct, press ↵.
8-44
[ NOTE ]
Home Range should be set between 5 mm and 10 mm to ensure
that the home pose output signal is generated.
Curr. Pose.
Sets (records) the current robot pose as the home pose.
Key Entry
Set the home pose by entering numeric values for each axis.
Home Range
A home pose signal is output when the robot stays within the range of a circle whose center is
Home Position 1(2) and radius is Home Range.
AUX. 0403 WORKING SPACE
The working space of the robot is parallel to the base coordinates and defined by setting upper
and lower corner positions located diagonally from each other in a rectangular solid. Nine
working spaces (1-9) can be set. Set the X, Y, Z values of the tool coordinates origin (TCP)
based on the robot base coordinates.
Move cursor to each item and input the

Working Space 1 data. For defining
several working spaces, press <Next
Page> to move to the next page and
input the working space data. If the
setting is correct, press ↵. Settings
and Values are stored when “Setting
Positive
Signal turns ON when robot enters the working space and turns OFF when robot departs the
working space.
Negative
Signal turns OFF when the robot enters the working space and turns ON when the robot
departs the working space.
8-45
[ NOTE ]
1. The setting covers 9 pages. All the data in these pages are recorded together.
2. [Output Signal Number] is displayed on this screen, but its setting must be
made in Aux. 0602. When the signal is not dedicated, 0 appears in the signal
number column.
3. Whether or not the TCP is in the working space is determined based on the
command values of the robot.
Upper corner position
Using AXIS on teach pendant, move the TCP to the

upper and lower corner positions, then set XYZ data of
the transformation values.
Lower corner position
AUX. 0404 LOAD ON ARM
This function sets the load on the upper arm or on the arm base of the robot to optimally adjust
acceleration/deceleration, vibration characteristics, etc.
LU
MU Load on upper arm
Mass: MU kg
Distance from JT3 center to
center of gravity: LU mm
XBL
YBL
Base coordinates Σ-XYZ

Coordinates on arm base Σ-X1Y1Z1
Rotation angle of JT1 Θ1
X1
X Θ1 Y1 Y
Load on arm base
Mass: MB kg
Center of gravity on arm base XY
coordinates: (XBG, YBG)
XY dimensions of load: XBL x YBL
8-46
Move cursor to each item and

input data. If the setting is
correct, press ↵.
Mass Load on Arm

Load mass on robot upper arm (MU)
CTR Dist, JT3 Rot/Mass

Distance from rotation center of JT3 to load mass gravity center on upper arm (LU)
Mass of Load on Arm Base

Weight of load on arm base (MB)
Mass Center in Base X/Y

X/Y value of load mass center on the arm base coordinates (XBG, YBG)
Dimension X/Y of Load

X/Y dimension (length) of the load installed on arm base (XBL × YBL)
AUX. 0405 AUTO TOOL COORDINATES REGISTER
This function calculates the tool coordinates data and automatically registers its data based on 4
taught poses of the robot that meet the given conditions. Tool must be attached to the robot arm
before registration. Set tool number and what kind of data to be calculated for that tool. For
more details, refer to Chapter 10.
8-47
AUX. 0406 AUTO LOAD MEASUREMENT
This function calculates the load mass and center of gravity for the tool. Calculation is based on
results obtained after the program for load measurement is executed with the tool mounted at end
of robot. For more details, refer to Chapter 12.
AUX. 0407 ROTATION FOR SPIN AXIS SET (OPTION)
This function changes the number of rotations for JT6 in memory from the current value to the
value set within the input range, without moving JT6. This is available in robots installed with
spin control function where the motion range of JT6 is not limited.
Input data in [Rotation Number]. If

Value is stored when “Setting
For more details, refer to the optional manual “Spin Control Function Manual”, a separate
volume.
8-48
AUX. 0409 HOME POSITION CHECK AXIS SET
This function sets whether or not to check if axis stays within the Home Range for each axis
registered in Aux. 0402. Set [Enable] or [Disable] for each axis. Setting [Enable] executes the
check on that axis. For details regarding Home Range, refer to Aux. 0402.
1. Select [Enable] or [Disable] by A

＋←/→. If the setting is
correct, press ↵.
2. Press <Next page> to use Home

Position 2, input the data for
Home Position 2. If the setting
is correct, press ↵. Settings are
is displayed.
AUX. 0501 ZEROING
Zeroing registers the encoder value at the zero displacement position (reference zero
position, typically when axis scribe marks align = 0 °/0 mm). Joints can also be zeroed even if
unaligned with their scribe marks by specifying [JT Angle set]. However, the values in
[SETTING] stored in the controller will be used as the encoder values that correspond to the zero
displacement position. To zero, it is necessary to consider the number of encoder rotations (see
Aux. 050103) and the position angle within one rotation (see Aux. 050102).
8-49
！ WARNING
Avoid using this function in normal operations. Zeroing is a

maintenance function for fixing the mechanical origin of an
axis whenever its motor is replaced. Only Kawasaki service
staff or those who have completed the Kawasaki maintenance
course can perform zeroing.
AUX. 050101 ZEROING
To perform zeroing to all joints,

inputting 0 to [Joint No.] and
pressing ↵ registers the current
encoder value as the set value. To
perform zeroing to a specified joint,
move the axis to the set position first,
and then input the joint number to
[Joint No.] and the zeroing angle to
[JT Angle set].
[ NOTE ]
1. After replacing encoders or motors, do not fail to reset the rotation counter
for the encoder using function Aux. 050103, and then move robot in the joint
mode.
2. After step 1, set the axes to their zero scribe marks and reset the rotation
counter again.
3. Before replacing the main CPU board, note the zeroing and offset values
currently set in Aux. 050102. After replacement, input these values and
check whether zeroing pose is correct.
8-50
AUX. 050102 ZEROING DATA SET/ DISPLAY
This function displays current setting values. Inputting setting values for each joint directly is
also possible on this screen.
！ WARNING
Avoid using this function in normal operation. Because this function is for the
maintenance purpose of fixing the mechanical origin of each axis, perform this function
only in the cases below:
1. To verify if the zeroing data has changed when the robot arm position is not proper.
2. To enter the correct value if changed.
Use caution when changing the setting values in ZEROING DATA SET as the values for
the current detected robot position also change. Accordingly, any changes will alter the
robot movement points and trajectory when playing back a program in repeat mode.
1. Move cursor to [JT1] – [JT6] and

input the data.
2. Pressing <Next Page> displays

OFFSET input screen as shown
on the left. Avoid making any
changes in this screen. If the
Values are stored when “Setting
[ NOTE ]
1. After replacing encoders or motors, do not fail to reset the rotation counter for the encoder
using function Aux. 050103, and then move robot in the joint mode.
2. After step 1, set the axes to their zero scribe marks and reset the rotation counter again.
3. Before replacing the main CPU board, note the zeroing and offset values currently set in Aux.
050102. After replacement, input these values and check whether zeroing pose is correct.
8-51
AUX. 050103 ENCODER ROTATION COUNTER RESET
This function resets the counters used for storing the encoder rotation amount.
！ WARNING
This function calibrates the robot’s mechanical origin with the

encoder origin. An encoder is coupled to each axis and
recalibration is required when the encoder or any related parts
are replaced (main CPU board). If this function is not set
properly, the origins will not match and the programmed
positions may deviate. Therefore, qualify only persons who
have completed Kawasaki’s maintenance course to operate this
function.
[ NOTE ]
1. After replacing encoders or motors, do not fail to reset the rotation counter for
the encoder using function Aux. 050103, and then move robot in the joint
mode.
2. After step 1, set the axes to their zero scribe marks and reset the rotation
counter again.
3. Before replacing the main CPU board, note the zeroing and offset values
currently set in Aux. 050102. After replacement, input these values and check
whether zeroing pose is correct.
To reset rotation counters for all

joints, input 0 to [Joint No.] and
zeroing angle value to [JT Angle set],
and press ↵. (Offset value on reset
is displayed in Aux. 050102.) To
reset rotation counter of a specified
joint, input the joint number to [Joint
No.] and register the zeroing angle
value.
8-52
AUX. 0502 SYSTEM SWITCH (EQUIV. TO SWITCH INSTRUCTION OF AS

LANGUAGE)
This function defines ON/OFF or effective/ineffective for system switches which set fundamental
system specifications. The system switches that are available vary depending on application or
software version. The following screens show typical system switches.
8-53
The system switches set to ON or effective appear with a “9“. To change status, move cursor to
the desired switch and select ON/OFF by A＋←/→. If the setting is correct, press ↵. Moving
cursor to a switch displays an explanation for that switch at the bottom of the screen.
CHECK.HOLD ON Starting program is acceptable only in HOLD condition.

OFF Starting program is acceptable in RUN condition, too.
CP ON Enables continuous path control operation.
OFF Disables continuous path control operation.
CYCLE.STOP ON Enables cycle stop by input of external hold signal.
(<CYCLE> lamp turns OFF).
OFF Disables cycle stop by input of external hold signal. (system
becomes hold state only.)
OX.PREOUT ON Sets the OX signal taught for a point in block teaching to be
output immediately after a step change (memory change) to
the taught point.
OFF Sets the OX signal taught for a point in block teaching to be
output after reaching the taught point.
PREFETCH. ON Enables execution of signal input/output instructions before a
SIGINS point is reached when using AS language instructions.
OFF Disables execution of signal input/output instructions before a
point is reached when using AS language instructions.
QTOOL ON Updates tool coodinates data automatically based on auxiliary
data registered to the tool number in block teaching.
OFF Performs transformation only at these times: when TOOL
command or TOOL instruction are executed, or when the
compound instruction is executed in block teaching programs.
REP＿ONCE ON Repeats a program once.
OFF Repeats a program continuously.
8-54
REP_ONCE.RPS_ ON Ends program execution at the step where END instruction is

LAST taught when repeat condition is set to once.
OFF Ends program execution at the first step of the following
program after executing the step where END instruction is
taught when repeat condition is set to once.
RPS ON Executes external program selection automatically to switch to
the specified program when a JUMP/END or EXTCALL
instruction is executed in block teaching.
OFF External program selection cannot be executed.
STP＿ONCE ON Executes steps one by one.
OFF Executes steps continuously.
AFTER.WAIT. ON Activates the taught timer countdown in block teaching when
TMR axis coincidence completes and after all other waiting
conditions, such as WX, WAIT, and RPS_ON, are satisfied.
OFF Activates the taught timer countdown in block teaching as
soon as axis coincidence completes.
FLEXCOMP ON Enables deflection compensation option.
OFF Disables deflection compensation option.
MESSAGES ON Enables on-screen display of the information from PRINT and
TYPE instructions.
OFF Disables on-screen display of the information from PRINT
and TYPE instructions.
SCREEN ON Enables scrolling through screens 1 page at a time when using
LIST command.
OFF Screens are displayed continuously when using LIST
command.
AUTOSTART.PC ON Executes a PC program automatically when turning controller
power ON.
OFF Does not execute a PC program automatically when turning
the controller power ON.
AUTOSTART2.PC ON Executes PC program 2 (3, 4, 5) automatically when turning
AUTOSTART3.PC the controller power ON.
AUTOSTART4.PC OFF Does not execute PC program 2 (3, 4, 5) automatically when
AUTOSTART5.PC turning the controller power ON.
ERRSTART.PC ON Executes a program automatically when errors occur.
OFF Does not execute a program when errors occur.
8-55
AUTOSTART.LSQ ON Executes KLOGIC automatically when turning the controller

power ON.
OFF Does not execute KLOGIC automatically when turning the
controller power ON.
DISPIO_01 ON Sets I/O command display for the signal status: 1 for ON, 0 for
OFF.
OFF Sets I/O command display for the signal status: x for ON, o for
OFF. Alphabetic lower case letters show general purpose
signals and upper case letters, dedicated signals.
HOLD.STEP ON Displays the step currently being executed.
OFF Displays the last motion step executed.
WS＿COMPOFF ON Outputs weld conditions (WS) signals from the time of step
change until the weld completion signal is input.
OFF Outputs weld conditions (WS) signals from a step change to
the next step change.
WS.ZERO ON Enables welding process even when WS=0 (pressurizing and
welding processes).
OFF Disables welding process when WS=0 (pressurizing only).
SLOW＿START ON Enables slow start function.
OFF Disables slow start function.
ABS. SPEED ON Specifies the speed by absolute speed.
OFF Specifies the speed by percentage.
UDP_EMSG ON Displays communication error when UDP communication
instruction is executed.
OFF Disables displaying communication error when UDP
communication instruction is executed.
TOUCH.ENA ON Enables setting repeat conditions with touch panel.
OFF Disables setting repeat conditions with touch panel.
TOUCHST.ENA ON Enables operation of <MOTOR>, <HOLD/RUN >,
<CYCLE> on TP screen.
OFF Disables operation of <MOTOR>, <HOLD/RUN >,
<CYCLE> on TP screen.
PLC. CHECK ON Enables PLC check.
OFF Disables PLC check.
FLOWRATE ON Enables flow rate control mode.
OFF Enables speed output mode.
8-56
DEST_CIRINT ON The position that the DEST function returns becomes the strat
point of cornering motion in motion type 2.
OFF The position that the DEST function returns becomes the
target point on the program.
EBMATCTRC ON Enables material circulation by pump1.
OFF Disables material circulation by pump1.
EB2MATCTRC ON Enables material circulation by pump2.
OFF Disables material circulation by pump2.
SINGULAR ON Enables function of singularity check function.
OFF Disables function of singularity check function.
DN_DISCON_ ON Displays device net disconnection error.
ERR OFF Does not display device net disconnection error.
JT5MTN ON Enables movement of 5th axis. Effective only for the robot
keeping the constant wrist direction, such as MD seriese.
OFF Disables movement of 5th axis. Effective only for the robot
keeping the constant wrist direction, such as MD seriese.
TPSPEED.RESET ON Enables automatic switching of slow teach/check speed.
OFF Disables automatic switching of slow teach/check speed.
OXZERO ON Enables collectively resetting OX (output signal).
OFF Disables collectively resetting OX (output signal).
IFAKEY ON Enables operating I/F panel while pressing A key.
OFF Enables operating I/F panel at all times.
DISP.EXESTEP ON Displays the step currently being executed.
OFF Displays the step where the robot is in motion.
NO_SJISCONV ON Does not convert character codes between SJIS and EUC
when executing save/load.
OFF Converts character codes between SJIS and EUC when
executing save/load.
NOPENABLE ON Enables NOP instruction.
OFF Disables NOP instruction.
SIGRSTCONF ON Resets the set signals if 0 is specified at the time of manual
outputting of signals.
OFF Resets the set signals available for block teaching if 0 is
specified at the time of manual outputting of signals.
WAITREL_AUTO ON Calls up the Wait Break (wait override) automatically.
OFF Does not call up the Wait Break (wait override) automatically.
8-57
STAT_ON_KYBD ON Displays status information on keyboard screen.

OFF Does not display status information on keyboard screen.
CONF_ ON Enables configuration change of the 5-axis robot in linear
VARIABLE interpolation motion.
OFF Disables configuration change of the 5-axis robot in linear
interpolation motion.
SF_OPEN_ERRO ON Error occurs when the safety fence is open.
R OFF Error does not occur when the safety fence is open.
CVMOVE.NOBRE ON Robot moves smoothly without BREAK movement when

AK switching the mode between conveyor synchronization and
non-synchronization.
OFF Robot moves with BREAK movement when switching the
mode between conveyor synchronization and
non-synchronization.
PROG.DATE ON Adds the edit date to program when saving data.
OFF Does not add the edit date to program when saving data.
INSERTSTEP_CU ON After a step insertion, step number of the selected step before
RRENT insertion is displayed on the TP.
OFF After a step insertion, step number of the newly inserted step is
displayed on the TP.
INVALID.TPKEY_ ON Turns TPKEY_S switch OFF while A is pressed.
S OFF Turns TPKEY_S switch ON while A is pressed.
DIVIDE.TPKEY_S ON Allocates the left A to TPKEY_S switch and the right A to
TPKEY_A switch.
OFF Turns both of TPKEY_S and PKEY_A swicthes ON when
either the right or the left A is pressed.
CBS_TOOLCHG ON Enables Cubic-S tool switching function.
OFF Disables Cubic-S tool switching function.
CBS_AUXTOOL1 ON Set the data of tool no. 1 - 9 in Aux. 0304 as the data of tool
no. 1 – 9 of Cubic-S.
OFF Set the data of tool no. 1 - 9 in Aux. 0304 as the data of tool
no. 11 – 19 of Cubic-S.
ERROUT_TEACH ON Outputs the dedicated signal “External error output” in teach
mode.
OFF Does not output the dedicated signal “External error output” in
teach mode.
8-58
RECORD_NO_CO ON Does not display confirmation screen when editing steps, such
NFIRM as overwriting or modifying.
OFF Displays confirmation screen when editing steps, such as
overwriting or modifying.
PGNAME_DISP ON Does not omit the program name (other than its number) to
display on TP screen when the program has the name and the
number such as “pg xx”.
OFF Displays only the program number on TP screen when the
program has the name and the number such as “pg xx”.
PROG.CYC ON Adds the number of playing program to saving data.
OFF Does not add the number of playing program to saving data.
The names of system switches and the default settings vary depending on specification.
indicates default settings.
AUX. 0503 POS. DEVIATION ERROR RANGE AT E-STOP
This function sets an allowable position deviation range for each axis to check for position errors
when motor power is reapplied after emergency stop.
Position deviation = | (current joint value at restart) – (joint value at the last E-stop) |
If 0.000 is entered, this error check is not performed. Take note that setting too small a value
causes an error even under normal conditions when restarting after Emergency stop.
The purpose of this function is to prevent the robot from interfering with peripheral equipment
(jigs, workpiece, etc.) when restarting after E-Stop.
Move cursor to JT1 - JT6 and input

the data. If the setting is correct,
press ↵. Values are stored when
8-59
AUX. 0504 ENCODER VALUE ERROR RANGE AT POWER-ON
This function sets an encoder value difference to be treated as a deviation error when encoder
values at controller power ON and OFF are compared.
Encoder value difference = | (joint value when turning controller power ON) – (joint value when
the last time controller power was turned OFF) |
Take notice that setting too small a value causes an error even in normal conditions when the
system is operating within design performance specifications.
Move cursor to JT1 - JT6 and input

AUX. 0505 ROBOT INSTALLATION POSTURE
The +Z direction of the base coordinate motion can be set perpendicular upwards during teaching,
once the actual installation posture is made to match the posture set in the controller.
The direction of robot’s base coordinates is set as shown in the figure below. However, the
value of the base coordinates must have O, A, and T set to 0 (zero) in Aux. 0506.
8-60
Floor Ceiling
Wall Wall2
Select the desired setting posture by

A＋←/→. Input an angle value to
make an angle around X axis. If the
setting is correct, press ↵. All
settings are stored when “Setting
8-61
AUX. 0506 BASE COORDINATES (EQUIV. TO BASE INSTRUCTION OF AS

LANGUAGE)
Sets new base coordinates of the robot. Specify the pose of the new base coordinates with
respect to the null base coordinates by inputting the origin position (X,Y,Z) and the orientation
(O,A,T) values of the new base coordinates.
Z Z Z
Y Ｔ
Ｏ Y
Ö Ａ Ö
Y
X X
X
8-62
AUX. 0507 MOTION LIMITS (EQUIV. TO ULIMIT, LLIMIT COMMAND OF AS

LANGUAGE)
This function sets the upper and lower limits of robot motion range for all the axes, on the
software.
！ WARNING
This motion range limit is effective only on the software. Safety cannot be
ensured if only the software limits are used for restricting motion.
[ NOTE ]
These values are set to the maximum range for the robot
at factory shipment, if not specified beforehand.
Move cursor to Lower Limit/Upper

Limit for each JT and input data. If
AUX. 0508 SLOW REPEAT
Sets slow repeat speed as a percentage of the maximum repeat speed of the robot. [Duration of
Slow Repeat] sets duration of slow repeat from the time of restart in seconds. This setting is
effective only when system switch SLOW_START is ON and the mode is set to repeat mode or
Fast check (option).
Input data for each item. If 0 is set
in [Duration of Slow Repeat], slow
repeat is effective only for current
step. If the setting is correct, press
↵. Values are stored when “Setting
8-63
AUX. 0509 INTERFACE PANEL
This function enables the setting of devices, such as switches, lamps and so on for use on the
interface panel of the teach pendant screen. The types of devices and their positions for display
can be set by this function. For more details, refer to Chapter 9.
AUX. 0510 COLLISION DETECTION FUNCTION (OPTION)
This function detects the crash or interference of the robot arm/tool with peripheral equipment
including workpiece, jig, etc. via software without using sensors. Upon reaching the set
threshold, Emergency Stop is applied.
This function consists of the following five sub functions. Data settings should be different for
teach and repeat modes. For more details, refer to the optional manual “Collision Detection
Manual”, a separate volume.
8-64
AUX. 0512 DEVIATION LIMIT FOR CONTINUING
This function sets the deviation limit from restart position for each axis when continuing
programmed operation.
Axis deviation at restart position = |(Current axis value at restart) – (Axis value at the last stop by
cycle-start OFF)|
The purpose of this warning detection is to prevent a robot from interfering with peripheral
objects such as jigs and workpiece when returning the robot to the last stop pose.
Input allowable deviation range for

each axis, and press ↵. When
setting the limit value to “0.000”, no
error check is executed at the time of
restart. Values are stored when
[ NOTE ]
Setting too small values may cause an error at
restart even under normal operating conditions.
The screen on the left appears when

deviation exceeds the set limit at the
time of restart. Press <Continue> to
continue operation after returning to
the last stopped pose at slow repeat
speed in joint interpolation mode.
[ NOTE ]
The deviation from the last stop position is not
checked when restarting a robot by external signals.
8-65
AUX. 0518 MOVING AREA XYZ LIMITS
This function sets the upper and lower limits within the XYZ area of world coordinates, including
traverse axis, to control the robot motion based on the TCP. This function is valid only for
motion in repeat, check and teach modes. (The check is not executed when teaching and
changing/ registering pose data.) Moving from out of range to within the range is allowed.

the upper/lower limits. If the
setting is correct, press ↵. Values
are stored when “Setting complete.”
is displayed.
[ NOTE ]
1. If the same values are set for the upper and lower limits, the
motion range check is not executed.
2. The area of XYZ including traverse axis is checked.
（Only in systems where robot cooperates with traverse axis.）
3. If the lower limit exceeds the upper limit, error occurs.
AUX. 0601 DEDICATED INPUT SIGNALS (EQUIV. TO DEFSIG INPUT OF AS LANG.)
This function sets the dedicated input signals. Refer to the External I/O Manual, a separate
volume, for the function of each signal. The signals displayed on the screen vary depending
on software version and application.
Display example
8-66
Move cursor to the desired signal, and select [DEDICATED] or [CANCEL] by A＋←/→.
Then, input a signal number (channel number) to be allocated to the signal. If the setting is
correct, press ↵.
[ NOTE ]
Although JUMP_ST and RPS_ST are output signals, their
settings are done here.
AUX. 0602 DEDICATED OUTPUT SIGNALS (EQUIV. TO DEFSIG OUTPUT OF AS

LANG.)
This function sets the dedicated output signals. For the function of each signal, refer to the
External I/O Manual, a separate volume. The signals displayed on the screen vary depending
on software version and application.
Display example
8-67
Move cursor to the desired signal, and select [DEDICATED] or [CANCEL] by

A＋←/→. Then, input a signal number (channel number) to be allocated to the signal. If the
AUX. 0603 DEDICATED INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS DISPLAY
This function displays the dedicated input and output signals that are currently set. The
setting is configured in Aux. 0601 and Aux. 0602.
Display example
AUX. 0604 OX SPECIFICATION SETTING (OPTION)
Output types can be set for each OX signal using teach pendant. Set the length of pulse when
selecting [Pulse] as its [Type]. For more details, refer to Chapter 14.
1. Move cursor to [Type] for the

desired OX signal number. To
specify the signal type, input 0, 1,
2, or 3, corresponding to Each
Step, Keep, Double (XOR), and
Pulse. Default setting for all
signals is 0 (Each Step).
8-68
2. Move cursor to [Pulse] as shown

3 in screen on the left, and input
the numeric data.
3. For signals OX33 to OX64, press

<Next Page> and set as done
above. If the setting is correct,
press ↵. Settings are stored
displayed.
AUX. 0605 CLAMP SPECIFICATIONS
This function varies depending on application field. The screen below is for spot welding and
handling operations. For sealing specification, refer to Chapter 16.
This function consists of the following six sub-functions to set the specifications of the clamp
signals. For more details, refer to Chapter 13.
8-69
AUX. 0606 SIGNAL NAME
This function enables naming input/output signals and internal signals to indicate their functions.
The maximum number of signals for naming is 64 for each signal type. When the signal
number is set to 0 or no name is input, nothing is registered.
1. Select the desired type of signals.
2. Move cursor to [Signal No.] and

input the signal number.
3. Move cursor to the [Name] of the

desired signal.
8-70
4. Pressing <Input> displays the

keyboard screen. Input the name
and press <ENTER>.
5. Set the other signal names in the

same way. After setting all
desired signals, press ↵. Names
are stored when “Setting
complete.” is displayed. To
cancel any names input thus far,
press <All Clear> before pressing
↵. The set names are displayed
with the signal number on the I/O
name monitor screen of
monitor1/2.
AUX. 0607 SIGNAL SETTING OF ARM ID BOARD
This function allocates signals for giving and receiving I/O signals through the arm ID board with
daughter board. For more details, refer to the optional manual “Arm ID Board Instruction
AUX. 0608 SIGNAL ALLOCATION (OPTION)
A field network can be constructed by connecting the robot controller with components within the
FA system via various types of Fieldbus. To build this network, assign communication
recipients and the signal numbers to be used via this function.
8-71
This function consists of the six sub functions below. For more details, refer to the optional
manual “General Fieldbus I/O Usage Manual”, a separate volume.
AUX. 0610 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS IN ROBOT ARM
Only for RS03 robot, this function specifies whether to enable user sensor input and built-in valve
output functions. For more details, refer to “Internal I/O Signal for RS03” in the “External I/O
Manual”, a separate volume. For robots other than RS03 robot, set to [Disable].
AUX. 0611 NUMBER OF I/O SIGNALS
This function sets the number of output signals, input signals, and internal signals used in
Fieldbus. For more details, refer to the optional manual “General Fieldbus I/O Usage Manual”,
a separate volume.
8-72
AUX. 0620 KLOGIC CONTROL (OPTION)
This function controls the sequence of tasks for the robot system via KLogic software built into
the controller. This requires no external control panel or installation of printed circuit boards for
that purpose. Selecting [1. KLogic Ladder Display] displays the ladder screen of the last or
currently executing KLogic basic operation part program (lsqpg). For more details, refer to the
optional manual “KLogic / KLadder Operation Manual”, a separate volume.
AUX. 0702 ERROR LOGGING DISPLAY (EQUIVALENT TO ERRLOG OF AS

LANGUAGE)
This function displays a history of the errors in chronological order with the most recent entry
first. These logs include data such as time of occurrence, the error code and the message. The
following six kinds of error logs are available.
8-73
AUX. 070201 ALL
Displays every item recorded in the

log.
AUX. 070202 OPERATION ERROR (P)
Displays a history of the operation

errors. To display this log, set
[Logging Operation Error And
Warning] to [Enable] in Aux.
070206.
AUX. 070203 MECHANICAL/CONTROL WARNING (W)
Displays a history of warnings output

from the controller. To display this
log, set [Logging Operation Error
And Warning] to [Enable] in Aux.
070206.
8-74
AUX. 070204 ERROR (E)
Displays the error log contents.
AUX. 070205 FATAL ERROR (D)
Displays a history of fatal errors

output from the controller.
AUX. 070206 PROPERTY OF LOGGING
This function specifies which errors are omitted from the log. Also, it is possible to specify I/O
signals so that their ON/OFF statuses are stored in the log at time of error occurrence.
To specify an error, input its code as

shown in the error messages list,
replacing its first P,W,E,D character
with -1, -2, -3, -4 respectively. Input
data for each item. To log operation
errors and warnings, set [Logging
Operation Error And Warning] to
[Enable]. If setting is correct, press
↵. Signal numbers are stored when
8-75
AUX. 0703 OPERATION LOGGING DISPLAY (EQUIV. TO OPLOG INSTRUCTION OF

AS LANGUAGE)
This function displays a history of operations in order of most recent entry first.
AUX. 070301 ALL
Displays all operations stored in the

log.
AUX. 070302 OPERATION LOGGING
Displays a history of operations.
8-76
AUX. 070303 COMMAND LOGGING
Displays a history of commands

stored in the operation log.
AUX. 070305 PROPERTY OF LOGGING
This function specifies the I/O signals whose ON/OFF status are to be stored in the log with the
operation history.
Specifies I/O signals numbers to be

logged. If the setting is correct,
press ↵. Signal numbers are stored
displayed.
AUX. 0704 MAINTENANCE LOG
This function executes the registration/ display/ deletion of maintenance logs on the arm ID board.
For more details, refer to the optional manual “Arm ID Board Instruction Manual”, a separate
volume.
8-77
AUX. 0706 OPERATING DATA DISPLAY
This function displays robot operation information: hour meter operation time, controller power
ON time, servo ON time, and the number of times of motor power ON, servoing ON and E-Stop.
Also, the total accumulated operation time and displacement for each axis is also logged.
1. Operation information, from

[HOUR METER] to [Frequency
of E-STOP] are displayed.
2. Pressing <Next Page> displays

the operation information logged
for each axis.
AUX. 0707 MAINTENANCE SUPPORT (OPTION)
This function displays the information necessary for robot maintenance.
This function contains the following two sub functions. For more details, refer to the
optional manual “Maintenance Support Manual”, a separate volume.
8-78
AUX. 0708 DATA STORAGE (OPTION)
This function sets the data to be displayed by Data Storage function.
1. Select [1. Setting].
2. Select the desired data to be

displayed in graph form. Input
data for conditions in the
following screen.
For more details, refer to the optional manual “Data Storage Function Manual”, a separate
volume.
AUX. 0709 MOTOR TORQUE INFORMATION (OPTION)
This function displays the peak current value to each axis motor of the robot. This screen
displays an additional sub-menu for the Reduction Gear Failure Prediction Function, if the
function is enabled. For more details, refer to the optional manual, “Failure Prediction Function
for Reduction Gear”, a separate volume.
8-79
AUX. 070901 PEAK CURRENT
This function displays program, step, peak current value, percentage of peak current value to
motor current limit, and the occurrence date/time of the peak current. Information is for each
axis is displayed.
Pressing <Clear> clears all data.
If the percentage of peak current value to motor current limit reaches 100.0 (%), the warning
screen is displayed. (Robot will not stop.) The date, the axis number, the step, peak current
value, and countermeasure are displayed as shown in the following screen.
Selecting [Reset] resets the
warning and closes the warning
screen. Selecting [Close]
closes the warning screen
without resetting the warning.
AUX. 070902 DUTY
This function displays motor duty. [Average] displays the average motor duty for the last
several tens of seconds. [Program] displays the motor duty for the section of the program
specified by the I2PG command.
8-80
AUX. 070903 FAILURE PREDICTION SETTING
This function enables or disables the failure prediction function. This function automatically
monitors the load on the drive system of the robot, and detects possible failure of the reduction
unit before motor current becomes too high. When failure prediction function is enabled,
motor current values are automatically measured five times during the program execution.
An average of these values is stored as the standard value for detecting warnings at every
program execution thereafter. This standard value is called base data.
Select [Enable] or [Disable] by

A＋←/→. If the setting is correct,
AUX. 070904 BASE DATA
This function displays the result after completing the motor current measurement as shown in
the screen below.
Pressing <Next page> displays

the information of other
programs.
8-81
AUX. 0717 ENCODER CHECK FUNCTION
This function contains the following three sub-functions.
AUX. 071701 LOGGING DATA DISPLAY
Displays encoder values for each axis.
AUX. 071702 COUNTER RESET
This function specifies the axis on which to reset the encoder rotation counter values.
1. Input the desired axis and press

↵.
8-82

Select [Yes] to execute, or select
[No] to cancel.
3. Joint number is selected when

AUX. 071703 ALARM FUNCTION
The alarm is displayed if the encoder rotation counter values exceed the values set in this
function.
Input the rotation counter values. If

8-83
AUX. 0719 DIAG (DIAGNOSTIC) FUNCTION
The alarm is displayed if current status exceeds any of the values set in the Lifetime Alarm
Setting screen.
1. Select [1.Lifetime Alarm Setting].
2. Select [Enable] or [Disable] to set

whether or not to display alarm.
When selecting [Enable], input
hours or the number of times for
alarm notification. If the setting is
correct, press ↵. Settings and
8-84
AUX. 0724 EXECUTED PROGRAM LOGGING
This function displays date and time of step execution in the program in reverse chronological
order. Each step is classified and displayed according to robot program, PC program 1 - 5 as
follws.
Input 1 in [Stepper No.] to

display the execution date
and time of steps in robot
program.
Input 1001 - 1005 in [Stepper

No.] to display the execution
date and time of steps in PC
program 1 - 5.
AUX. 0801 MEMORY AVAILABLE (EQUIV. TO FREE INSTRUCTION OF AS

LANGUAGE)
This function displays memory available for programming or recording variables. Available
memory is displayed in both bytes and percentage.
8-85
[ NOTE ]
A portion of the memory mounted in the robot controller is dedicated for
fundamental robot operations. You can use the amount of bytes displayed
on screen. Value in parentheses shows percentage of max. available amount.
AUX. 0802 INHIBIT RECORD
This function prevents the taught program from being rewritten or changed by mistake.
Setting [Record] to [Inhibit] prohibits any attempt to teach and change the following:
pose data, parameters values for instructions, or data in auxiliary functions.
Setting [Program Change] to [Inhibit] prohibits inputs from these commands:

EDIT, TEACH, COPY, XFER, and LOAD. If [Program Change] is set to [Inhibit] during
EDIT mode, the setting takes effect after exiting EDIT mode.
Move cursor to each item and select

[Accept] or [Inhibit] by A＋←/→.
If the setting is correct, press ↵.
Selections are stored when “Setting
8-86
AUX. 0803 RESET CHECK SUM ERROR
This function allows the user to clear sum check error (E0903) if set to [Enable], when a sum
check error occurs on the system data. While this function is enabled, if any sum check errors
remain in the data, the error cannot be cleared. In such case, instructions are displayed for
changing the data that includes the sum check error.
[ NOTE ]
This setting is automatically set to Disable when
turning the controller power OFF, then ON.
Select [Enable] or [Disable] by

A＋←/→. If the setting is
correct, press ↵. Selection is
is displayed.
AUX. 0804 SOFTWARE VERSION
This function displays the following information:

software version installed in robot controller and the teach pendant, robot model, robot serial
number, the number of input/output signals, etc.
8-87
AUX. 0805 INITIALIZE SYSTEM
This function initializes the controller memory.
！ CAUTION
Initializing the system erases all the programs and variables

data from the memory.
1. Select [Initialize] and press ↵.

[No] to cancel.
3. Initialization is finished when

8-88
System initialization will:

(1) Delete all programs,
(2) Delete all variables,
(3) Initialize system switches settings, and
(4) Initialize parameters values registered as auxiliary data in compound instructions (block
teaching instructions)
The only information not affected by the initialization process is:

(1) Zeroing data, and
(2) Settings for user dedicated signals.
AUX. 0807 CHECK SPECIFICATION
This function sets whether or not to execute CALL, TIMER, JUMP/END, OX (output signal),
WX (input signal), clamp instructions, etc., when executing taught programs in check mode.
CALL function Enable Executes CALL instruction in check mode.

Disable Ignores CALL instruction in check mode.
TIMER Enable Enables timer waiting in taught steps.
Disable Disables timer waiting in taught steps.
JUMP/END Enable Performs jump/end processing.
Disable Does not perform jump/end processing.
OX Enable Outputs signals externally from the robot.
Disable Does not output signals externally from the robot.
WX Enable Does not ignore external input signals.
Disable Ignores external input signals.
CLAMP Enable Enables clamp signal processing.
Disable Disables clamp signal processing.
STEP Enable While CHECK ONCE is selected, it is possible to go to the
CONTINUOUS next or previous step by CHECK GO or CHECK BACK.
Disable While CHECK ONCE is selected, it is possible to go to the
next or previous step by A＋CHECK GO or CHECK BACK.
VELOCITY Enable Robot operates at max. speed of 250 mm/s regardless of the
PRIORITY taught speed. Valid only in CHECK ONCE mode.
Disable The lower the speed is taught, the quicker the robot
accelerates/decelerates.
VELOCITY Enable Only when VELOCITY PRIORITY is set effective, robot
PRIORITY2 operates with priority on speed (250 mm/s), regardless if the
mode is set to CHECK ONCE or CHECK CONT.
Disable Follows the setting for VELOCITY PRIORITY.
JUMP Enable Executes JUMP instruction in check mode.
instruction Disable Ignores JUMP instruction in check mode.
8-89
The difference between check forward and check backward in terms of motion is as follows.
However, some software versions are not equipped with these functions.
CHECK GO CHECK BACK

CALL function Depends on setting Always ineffective
TIMER Depends on setting Always ineffective
JUMP/END Depends on setting Always ineffective
OX Depends on setting Depends on setting
WX Depends on setting Always ineffective
CLAMP Depends on setting Depends on setting
Select [Enable] or [Disable] by A＋

←/→. If the setting is correct,
press ↵. Selections are stored when
AUX. 0808 ENVIRONMENT DATA
In automatic operation, servoing turns OFF automatically after the period of time set in this
function elapses, when robot is waiting for a WX signal.
1. Input data for each item. Inputting 0

sets AUTO SERVO OFF ineffective.
2. Set [Teach Pendant] to [Disconn.] to

execute automatic operation without
TP connected.
3. Input the number of pages in [Number

of I/F Panel Pages] to change the
number of I/F panel pages.
4. If the setting is correct, press ↵.

Settings and values are stored when
8-90
Teach Pendant Disconnection
Normally the robot operates with TP connected. Automatic operation is possible without TP
connected using the following procedures.
Procedures to set [Teach Pendant] to [Disconn.]:
(1) Set TEACH/REPEAT on the operation panel to REPEAT.

(2) Set [Teach Pendant] to [Disconn.] and press ↵.
(3) Turn OFF the controller power.
(4) Unfasten the teach pendant connector and remove the TP.
(5) Insert the short-circuit plug.
(6) Turn ON the controller power.
[ NOTE ]
Set the TEACH/REPEAT to REPEAT without fail before setting to Disconn.
(disconnect). In teach mode, the setting automatically returns to Conn.
(connect) when TP is connected.
AUX. 0809 TIME/DATE (EQUIVALENT TO TIME INSTRUCTION OF AS LANGUAGE)
This function sets the current year, month, day and time for the clock built into the controller.
This time setting is used for the current time shown on the teach pendant and in the error log.
Input data in each item of [Date].

To input [Time], take into
consideration the time lost for
pressing ↵ . After inputting data,
press ↵ quickly.
[ NOTE ]
The moment this function is selected will be the time displayed on
the screen. Therefore, if ↵ is pressed without updating the setting,
delayed time will be shown instead of the actual current time. Be
sure to press R if not changing the setting.
8-91
AUX. 0810 PC PROGRAM RUN/STOP
This function contains the following six sub-functions and enables PC programs to be run or
held (stopped).
AUX. 081001 SELECTS START (PCEXECUTE)
This function executes the designated PC program. The program number and starting step can
be selected.
1. Input the desired number in [PC

Program No.]. Or, move cursor
to [Program Name] and press ↵
to display the program list.
Select the desired program from
the list.
2. Input the desired numbers in

[Repeat Cycles], [Start Step] and
press ↵. If setting is correct,
robot starts to execute the
program.
8-92
AUX. 081002 SELECTS ABORT (PCABORT)
This function interrupts the currently executing PC program.
1. Input the desired program

number and press ↵.

[No] to cancel.
3. PC Program number is selected

displayed.
AUX. 081003 SELECTS STOP (PCEND)
This function stops the currently running PC program after execution of the STOP instruction, or
when the final step of the program has been executed.
8-93

number.
2. Pressing ↵ displays the

confirmation box. Select [Yes]
to execute or select [No] to
cancel.
3. The PC Program is selected

displayed.
AUX. 081004 SELECT CONTINUE (PCCONTINUE)
This function restarts the PC program that is currently interrupted by PCABORT or PCEND.
Input the desired program number

and press ↵.
8-94
AUX. 081005 KILL PC PRG. (PCKILL)
This function cancels the currently selected PC program, and the stack becomes empty.

number and press ↵.

[No] to cancel.
3. The PC Program number is

is displayed.
AUX. 081006 SELECTS STATUS (PCSTATUS)
This function displays status information for the currently executing PC program.
1. Input the desired PC program

number.
8-95
2. Pressing ↵ displays the status.
AUX. 0811 CHOOSE LANGUAGE
This function sets the language displayed on TP screen. The selectable languages vary depending
on the shipping destination of the robot. Although the display language can be changed, not every
language or combination of languages can be chosen.
AUX. 081101 CHOOSE LANGUAGE
Select the desired language by

A＋←/→. If the setting is correct,
The first and second language for the

TP is set in Aux. 081102.
8-96
！ 1.CAUTION
After registering the change of the display language, the previous screen is shown
again. At this time, the screen is refreshed so that all menus and on-screen items
can be redisplayed in the new language. Also, some message displays, for errors,
etc., may not display correctly. However, the display will only show the selected
language after exiting from the current screen.
AUX. 081102 LANGUAGE ALLOCATION FUNCTION
Refer to the list of languages and input

the desired number into [First language]
and [Second language] as shown here.
[ NOTE ]
Turn the contorller power OFF and then ON after changing the
setting to make the new setting effective.
AUX. 0812 NETWORK SETTING
It is possible to treat the robot as a node on the information network when controller is connected
to Ethernet using the ethernet port on main CPU board. This function sets the necessary IP
address, host name, subnet mask, gateway IP address, DNS server IP address, and domain name.
Net work address is determined by bitwise AND of IP address and Subnet mask.
There are two ethernet ports on main CPU board. The upper ethernet port is Port 1 and the
lower one is Port 2. Both ports data can be set by this function.
1. To set data for Port 1, input data
for each item. For [Hostname]
and [Domain Name], move
cursor to each item and press ↵
to display the keyboard screen,
and then input the name. If the
8-97

Select [Yes] to execute or
select [No] to cancel.
3. Set data are stored when

“Setting complete.” is
displayed.
4. To set data for Port 2, press

<Next Page> to move to the
settings page for Port 2.
5. Set data for Port 2 in the same

way as Port 1. Don’t set the
same network address to Port1
and Port2. The same setting
will result in abnormal
communication.
8-98
6. The same network address can

not be set to both Port1 and
Port2.
AUX. 0818 USB KEYBOARD
101 and 106 keyboards are available as USB keyboard. This function specifies the type of USB
keyboard to be used. Specifying [0:Not selected] automatically selects a keyboard depending on
the display language. 106 keyboard is selected for Japanese and 101 keyboard is for the other
languages.
Input the type number of keyboard.

Selection result is stored when
AUX. 0819 OPERATION PANELLESS SETTING
This fuction enables or disables HOLD/RUN, CYCLE START, MOTOR POWER switches on
TP. These switches become inoperative when they are set to Disable. The setting on this
function is effective to the switches only on the TP, not effective to those on the optional operation
panel.
8-99
AUX. 0897 SELECTS AUXILIARY FUNCTION
This function sets a skill level and restricts access to individual auxiliary functions. Levels 1 to
3 are available. Setting a higher level indicates more skill is required for that function. To
define the skill level at which the auxiliary functions may be executed, specify in Aux. 0898.
Setting skill level 3 does not display the specified auxiliary functions. Setting skill levels 1 or 2
redisplays the specified functions.
1. Move cursor to the desired

auxiliary function group item and
press ↵.
2. This displays the auxiliary

functions for that group. Specify
and input a required skill level for
each function. Screen at left lists
the aux. functions for the [1.
Program Conversion] group. If
settings are correct, press ↵.
Skill levels are stored when
AUX. 0898 CHANGE OPERATION LEVEL
This function specifies the operation level which allows/prohibits executable aux. functions,
based on the skill level set to each aux. function in Aux. 0897.
For example, specifying operation level 2 allows the execution of all auxiliary functions set to
skill level 1 and 2 in Aux. 0897. (Specifying operation level 1 enables executing only auxiliary
functions set to skill level 1 in Aux. 0897.)
8-100
Input 1 or 2 for [Operation Level].

If the setting is correct, press, ↵.
Selection is stored when “Setting
AUX.1101 HANDLING/PALLETIZING (OPTION)
This function contains the following four sub-functions and sets data for the simple palletizing
function. For more details, refer to the optional manual “Simple Palletizing Function Manual”,
a separate volume.
AUX.1102 CONVEYOR SYNCHRONIZATION (OPTION)
This function contains the following four sub-functions and sets data for conveyor synchronous
operation. For more details, refer to the optional manual “Conveyor Synchronous Operation
8-101
AUX.1103 SENSING (OPTION)
This function sets data for the sensing function so that the workpiece can be detected by the
sensor on the robot. For more details, refer to the optional manual “Sensing Function Manual”,
a separate volume.
AUX.1123 PROGRAM QUEUE (OPTION)
This function edits data and sets environment of program queue.
AUX.112301 DISPLAY/CHANGE
This function executes display, insertion and deletion of the data in program queue.
Input program number for each address
and press <Insertion> to insert the
program. Move cursor to the desired
program number and press <Delete> to
delete the program. Press <All
Delete> to delete all the programs
registered in the program queue.
8-102
[ NOTE ]
1. 100 programs can be registered in program queue.
2. Unfinished programs can be registered with numbers in program queue.
3. The same program number can be registered a number of times.
4. The program in a program queue is playbacked in the order of address number.
AUX.112302 ENVIRONMENT SET
Sets the environment of program queue.
Select [PROGRAM QUEUE SHIFT

TYPE] and [PROGRAM QUEUE
SHIFT MODE] by A＋←/→. If
Program queue shift type

Select the type of shift to apply to the queue table, when program queue is updated.
When program is switched, programs are shifted to forward addresses as shown
below. When the last program in the queue is executed, all the programs
disappear.
FIFO Example
(First In Address 1 2 3 4 5 6
First Out) Program 10 11 3 5 6 0
↓ Program switch
Address 1 2 3 4 5 6
Program 11 3 5 6 0 0
When program is switched, the executed program is registered again at the last
address of the queue and looped.
Example
Address 1 2 3 4 5 6
LOOP
Program 10 11 3 5 6 0
↓ Program switch
Address 1 2 3 4 5 6
Program 11 3 5 6 10 0
8-103
Program queue shift mode

This sets the program shift in the queue to be executed automatically or by external signals when
program is switched.
Internal shift: Programs are shifted automatically when the program is switched.
External shift: Programs are shifted by external signals.
8-104
E Series Controller 9. Interface Panel
9.0 INTERFACE PANEL
Typically, a operation panel, known as interlock panel, is required to operate the robot and
peripheral equipment together through a variety of hard switches and lamps. This controller
provides an interface panel screen on the TP and enables the setting of the switches and lamps,
changing arrangement of them etc. on the screen. This chapter describes this interface panel
screen.
9.1 METHOD FOR SWITCHING TO INTERFACE PANEL SCREEN
[I/F Panel] can be displayed on the pull-down menu in B area as shown in the screen below (top).
Moving cursor to [I/F Panel] and pressing ↵ switches the B and C areas to the interface panel as
shown in the screen below (bottom). Or, activate the B area, and press I/F Screen Change on
the TP. I/F Screen Change switches between teach screen ↔ interface panel screen each time
the key is pressed.
9-1
9.2 SETTING METHOD FOR INTERFACE PANEL SCREEN
Interface panel consists of several pages. Switch between interface panels by pressing [Next
Page] and [Prev Page] on the B area pull-down menu as shown in the screen below. The
number of pages of the interface panels can be set in Aux. 0808.
Each screen can have up to 28 devices (switches, lamps, etc.). Only devices that can be set in
Aux. 0509 are available for the I/F Panel.
Selecting Aux. 0509 displays the screen shown below. This screen also consists of the pages set
in Aux. 0808 with the page number displayed on the above right of the screen. Pressing
<Next Page> switches to the next screen.
Inputting a device type number 1 to 10, 13-16 or 21 under the device position number sets the
type of the device. Inputting 0 makes the device position blank on the interface panel. Once a
device type number is input, pressing <Set> displays the device setting screen corresponding to
its type.
9-2
9.3 SETTING METHOD FOR DEVICES
This section describes the function and procedure for setting devices provided in this controller.
9.3.1 PILOT LAMP
Inputting 1 in desired device position in the screen in Chapter 9.2, and pressing <Set> displays
the setting screen shown in the screen below. Figures on the next page show the lamps set in the
screen below.
Set each data field as follows.
A max. of ten characters can be input in each row of [Label 1 to 4]. Moving cursor to [Label 1
to 4] and pressing <Input> displays the keyboard screen to input the label name. The characters
“lamp” input in [Label 1] in the above screen are displayed on the top row as shown in the figure
on the next page. The characters input in [Label 2 to 4] are displayed on the second to fourth
rows under the [Label 1] characters.
Set the color of the characters in [Label Color], and the background color of the lamp in
[Background Color]. Via the above setting, the characters are black and the background is gray.
Refer to Chapter 9.3.16 for more details.
[Color (ON)/(OFF)] sets the lamp color when the signal set in [Signal Number (Lamp)] is ON
and OFF respectively.
The setting of the above screen turns the lamp red as shown in the figure on the next page (left)
when signal 2001 is ON, or blue as shown in the figure (middle) when signal 2001 is OFF. Or,
if setting [On] in the [Excl. Mark (1) in Sig OFF], an exclamation mark is displayed as shown in
the figure (right) when signal 2001 is OFF.
9-3
Characters of
Label 1
Red Blue
9.3.2 PUSH BUTTON
the setting screen shown below. Figures shown on the next page show the push buttons, set in
the screen below.
“switch” input in [Label 1] in the above screen are displayed on the top row as shown in the
figures on the next page. The characters input in [Label 2 to 4] are displayed on the second to
fourth rows under the [Label 1] characters.
Set the color of the characters in [Label Color]. Via the above setting, the characters are black.
[Color (ON)/(OFF)] sets the color when this switch is pressed and released respectively.
Pressing this switch turns ON the signal set in [Signal Number (Switch)]. When the same signal
as the set signal on the switch is ON, it automatically turns OFF if;
1. Interface panel screen is displayed or switched to the other screen.
2. Interface panel screen in the current page is switched to that of the other page.
9-4
The setting in the above screen turns the switch red as shown in the figure below (left) when the
switch is pressed and signal 1 turns ON, or blue as shown in the figure (right) when the switch is
released and signal 1 turns OFF.
Red Blue
Setting [Operation cond] to [Enable] disables operation of this switch on the interface panel. To
make it operable, turn the <INH/ACCEPT> switch displayed on the upper right of the screen in
Chapter 9.2 to the ACCEPT position.
9.3.3 PUSH BUTTON WITH LAMP
the setting screen shown below. Figures shown on the next page show the push button with
lamp, set in the screen below.
“button” input in [Label 1] in the above screen are displayed on the top row as shown in the
9-5
Pressing this switch turns ON the signal set in [Signal Number (Switch)].
When the signal set in [Signal Number (Lamp)] is ON, the switch is colored according to [Color
(ON)] regardless of the ON/OFF status of the switch. When the same signal as the set signal on
the switch is ON, it automatically turns OFF if;
1. Interface panel screen is displayed or is switched to the other screen.
2. Interface panel screen in the current page is switched to that of the other page.
When signal 2001 is OFF, the setting in the above screen turns the switch red as shown in the
figure below (left) when the switch is pressed and signal 2 turns ON, or blue as shown in the
figure (right) when the switch is released and signal 2 turns OFF.
When signal 2001 is ON, the switch is turned red as shown in the figure below (left) regardless of
whether or not the switch is pressed or released.
Red Blue
9.3.4 2-NOTCH SELECTOR SWITCH
the setting screen shown below. The figures shown on the next page show the 2-notch selector
switch, set in the screen below.
9-6
“2-switch” input in [Label 1] in the screen on the previous page are displayed on the top row as
shown in the figures below. The characters input in [Label 2 to 4] are displayed on the second to
Set the color of the characters in [Label Color]. Via the setting on the previous page, the
characters are black. Refer to Chapter 9.3.16 for more details.
Two types of switching are available for 2-notch switch. Select either [Up Down] or [Rotation]
in [Display Type].
[Color] sets the color of the switch when the switch is turned (Left) and (Right) or (Up) and
(Down).
When turned (Left) and (Right) or (Up) and (Down), the signal set in [Signal Number (Left),
(Right) or (Up), (Down)] turns ON.
For [Rotation] type, the setting in the screen on the previous page turns the switch red as shown in
the figure below (left) when the switch is turned (Left) and signal 3 turns ON, or blue as shown in
the figure (right) when the switch is turned (Right) and signal 4 turns ON.
Red Blue
For [Up Down] type, the switch turns red as shown in the figure below (left) when pressed to the
(Up) position and signal 3 turns ON, or blue as shown in the figure (right) when pressed to
(Down) position and signal 4 turns ON.
Red
Blue
9-7
9.3.5 3-NOTCH SELECTOR SWITCH
the setting screen shown below. Figures shown on the next page show the 3-notch selector
switch, set in the screen below.
“3-switch” input in [Label 1] in the above screen are displayed on the top row as shown in the
Set the color of the characters in [Label Color]. Via the above setting the characters are black.
Two types of switching are available for 3-notch switch. Select either [Up Down] or [Rotation]
in [Display Type].
[Color] sets the color of the switch when the switch is turned (Left), (Middle), and (Right) or (Up),
(Middle), and (Down).
When turned (Left), (Middle) and (Right) or (Up), (Middle) and (Down), the signal set in [Signal
Number (Left), (Middle), (Right) or (UP), (Middle), (Down)] turns ON.
9-8
For [Rotation] type, the setting in the above screen turns the switch red as shown in the figure
below (left) when the switch is turned (Left) and signal 5 turns ON, or yellow as shown in the
figure below (middle) when the switch is turned (Middle) and signal 6 turns ON, or blue as
shown in the figure (right) when switch is turned (Right) and signal 7 turns ON.
Red Yellow Blue
For [Up Down] type, the switch turns red as shown in the figure below (left) when set to the (Up)
position and signal 5 turns ON, or yellow as shown in the figure (middle) when set to (Middle)
and signal 6 turns ON, or blue as shown in the figure (right) when set to (Down) and signal 7
turns ON.
Red
Yellow
Blue
Setting [Operation cond] to [Enable] disables operation for this switch on the interface panel. To
9.3.6 DIGITAL SWITCH
the setting screen shown below. The figure on the next page shows the digital switch, set in the
screen below.
9-9
A max. of ten characters can be input in each row of [Label 1 or 2]. Moving cursor to [Label 1
or 2] and pressing <Input> displays the keyboard screen to input the label name. The characters
“digital” input in [Label 1] in the screen on the previous page are displayed on the top row as
shown below. The characters input in [Label 2] are displayed on the second row.
Set the color of the characters in [Label Color], and the background color of the switch in
[Background Color]. Via the setting on the previous page, the characters are black and the
background is gray. Refer to Chapter 9.3.16 for more details.
[Figures (2-5)] sets how many digits can be displayed on the digital switch.
[Input Type] sets how to input numbers on the digital switch, by ten key or by pushing the switch.
When selecting [Ten Keys], pressing the switch displays the Digital SW Input screen, then input
NUMBER (0-9). When selecting [Push Switch], the number only increases by pressing the
switch.
[Data Limit] sets a restriction on the range of allowable input data. If the limit is set ON, it is
necessary to specify both upper limit and lower limit.
The number set in [Top Signal No.] becomes the first channel of the signal output from the digital
switch. [Number of Signals Used] corresponds to the bit number of the output data.
[Signal Type] sets how the input number is output either by BCD or binary.
In [Minus Value], set [On] if there are two types of input data, using plus or minus signs.
The screen on the previous page sets [Top Signal No.] 2001, [Number of Signals Used] 8, [Signal
Type] [Binary], and [Minus Value] [Off]. Therefore, setting 60 in the digital switch in the figure
below outputs as follows.
Signal 2008 2007 2006 2005 2004 2003 2002 2001

Output State OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
9-10
When setting [Signal Type] [BCD] in the screen on the previous page, setting 60 in the digital
switch in the above figure outputs as follows.
Signal 2008 2007 2006 2005 2004 2003 2002 2001

Output State OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
9.3.7 DIGITAL DISPLAY
the setting screen shown in the screen below. The figure on the next page shows the digital
display, set in the screen below.
“display” input in [Label 1] in the above screen are displayed on the top row as shown in the
figure on the next page. The characters input in [Label 2] are displayed on the second row.
Set the color of the characters in [Label Color], and the background color of the display in
[Figures (2-5)] sets how many digits can be displayed on the digital display.
9-11
The number in [Top Signal No.] sets which input signal becomes the least significant bit.
[Number of Signals Used] corresponds to the bit number of the input data.
[Signal Type] sets how the input number is displayed either by BCD or binary.
In [Minus Value], set [On] if there are two types of input data, using plus or minus signs.
The screen on the previous page sets [Top Signal No.] 2001, [Number of Signals Used] 8, [Signal
Type] [Binary], and [Minus Value] [Off]. Therefore, when input signal is as follows, the digital
display displays as in the figure below.
Signal 2008 2007 2006 2005 2004 2003 2002 2001

Input State OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
9.3.8 VARIABLE DATA DISPLAY
the setting screen shown below. The figure on the next page shows the data display, set in the
screen below.
9-12
“data dis” input in [Label 1] in the above screen are displayed on the top row as shown in the
figure below. The characters input in [Label 2] are displayed on the second row.
Set the color of the characters in [Label Color], and the background color of the display in
[Background Color]. Via the setting on the previous page, the characters are black and the
background is gray. Refer to Chapter 9.3.16 for more details.
[Figures (2-5)] sets how many digits can be displayed on the variable data display.
In [Variable], input the variable name for the data to be displayed.
In [Data Type], set how to display the data, by real numbers or integers.
The screen on the previous page sets [Figures (2-5)] 4, [Variable] a, and [Data Type] [Int.].
Therefore, the data displayed when a=135 is as in the figure below.
Setting [Operation cond] to [Enable] disables display of data on this indicator on the interface
panel. To change the data, turn the <INH/ACCEPT> switch displayed in upper right of screen in
9.3.9 STRING DISPLAY WINDOW
the setting screen shown below.
9-13
In [Window Number], input a number (1-8). Up to eight string display windows can be set per
interface panel.
Inputting 1 in [Window Size] specifies the window to have the standard width, inputting 2
doubles the width, and inputting 3 triples the width.
Set the color of the window display in [Default Background Color]. Via the setting on the
previous page, the color of the window display is gray. Refer to Chapter 9.3.16 for more details.
Inputting IFPWPRINT 1,1,1,0,10=”kawasaki” on the keyboard screen displays the figure below*.
NOTE* For the procedure for inputting the string, refer to the IFPWPRINT instruction in “5.
Monitor Commands” of “AS Language Reference Manual”, a separate volume.
9-14
9.3.10 MONITOR COMMAND BUTTON
the setting screen shown below. The figures below show the monitor command button set in the
screen below.
“monitor” input in [Label 1] in the above screen are displayed on the top row as shown in the
figures below. The characters input in [Label 2 to 4] are displayed on the second to fourth rows
under the [Label 1] characters.
In [Command String No.] and [Command String], input the command to be executed. First,
allocate the command string number to [Command String No.]. The same number can not be
specified to the buttons of different commands. Then, input the command to be executed in
[Command String]. Moving cursor to [Command String] and pressing <Input> displays the
keyboard to input the string. Up to 75 characters can be input.
The setting of the above screen turns the switch red as shown in the figure below (left) and
executes “do home”, i.e. the robot returns to the home pose, when this switch is pressed, or blue
as shown in the figure (right) when the switch is released.
9-15
Red Blue
9.3.11 PALLETIZE ICON
the setting screen shown below. Figures shown on the next page show the palletize icon, set in
the screen below.
“palletize” input in [Label 1] in the above screen are displayed on the top row as shown in the
[Color [1]/[2]] sets the color of the palletize icon. The color in [1] sets the blue parts of the icon,
shown on right half of the setting screen, and the color in [2] sets the white part of the icon.
Pressing this switch turns ON the signal set in [Signal Number (Switch)].
9-16
Twelve kinds of [Work No.] can be specified by inputting a number (1 to 12). For [Pattern No.],
several patterns, which correspond to the work No., are available for the icon. Setting both
[Work No.] and [Pattern No.] displays a sample icon on the right side of the screen.
To display a frame around the icon, set [On] for [Frame on/off].
When signal 2001 is OFF, the settings in the above screen display the icon as shown in the figure
below (left). When signal 2001 is ON, the colors [1] and [2] of the switch invert as shown in the
figure below (right).
Pressing the palletize icon turns ON signal 1 and releasing the icon turns OFF the signal 1. The
color of the icon does not change regardless of whether or not the switch is pressed or released.
Inversion
9.3.12 STRING DATA DISPLAY
the setting screen shown below. The figure shown on the next page shows the string data
display, set in the screen below.
“str data” input in [Label 1] in the above screen are displayed on the top row as shown on the next
page. The characters input in [Label 2] are displayed on the second row.
9-17
Set the color of the characters in [Label Color], and the background color of the device in
In [Variable], input the string data to display. In this setting, $a is set in [Variable]. Therefore,
the figure below will be displayed if $a is ”kawasaki”.
Setting [Operation cond] to [Enable] disables display of this icon on the interface panel. To
enable display of this icon, turn the <INH/ACCEPT> switch displayed on upper right of screen in
9.3.13 2-SELECTOR SWITCH WITH LAMP
the setting screen shown below. The figures shown on the next page show the 2-selector switch
with lamp, set in the screen below.
“lamp 2-sw” input in [Label 1] in the above screen are displayed on the top row as shown in the
9-18
Two types of switching are available for 2-selector switch. Select either [Up Down] or
[Rotation] in [Display Type].
[Color (ON)/(OFF)] sets the colors of the lamp when the signal set in [Signal Number (Lamp)] is
ON and OFF respectively.
When the switch is turned (Left) and (Right) or (Up) and (Down), the signal set in [Signal
Number (Left), (Right) or (Up), (Down)] turns ON.
The setting of the screen on the previous page turns the switch red when signal 2001 is ON or
blue when the signal 2001 is OFF as shown below.
Signal 1 turns ON when the switch is turned (Left), and signal 2 turns ON when it is turned
(Right). The color of the switch does not change even if the switch is turned (Left)/(Right).
Red Blue
9.3.14 3-SELECTOR SWITCH WITH LAMP
the setting screen shown below. Figures shown on the next page show the 3-selector switch, set
in the screen below.
9-19
“lamp 3-sw” input in [Label 1] in the screen on the previous page are displayed on the top row as
shown in the figures below. The characters input in [Label 2 to 4] are displayed on the second to
Two types of switching are available for 3-selector switch. Select either [Up Down] or
[Rotation] in [Display Type].
[Color (ON)/(OFF)] sets the colors of the lamp when the signal set in [Signal Number (Lamp)] is
ON and OFF respectively.
When the switch is turned (Left), (Middle) and (Right) or (Up), (Middle) and (Down), the signal
set in [Signal Number (Left), (Middle), (Right) or (Up), (Middle), (Down)] turns ON.
The setting of the screen on the previous page turns the switch red when signal 2001 is ON or
blue when signal 2001 is OFF as shown below.
Signal 1 turns ON when the switch is turned (Left), signal 2 turns ON when it is turned (Middle),
and signal 3 turns On when it is turned (Right). The color of the switch does not change even if
the switch is turned (Left)/(Middle)/(Right).
Red Blue
9-20
9.3.15 SERVO DISPENSER
the setting screen shown below. The figures on the next page show the servo dispenser, set in
the screen below.
In [Parts], specify one of the parts shown in the right half of the screen with a number (1-11).
The part corresponding to the number will be displayed.
“damper” input in [Label 1] in the above screen are displayed on the top row as shown in the
screen on the next page. The characters input in [Label 2 to 4] are displayed on the second to
The servo dispenser icon changes when the signal set in [Signal Number] switches between ON
and OFF. However, the pump and pipe icons do not change even if the signal set in [Signal
Number] switches ON or OFF.
The setting of the above screen displays the damper as shown in the screen on the next page (top)
when signal 2001 is ON. The damper shown in screen on next page (bottom) is displayed when
signal 2001 is OFF.
Each part in the screen corresponds to the table below.
Damper Motor Gear pump Valve 1 Valve 2 Valve 3 Gun

Pump Pipe 1 Pipe 2 Pipe 3
9-21
9.3.16 LABEL COLORS
The following 15 colors are available. Specify the color by the number 0 to 15.
No. Color No. Color No. Color No. Color

0 Gray 4 Green 8 Pink 12 Navy
1 Blue 5 Pale Blue 9 White 13 Reddish Brown
2 Red 6 Yellow 10 Black 14 Dark Green
3 Orange 7 White 11 Cyan 15 Lavender
9-22
9.4 PAGE TITLE
On the interface panel screen, it is possible to set a title for each screen. To set the title, set [Page
Title] to [Enable] in the screen in Chapter 9.2 and press <Input>. For example, inputting the title
as shown below displays the screen on the bottom of this page.
When [Page Title] is set to [Disable] or when a title is not input, “Interface Panel”, the default title,
will be displayed even if [Page Title] is set to [Enable].
A max. of 60 characters can be input in [Page Title]. Moving cursor to [Page Title] and pressing
<Input> displays the keyboard screen to input the title.
9-23
9-24
E Series Controller 10. Automatic Tool (Coordinates Data) Registration
10.0 AUTOMATIC TOOL (COORDINATES DATA) REGISTRATION
This chapter describes operation procedures for automatic registration of tool coordinates values
by using the TP.
！ WARNING
Automatic tool registration is a kind of teaching. Its usage is

limited to personnel who have completed special training and
are qualified for teaching or supervising robot operations.
10.1 OVERVIEW OF AUTOMATIC TOOL REGISTRATION FUNCTION
A variety of tools of different shapes (gun, hand, etc.) can be mounted on the wrist flange at the
end of the arm when operating the robot. If the tool data is not measured correctly at this time,
the robot motion trajectory may deviate from the taught path and any errors or malfunctions may
enlarge through the off-line data transformation.
In other words, the tool data is essential for operating the robot correctly. In general, the tool
data are input by numeric values and registered, but measurement of the position and orientation
of the tool coordinates may not be accurate, or require a long time.
This function makes it possible to automatically register the tool transformation values by
teaching several points in space without having to enter tool data values by numeric keys.
10.2 REQUIRED DATA FOR AUTOMATIC TOOL COORDINATES REGISTRATION
When using the automatic tool registration function, the following set of pose data is stored
according to the condition of the tool data. The pose data measurement is taken by aiming at
one teaching point from 4 or 6 different tool poses, as described below.
When registering only tool coordinates (origin) position (X, Y, Z only)

Tool
coordinates Teaching pose consists of four base poses, A1, A2, A3, A4.
data
When registering tool coordinates position (X, Y, Z) and orientation
of the tool coordinates (angle values for O, A, T).
Teaching pose consists of six base poses, A1, A2, A3, A4, B and C.
10-1
10.2.1 TEACHING THE FOUR BASE POSES
As shown in figure below, teach the 4 Base Poses (A1, A2, A3, A4) with the same position data
but with different orientation data, aiming at the same tip point on a measuring jig. Ensure that
the angles between each orientation are within the range 45° - 90°. The wrist flange face should
have a different plane for each base orientation. Teach each base pose so that the tool
coordinates and measuring jig origins are in contact with each other.
A2 A3
A1
Origin
A4
Measuring jig
10.2.2 TEACHING THE TOOL Z DIRECTION DESIGNATION
For Base Pose B, teach so that contact is made between the Measuring Jig’s Origin and a position
100 mm or more away from the TCP (tool center point) in the desired -Z direction of the tool as
shown below.
Base pose B
100 mm or more
Tool Z direction
Origin
Measuring jig
10-2
10.2.3 TEACHING THE TOOL Y DIRECTION DESIGNATION
For Base Pose C, teach so that contact is made between the Measuring Jig’s Origin and a position
100 mm or more away from the TCP in the desired +Y direction of the tool as shown below.
Base pose C
100 mm or more
Origin
Measuring jig Tool Y direction
10.3 CAUTIONS FOR TEACHING BASE POSES
The purpose of the automatic tool registration function is to automate registration of the tool
coordinates data by using the robot. Pay attention to the items below when using this function
during teaching. Failure to do so may enlarge errors/deviations in the tool coordinates data.
1. The angle between tool Z axes at Base Poses A1, A2, A3, and A4 should be within the range
of 45°-90° as shown in the figure in Chapter 10.2.1.
2. The distance between the jig origin and tool coordinates origin at Base Poses B and C should
be 100 mm or more as shown in the figure in Chapter 10.2.2 and Chapter 10.2.3.
3. Base Poses B and C should not be set at the same position as the jig origin. (Doing so results
in error.)
4. When teaching Base Poses A1, A2, A3, A4, B, C, take note that if the position data for 2 or
more poses is the same, an error may occur.
10-3
As an example, the figure below shows one method for teaching poses B and C.
Z
Y
((( Point C
A2 A3
A4
A1 X
(((
Point B
Measuring jig
Teach pose A4 so that the tool Z axis runs parallel with the base
coordinates X axis.
Ø Ø
Teaching Pose B Teaching Pose C
Teach Pose B by moving tool 100 Teach Pose C by moving tool 100
mm or more away from the origin mm or more away from the origin
along the base coordinates +X along the base coordinate +Y
direction (tool –Z direction), keeping direction (tool +Y direction), keeping
the same orientation as A4. the same orientation as A4.
10.4 OPERATION METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC TOOL REGISTRATION
10.4.1 PREPARATIONS FOR AUTOMATIC TOOL REGISTRATION
Follow the procedure described below.
1. Select [Aux. Function] from pull-down menu in B area to display the auxiliary function
screen.
2. Select Aux. 0405.
3. Input [Tool Name] and [Tool Type] in the screen on the next page.
Selecting the tool names 1 to 9 corresponds to tools 1 to 9 in Aux. 0304. Also, optional
names may be entered for the tools by <Variable> and registered as variable names or system
data. For [Tool Type], select either [Only X, Y, Z] or [X, Y, Z, O, A, T].
10-4
4. When the setting is complete, press ↵.
10.4.2 REGISTERING BASE POSES DATA
Register the base poses data in the Record Base Postures screen.
1. Move robot to the A1 pose of the

four base poses. Move cursor to
[A1] as shown in the screen on the
left and press REC. Register [A2]
to [A4] (B and C) in the same way.
2. When the base poses data is

registered, the “?” mark disappears in
the margin of the item. Register all
the base poses data, and press ↵.
d d
d
In teaching the 4 base poses (A1-A4), set
each angle for d within the range of 45°-90°.
10-5
3. If warning is displayed in the screen

as shown on the left, select [No] and
register the tool coordinates data
again. If no warning is displayed,
select [Yes].
4. When registration completes, tool

coordinates data calculated from the
registered data are displayed and
registered in the memory. For tool
names 1 to 9, the data are registered
in their corresponding tool numbers.
1 to 9 in Aux. 0304. For tool names
with other characters (abc, tool1,
etc.), the data are registered as
variable names with transformation
values.
When selecting [Only X, Y, Z] as

[Tool Type], data for A1 to A4 are
registered and X, Y and Z are
displayed as coordinates data.
When selecting [X, Y, Z, O, A, T],

data for A1 to A4, B and C are
registered and X, Y, Z, O, A and T
values are displayed as tool
coordinates data as in the figure on
the left.
10-6
E Series Controller 11. Robot Motion Parameter Values Settings
11.0 ROBOT MOTION PARAMETER VALUES SETTINGS
In the E series controller, the moment of inertia and gravity load are calculated per axis, and robot
motion is controlled based on these calculation results to elicit optimal performance for cycle time,
trajectory accuracy, etc. Therefore, parameters such as tool mass, torque and robot installation
posture must be set properly.
Follow the procedures described in this section to set tool mass/torque and robot installation
posture, these settings are essential to elicit high motion performance.
！ WARNING
Setting of parameter values is a kind of teaching. Usage of

these functions is limited to personnel who have completed
special training and are qualified for teaching or
supervising robot operations.
11-1
11.1 ROBOT MOTION PARAMETER VALUES SETTING FLOWCHART
The flowchart below shows an overview of the steps required for optimizing robot motion from
robot introduction to start of robot operations.
Introducing robot
Installing robot
Setting installation posture Refer to Chapter 11.3. Set installation posture by Aux. 0505.
Refer to Chapter 11.4. Set mass, center of gravity and moment

Setting tool coordinates data of inertia around the tool center of gravity. Set by Aux. 0304
in block teaching and set by “WEIGHT” command/ instruction
when programming motion with AS language. Approximate
Setting tool load information values for mass and position of center of gravity can be
calculated by Aux. 0406.
Setting load information on Refer to Chapter 11.5. Set the mass and position of incidental
arm device mounted on upper arm or arm base. Set by Aux. 0404.
Setting for collision detection To use collision detection effectively, enable it before starting
in teach mode (option) teaching (option).
Teaching
Checking operations
Setting for collision detection

in repeat mode (option) To use collision detection function in operation, adjusts the
related settings to enable detection. Motion related settings
are complete after modifying teaching and readjusting collision
Modifying teaching, readjusting detection data.
collision detection (option)
Robot operation
NOTE: For the above settings, refer to the following manuals.

1. E Series Controller AS Language Reference Manual
2. Collision Detection Function (Option)
11-2
11.2 FUNCTIONS AFFECTED BY ROBOT MOTION PARAMETERS
The moment of inertia and gravity load are calculated per axis, and robot motion is controlled
based on these calculation results to achieve a shorter cycle time, accurate trajectory, etc. To
make the robot run at maximum capability, follow the procedures below to properly set the
parameter values for tool mass, torque and robot installation posture. Functions affected by
robot motion parameters are described below.
11.2.1 VARIABLE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION FUNCTION
This function automatically sets the most suitable acceleration/deceleration according to the robot
arm pose and load mass. This function effectively shortens robot cycle time (Not available in
some robot models.).
V Standard (Fixed acceleration/deceleration)

Velocity Improved (Variable acceleration/deceleration)
t
Time
Acceleration/deceleration is optimized
based on the load/pose
↓
Cycle time is shortened.
This function controls motions based on the dynamic condition of the robot. Therefore, all of
the following affect motion control: Installation posture, Load data of the tool (mass, center of
gravity, moment of inertia around center of gravity), Load on Arm (mass and mounting position).
To optimize robot cycle time, each of these parameter values must be set properly.
！ CAUTION
1. Be sure to register the correct mass, center of gravity and moments of

inertia. Registering the wrong value may decrease the service life of
component parts, causing motor overload or deviation errors.
2. Be sure to register the correct installation posture. Registering the
wrong posture may decrease the service life of the component parts,
causing motor overload or deviation errors.
11-3
11.2.2 VIBRATION INHIBITORY CONTROL
The E series controller constantly calculates and controls real-time changes in the moment of
inertia, rigidity and gravity load of each axis to prevent vibration on the tip of robot arm. In
order to minimize robot vibration and achieve maximum motion performance, the tool load
information, installation posture, etc. must be set properly.
11.2.3 COLLISION DETECTION FUNCTION (OPTION)
This function compares the torque and installation posture data registered as the standard
operating conditions for the robot with the data detected during actual motion. To maximize
performance of the collision detection function, ensure tool load information, installation posture,
etc. are set correctly.
！ CAUTION
1. Be sure to register the correct mass, center of gravity and moments of

inertia. Registering the wrong value may decrease the service life of
component parts, causing motor overload or deviation errors.
2. Be sure to register the correct installation posture. Registering the
wrong posture may decrease the service life of component parts, causing
motor overload or deviation errors.
11-4
11.3 SETTING ROBOT INSTALLATION POSTURE
Install each robot referring to the Installation and Connection Manual. Register the installation
posture that matches the actual installation posture. This setting fixes the gravity direction so
that acceleration/deceleration is properly controlled and so robot can be taught with the +Z base
coordinate vertically up, as shown below. Note when setting base coordinates via Aux. 0506,
the values for O, A, T must be set 0 (zero). Robot installation posture is set in Aux. 0505.
Floor Ceiling
Wall Wall 2
11-5
11.4 SETTING TOOL LOAD INFORMATION
Tool load information consists of mass, center of gravity and the moment of inertia around the
center of gravity of the tool fixed on the wrist flange. This information is set by Aux. 0304 or by
the AS language “WEIGHT” instruction/command. To optimize robot performance in terms of
cycle time and service life, tool load information must be set properly.
Registrating tool data
Flange
coordinates
Xf
Zf Center of gravity (COG)
Mass of tool (+workpiece): M kg
Yf Coordinate value on flange
coordinates: (Xg, Yg, Zg)
Moment of inertia around
gravity center: (Ix, Iy, Iz)
Ix
Xf′ Flange coordinates XfYfZf and
coordinates Xf′Yf′Zf′, defining the
Zf′ Iz moments of inertia around the
Iy center of gravity, are parallel.
Tool
coordinates Yf′
Tool center
enter point (TCP) Zt
Coordinates value on flange
coordinates: (Xtcp, Ytcp, Ztcp) Xt
Tool coordinates rotation based
on flange coordinates: (O, A, T) Yt
！ CAUTION
Be sure to register the correct mass, center of gravity and moment of

inertia. Registering the wrong value may decrease the life service of
component parts, cause motor overload or deviation errors.
11-6
Item Description Setting range

[Load Mass] M: Mass of tool to be mounted, including mass of 0 – Rated load kg
workpiece grasped in handling applications.
Approx. value is acceptable, use only highest
estimate.
[Center of Xg: X coordinate value of COG of the tool based on -9999.9 -
Gravity X] the flange (=null tool) coordinates. 9999.9 mm
Approx. value is acceptable if precise center of
gravity is unobtainable.
[Center of Yg: Y coordinate value of COG of the tool based on -9999.9 -
Gravity Y] the flange (=null tool) coordinates. 9999.9 mm
[Center of Zg: Z coordinate value of COG of the tool based on -9999.9 -
Gravity Z] the flange (=null tool) coordinates. 9999.9 mm
[Moment of Ix: Value of moment of inertia about center of gravity 0 - 999.99 kgm2
Inertia about Xf ′ axis
Xf ′ axis] Approx. value is acceptable if precise moment of
inertia is unobtainable. To calculate approximate
value, see explanation below.
[Moment of Iy: Value of moment of inertia about center of gravity 0 - 999.99 kgm2
Inertia about Yf ′ axis
Yf ′ axis] Approx. value is acceptable if precise moment of
[Moment of Iz: Value of moment of inertia about center of gravity 0 - 999.99 kgm2
Inertia about Zf ′ axis
Zf ′ axis] Approx. value is acceptable if precise moment of
11-7
11.4.1 HOW TO APPROXIMATE MOMENTS OF INERTIA AROUND TOOL CENTER

OF GRAVITY
Moment of inertia about the tool center of gravity should be calculated precisely. However, for
practical use, approximate values are acceptable. Moments of inertia can be approximated in
two ways: by judging the general shape of the tool as either a rectangular solid or as a cylinder.
Moreover, if tool outside dimensions are small enough, it is possible to approximate as a point
mass.
<Example 1> To approximate as a rectangular solid:

Moments of inertia of a rectangular solid whose center occupies the same point as the tool center
of gravity are calculated by these formulas.
Zf′
M 2 2
= (b +c )
12
IZ c M 2 2
IY Iy= (c +a )
Yf′ 12
M 2 2
Iz= (a +b )
IX 12
a
Xf′
b
<Example 2> To approximate as a cylinder (Diameter: a, Height: h):
Zf′
M 2 2
Ix= Iy= (3a +h )
IZ 12
IY
Yf′ M 2
Iz= a
IX 2
Xf′
<Example 3> To approximate as a point mass:

If the tool outermost dimensions are small enough (i.e., smaller than the distance between flange
and tool center of gravity), the tool can be considered as a point mass. In that case, input 0.01
for IX, IY, IZ instead of 0. Inputting 0 sets the moment of inertia to the max. allowable moment
of inertia (spec.) and restricts acceleration/deceleration.
11-8
11.4.2 HOW TO SET TOOL LOAD INFORMATION
Tool load information is set in Aux. 0304 or by AS language “WEIGHT” command/instruction.

For the [Load Mass] and [Center Of Gravity], approximate values can be obtained by Aux. 0406.
<Example 1> Aux.0304 Tool Coordinates

In block teaching, make load settings by this auxiliary function. For details, refer to Chapter 8.
<Example 2> WEIGHT instruction/command

For steps taught by AS language, set the tool load data by this command/instruction. If the step
taught by compound instruction is executed in the program, be aware tool load information set in
Aux.0304 takes precedence for that step. Execute WEIGHT command in the program where
needed.
WEIGHT 120,300,250,100,10,10,10 Mass 120 kg, Center of gravity Xg, Yg, Zg

(300,250,100), Moments of inertia Ix, Iy, Iz (10,10,10)
If collision detection option is disabled, setting of
moment of inertia is not required.
<Example 3> Aux.0406 Auto Load Measurement

This function calculates approximate values of the mass and center of gravity. For details, see
Chapter 12.
11-9
[ NOTE ]
1. Data defining the load mass, position of center of gravity and moments of inertia
around the center of gravity are used in robot motions for controlling vibration,
acceleration/deceleration and collision detection. Setting values for these data,
even approximately, is important for optimizing robot performance.
2. Approximate values for load mass and position of center of gravity can be
obtained by Aux.0406.
3. If load mass is set 0, calculations assume robot is carrying its rated load (both
mass and torque).
4. If all center of gravity positions (Xg, Yg, Zg) are set 0, calculations assume
robot is carrying its rated load (both mass and torque).
5. If all moments of inertia (Ix, Iy, Iz) around center of gravity are set 0, robot
operates at the max. allowed load moment of inertia noted in specification sheet.
6. For safety, set 0 for the moments of inertia if Ix, Iy, Iz are unknown. In this
case, acceleration/deceleration is controlled at the max. allowed load of moment
of inertia.
7. If load at end of robot arm is small enough to be considered a point mass,
register a small value for the moments of inertia, approx. 0.01. If set 0, robot
operates at the max. allowed load of moments of inertia noted in specifications,
and acceleration/deceleration is constrained. In this case, setting a small value
enables cycle time to be shortened.
11-10
11.5 SETTING LOAD ON ARM
For larger robots such as ZX series, if mounting device on the upper arm or the arm base, set
appropriate values for the mass and center of gravity for that device in Aux. 0404. This enables
the robot to optimize control of its motion, acceleration, deceleration, etc.
LU
MU Load on upper arm
Mass: MU kg
Distance from JT3 center to
center of gravity: LU mm
XBL
YBL
Base coordinates Σ-XYZ

Coordinates on arm baseΣ-X1Y1Z1
Rotation angle of JT1 Θ1
X1
X Θ1 Y1 Y
Load on arm base
Mass: MB kg
Center of gravity on arm base XY
coordinates: (XBG, YBG)
XY dimensions of load: XBL x YBL
Item Description Setting range

[Mass Load on Arm] MU: Load mass on robot upper arm 0.0 - max. payload kg
LU: Distance from JT3 axis center to
[CTR Dist, J3 Rot/Mass] 0 - 9999 mm
gravity center
Mass Load on Arm Base MＢ: Weight of load on arm base 0.0 - max. payload kg
XBG: X value of load mass center on the
Mass Center in Base X -9999.9 – 9999.9 mm
arm base coordinates
YBG: Y value of load mass center on the
Mass Center in Base Y -9999.9 – 9999.9 mm
arm base coordinates
XBG: X dimension (length) of the load
Dimension X of Load 0 – 9999.9 mm
installed on arm base
YBG: Y dimension (length) of the load
Dimension Y of Load 0 – 9999.9 mm
installed on arm base
11-11
See Chapter 8 for details on operating

this screen.
11-12
E Series Controller 12. Auto Load Measurement
12.0 AUTO LOAD MEASUREMENT
This chapter describes the operation procedures for the auto load measurement function.
12.1 OVERVIEW OF AUTO LOAD MEASUREMENT FUNCTION
This function is used to automatically measure and calculate the mass, center of gravity, and the
load moment with the actual load (tool + workpiece) mounted at end of robot arm by moving
axes JT3, 4, 5, and 6.
12.2 EXECUTION PROCEDURES
The following flowchart describes the procedures for measuring the load automatically by using
this function.
12.2.1 Positioning for Auto Load Measurement
12.2.2 Displaying Auto Load Measurement Screen
12.2.3 Registering Tool Number for Auto Load Measurement
12.2.4 Setting Operational Area for Auto Load Measurement
12.2.5 Confirming Operational Area for Auto Load Measurement
12.2.6 Executing Auto Load Measurement
12.2.7 Registering Results after Auto Load Measurement
See the following sections for a description of each procedure.
12-1
12.2.1 POSITIONING FOR AUTO LOAD MEASUREMENT
This section describes the positioning procedure for auto load measurement.
1． Make sure that the tool is mounted on the robot flange firmly.
2． As shown in figure below, guide the robot to a pose that provides enough clearance for the
arm to move without interfering with surrounding objects (devices, etc.) and sufficient
gravitational torque to each axis of the arm.
3． Press HOLD*, and A+Motor ON to turn the motor power OFF**. Then, set
TEACH/REPEAT to REPEAT.
NOTE* For controller with option operation panel, turn HOLD/RUN on the option operation
panel to HOLD.
NOTE** For controller with option operation panel, press MOTOR POWER on the option
operation panel to turn OFF.
！ CAUTION
Do not fail to fix the equipment firmly for safety and for
acquiring accurate measurement.
12-2
12.2.2 DISPLAYING AUTO LOAD MEASUREMENT SCREEN
This section describes how to display the screen for auto load measurement.
1． Call up Auxiliary Function screen and select [4. Basic setting]. For more details about
selecting auxiliary functions, refer to Chapter 8.2.
2． Selecting [6. Auto Load Measurement] displays the screen as shown in Chapter 12.2.3.
12.2.3 REGISTERING TOOL NUMBER FOR AUTO LOAD MEASUREMENT
In this section, set the tool number to be measured and registered. This tool number corresponds
to the tool number in Aux. 0304.
Input the number of the tool whose

load is to be measured, and press ↵.
(Setting range 0 - 9) Press R to
return to the previous page.
[ NOTE ]
If the setting is incorrect, a message is displayed as shown in the following

screen. In this case, try registering again.
12-3
[ NOTE ]
In order to set the necessary data for this auto measurement function, robot
motion must be stopped before proceeding to next step. When message as
shown below is displayed at bottom of screen, follow the instructions.
[ NOTE ]
1. If message shown below is displayed at bottom of screen, robot cannot move inside the
operational area set in Chapter 12.2.4 for auto load measurement. Check the current
robot pose and the data settings for the operational area.
2. Upper limit of input range displayed on screen in Chapter 12.2.4 is the value registered
in Aux. 0507. Lower limit is determined by the conditions of the minimum motion
range required for measurement. If after the operational area is set and the motion
range is reset to smaller value than the operational area in Aux. 0507, the message in
the following screen is displayed. In this case, correct the set values.
12-4
12.2.4 SETTING OPERATIONAL AREA FOR AUTO LOAD MEASUREMENT
In this section, set the operational area for auto load measurement. During measurement, JT3 to
JT6 moves within the operational area set here only in the plus direction from the current pose
and not to minus direction. Set the data making sure that robot does not interfere with the
peripheral equipment.
1. Set the operational area for [JT3]

to [JT6] by NUMBER.
Pressing R returns to the last step
in Chapter 12.2.3.
2. Set the operation panel and TP as follows:
(1) TEACH LOCK ⇒ OFF (2) TEACH/REPEAT ⇒ REPEAT

(3) A＋Motor ON ⇒ <MOTOR> lamp ON (4) A＋RUN ⇒ <RUN> lamp ON
[ NOTE ]
Message “Input numeric is out of range.” is displayed at bottom of
screen as shown below when attempting to set a value outside the
range. See the screen below. Check the setting and correct it.
12-5
[ NOTE ]
1. If any settings other than the operational area settings are incorrect, the reason is
displayed. Refer to the following screens.
2. Even if all conditions are correct, proceeding to the next step is not possible if
robot is currently running.
3. If all settings are correct, proceed to Chapter 12.2.5.
12-6
12.2.5 CONFIRMING OPERATIONAL AREA FOR AUTO LOAD MEASUREMENT
This section describes how to check the operational area for auto load measurement in low speed.
1. When the operational area is set

correctly, the left screen is
displayed. Selecting [Skip] skips
the contents in this section and
proceeds to Chapter 12.2.6.
Selecting [Yes] sets the check
program. Selecting [No] returns
to the last step, Chapter 12.2.4.
2. Selecting [Yes] in step 1 displays

screen requesting “Cycle Start
ON”. Now press A + Cycle Start.
Pressing <Cancel> before cycle
start returns to the last step in
Chapter 12.2.4.
3. While operational area is checked,

“Confirm the safety of operational
area…” is displayed. Once
completed, proceed to next step in
Chapter 12.2.6.
12-7
[ NOTE ]
1. If robot stops for some reason while checking the operational area, the error
message “Robot stopped. Checking operational area stopped.” is displayed at
bottom of screen as shown below.
2. Selecting [Reset] in screen below displays confirmation screen indicating “Failed
in auto load measurement.” shown in the screen below. Select [Close] and retry
after removing the cause of error.
3. Selecting [Close] in screen below displays confirmation screen indicating “Failed
in auto load measurement.” without resetting the error. Reset error and retry
after removing the cause of error. For details about error reset after selecting
[Close], refer to 2. Procedure for error reset-2 in Chapter 2.10.
12-8
12.2.6 EXECUTING AUTO LOAD MEASUREMENT
After confirming the safety of the operational area for auto load measurement and no problem is
found, execute auto load measurement.
1. Selecting [Yes] sets the

measurement program. Selecting
[No] returns to Chapter 12.2.3.
2. Selecting [Yes] in step 1 displays the

screen to request “Cycle Start ON”
as shown at left. Press
A + Cycle Start. During auto load
measurement, “Measuring…” is
displayed.
3. “Auto Load measurement is

completed.” is displayed when
process is finished. Then, press
<Close>.
[ NOTE ]
Pressing <Cancel> before cycle start in step 2 above displays the confirmation
screen. Pressing <Close> returns to the last step in Chapter 12.2.5.
12-9
[ NOTE ]
1. If robot stops for some reason while measuring, the error message “Motor power
OFF. Measurement stopped.” is displayed as shown in top screen below.
2. Selecting [Reset] in top figure below displays confirmation screen indicating
“Failed in auto load measurement.” shown in bottom screen below. Press
<Close> and retry after removing the cause of error.
3. Selecting [Close] in top screen below displays confirmation screen indicating
“Failed in auto load measurement.” without resetting the error. Reset error and
retry after removing the cause of error. For details about error reset after
selecting [Close], refer to 2. Procedure for error reset-2 in Chapter 2.10.
12-10
12.2.7 REGISTERING RESULTS AFTER AUTO LOAD MEASUREMENT
When measurement process completes with no problem, the results are displayed. Results can be
edited at this time by inputting numbers directly.
1. The results are displayed.
2. Pressing ↵ displays the confirmation

screen. Selecting [Yes] registers the
displayed data as the load of the tool
set in Chapter 12.2.3. Selecting
[No] does not register them.
[ NOTE ]
1. This screen remains regardless of whether [Yes] or [No] is selected.

2. Pressing R either before or after registration returns to Chapter 12.2.3.
3. The result cannot be registered if the load mass value is beyond mass capacity as
shown in screen below.
4. For load moment, note that the result can still be registered even if it exceeds the
max. allowed moment, only a warning is displayed as shown in screen below.
12-11
12-12
E Series Controller 13. Dedicated Instructions for Specific Fields
Kawasaki Robot Operation Manual of Robot Applications
13.0 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS FOR SPECIFIC FIELDS OF ROBOT

APPLICATIONS
When using a robot in a specific field, it is necessary to specialize clamp instructions according
to the application and to use dedicated instructions for that application. This chapter describes
how to specialize the clamp instruction and the dedicated instructions used in spot welding＊
and handling operations.
NOTE* This manual describes pneumatic spot weld guns. For details about servo spot weld
guns, refer to the optional manual for Servo Weld Gun, a separate volume.
13.1 SETTING DATA FOR CLAMP INSTRUCTIONS
As shown in table below, the required setting items and contents of clamp instructions vary
depending on the application field of the robot. A max. of eight clamp instructions (Clamp 1
– 8) can be used. Follow the sections below to set the data of clamp instructions for spot
welding or handling operation.
Application number Description

0: Not Used The clamp instruction is not used.
1: Spot Welding operation Used to start up a welding sequence in spot welding operation.
2: Handling Operation Used to open/ close a hand in handling operation
Setting procedure
1. Display Aux. 0605 screen. For details on calling up the screen, refer to Chapter 8.2.
2. The screen below is displayed. Select [1. Application Field].
13-1
3. Input the application field for each clamp instruction. Set 0 to the instructions that will
not be used. Screen below sets Clamp 1 to spot welding, clamp 2 to handling, Clamp 3 –
8 to not used.
13.2 SPOT WELDING DEDICATED SIGNAL
When executing spot welding operation, first set 1 to [Application] to specify spot welding as
the application field in Aux. 060501.
Furthermore, dedicated signals for spot welding are used in addition to the regular I/O signals.
Figure below outlines these signals. The following subsections describe how to set the
dedicated signals for spot welding. For more details about I/O signals, see the External I/O
Manual, a separate volume.
Weld schedule (Max. 6 bit)
Robot controller Welding
Weld start output controller
Weld comp. input signal
Weld fault input signal
Weld fault reset output
Gun clamp command output
Stroke switching
(single solenoid/ double solenoid)
Weld Gun
2-stroke retractable gun retract position
input signal
2-stroke retractable gun extend position
input signal
13-2
13.3 TEACHING SPOT WELD DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS
For spot welding operation, WS, CC and OC instructions and their parameter values are
required to be taught in addition to clamp instructions.
13.3.1 CLAMP INSTRUCTION
A max. of eight clamp instructions can be used. Record ON (close)/ OFF (open) of the gun as
the parameter value in steps where the clamp instruction for spot welding is taught. For
details about teaching ON/OFF, refer to Chapter 5.3.11.
13.3.2 WELD SCHEDULE (WS) INSTRUCTION
Specify weld schedule number as the parameter value. For details about teaching weld
schedules, refer to Chapter 5.3.11. Weld schedule is effective only when the gun is set to ON
(close).
13.3.3 CLAMP CONDITION (CC) INSTRUCTION
Specify clamp condition number as the parameter value. The data for the clamp condition
numbers are set in Aux. 060502. For setting procedure, refer to Chapter 13.4.1. For
teaching clamp condition instructions, refer to Chapter 5.3.11.
Setting a clamp condition to 0 at the step where the gun is set to ON (close) executes a
subroutine.
13.3.4 GUN RETRACT/ EXTEND (OC) INSTRUCTION
To use a 2-stroke retractable gun, set O or C as the parameter value to specify whether the gun
should be retracted (O) or extended (C) in the taught step. For details about teaching OC
instructions, refer to Chapter 5.3.11.
This setting is ignored by assuming as a single stroke gun in steps where the clamp condition is
set to 0.
13-3
13.4 SETTING OF EACH DATA
This section describes how to set parameter values for the dedicated instructions in Chapter
13.3 and the other data used for spot welding operations.
13.4.1 SETTING DATA PER CLAMP CONDITION NUMBER
Set each data corresponding to the clamp condition (CC) number in the taught data.*
NOTE* This setting is effective only when spot welding or handling is specified in 060501.
Setting procedure
1. Call up Aux. 0605 screen. For details on calling up the screen, refer to Chapter 8.2.
2. Selecting [2. Clamp Condition] displays the screen below. (Default settings are shown
below.)
3. Set data for the items below for each CC number by pressing <Prev page>/<Next Page>.
Item Contents
Anticipation Sets how early the gun clamp signal is output to the weld gun before robot
of Clamp reaches a taught point. Corresponds to T1 in Figure in Chapter 13.5.
Output (Default is 0 sec.)
Motion Start Sets how long robot waits before moving to the next taught step after it has
Delay after received weld completion signal from welding controller. Corresponds to
Weld T2 and T6 in Figure in Chapter 13.5. (Default is 0.3 sec.)
Gun No. Sets eight kinds of guns available for spot welding. Set the data
corresponding to each gun No. in Chapter 13.4.4. Setting 0 disables the gun
data settings and executes preset clamp subroutine.
13-4
13.4.2 SETTING OF SPOT WELDING CLAMP DATA
Sets data for I/O signals or 2-stroke retractable guns to clamp Nos. 1 to 8 used for spot welding
operation.
Setting procedure
2. Selecting [10. Spot Weld Clamp Definition] displays the screen below.
3. Inputting clamp number and pressing ↵ displays the screen below. The screen below
shows the settings for Clamp 1. (The setting below is default.)
13-5
4. Set data for these items in each clamp instruction. Table below describes each item.
Item Contents
Weld Control Sets welding controller numbers (1-8) which are used for spot
Number welding.
Gun Clamp Sets the Gun Clamp Command Output number to be used. Setting
Command Output 0 does not output this signal.
Extend Output Sets the Extend Output Signal number that makes 2-stroke
Signal* retractable gun extended. Setting 0 does not output this signal.
Retract Output Sets the Retract Output Signal number that makes 2-stroke
Signal* retractable gun retracted. Setting 0 does not output this signal.
Extend Position Sets input signal number confirming 2-stroke retractable gun is
Input Signal* extended. When this signal is set, robot will not move after
pressurizing and reaching its extend position until this signal is
input. Setting 0 does not detect extending.
Retract Position Sets input signal number confirming 2-stroke retractable gun is
Input Signal* retracted. When this signal is set, robot will not move after
pressurizing and reaching its retract position until this signal is
input. Setting 0 does not detect retracting.
NOTE* Set when using a 2-stroke retractable gun.
Regarding extend position input signal and retract position input signal, also refer to extend
monitor and retract monitor in Chapter 13.4.4.
13-6
13.4.3 SETTING OF SPOT WELDING CONTROLLER
Sets I/O signal specifications for the spot welding controller that is specified in Chapter 13.4.2.
This setting is effective only when 1 is set to [Application] in Aux. 060501.
2. Selecting [11. Spot Weld Gun Definition] displays the screen below.
3. Inputting spot welding controller number and pressing ↵ displays the screen below. The
screen below displays the settings for weld control 1. (Default settings are shown below.)
4. Set data for each item. Table below describes each item.
13-7
Items to be set for each spot welding controller.

Item Contents
Weld Start Output Sets the number of the Weld Start Output signal sent to welding controller.
Output Time Sets output duration time for Weld Start Output. This signal is level
output.
Weld Schedule Sets the first signal number that is output to welding controller.
Output Top Signal*
Number of Signals
Sets the number of signals to use for weld schedule output signals.
to Use*
Output Format* Sets how the Weld Schedule Output Top Signal and the signals set in
[Number of Signals to Use] are output, Binary or individual (each).
Weld Comp. Input Sets the number of the Weld Comp. (completion) Input Signal sent from
Signal** spot welding controller to the robot.
Weld Comp. Input When Weld Comp. Input Signal is not received within time set here, an
Monitor error occurs and robot stops after Weld Start Output has been sent. (Default
is 3 sec.) Setting 0 disables error detection.
Weld Fault Input Sets number of the Weld Fault Input Signal sent from spot welding
Signal controller to the robot. Setting 0 disables weld fault detection.
Weld Fault Reset Sets the number of the Weld Fault Reset Output signal sent to welding
Output controller. When this signal is set and an abnormality occurs in the
welding controller, the Weld Fault Reset Output signal is sent to spot
welding controller. (Signal generated by pressing <Reset> on the screen.)
When setting is 0, this signal is not output.
NOTE* As shown on screen on previous page, when [Weld Schedule Output Top Signal] is set
to 17, [Number of Signals to Use] to 4, [Output Format] to [Binary], the output signals
17, 18, 19, 20 are used as weld schedule output signals, as shown below.
If the taught data of WS instruction is 3, the ON/OFF States for weld schedule output signals
will be as shown below because [Output Format] is set to [Binary].
Output signal 20 19 18 17
WS=3 OFF OFF ON ON
When [Output Format] is set to [each], the third weld schedule output signal will be ON as
shown below.
Output signal 20 19 18 17
WS=3 OFF ON OFF OFF
NOTE** When setting 0, the program executes the next step without waiting for input of weld
completion. Except in special cases, do not fail to set a number for the Weld Comp.
Input Signal.
13-8
13.4.4 SETTING OF SPOT WELD GUN
Sets the gun type and specifications for the 2-stroke retractable spot welding gun. The gun
number here corresponds to [Gun No.] (1 − 8) in Aux. 060502. (See Chapter 13.4.1)
Setting procedure
2. Selecting [12. Spot Weld Gun Definition] displays the screen below.
3. Inputting gun number and pressing ↵ displays the screen below. In the screen below, the
setting is for Gun No. 1. (Default settings are shown below.)
4. Set data for each item. Table below describes each item.
13-9
Items to be set for spot welding gun
Item Contents
Gun Type Sets type of gun to use.
Single: single gun
X-ret: 2-stroke retractable X gun
C-ret: 2-stroke retractable C gun
Weld Delay on Sets time required for switching 2-stroke gun from retracted position to
Retract → extended position and delays outputting Weld Start Output signal by the
Extend set time. Corresponds to T3 in Chapter 13.3.3. (Default is 0.5 sec.)
Motion Delay Sets time required for returning the 2-stroke gun from extended position
Extend → to retracted position after welding and before moving to the next taught
Retract point. (Default is 1.0 sec.)
Retract Monitor Selecting [monitor] enables continuous checking of the Retract Position
Input Signal during robot motion. If this signal is not input in retracted
state, error occurs and robot stops. Selecting [not] stops monitoring of
the input signal.
Extend Monitor Selecting [monitor] enables continuous checking of the Extend Position
Input Signal during robot motion with the gun at extended position. If
this signal is not input in extended state, error occurs and robot stops.
Selecting [not] stops monitoring of the input signal.
Extend Signal Delays outputting the Extend Output Signal by the set time, for switching
Output Delay the stopper type of 2-stroke retractable gun from retracted position to
extended position. Corresponds to T4 in Chapter 13.5. (Default is 0.5
sec.)
Retract Signal Delays outputting the Retract Output Signal by the set time, for switching
Output Delay the stopper type of 2-stroke retractable gun from extended position to
retracted position. Corresponds to T5 in Chapter 13.5. (Default is 0.2
sec.)
13-10
13.5 TIME CHART FOR INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS
The figure below is a sample of the timing for each I/O signal in spot welding operation.
1.Spot welding by 2.Spot welding on 3.Spot welding by 4.Spot welding by

retract → extend extend extend → retract retract
Move Move Move Move

Robot motion Taught data: Taught data: Taught data: Taught data:
extend extend extend retract
T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 T6 T1 T6
Gun clamp
signal output
Stroke switching
By double
cylinder T4 T5
By stopper
T3 T3
Weld start output
Weld comp. input

Weld schedule
output
areas can be either enabled or disabled.
T1-T6 in the time chart shows:
T1: Early output of Clamp signal

Outputs Clamp signal T1 seconds in advance, before robot reaches the taught point.
T2: Motion Start Delay after Weld

Robot starts motion to the next taught point T2 seconds later after receiving weld
completion signal. When the next taught data is for extended state, gun will remain
extended.
T3: Weld Delay in change from Retract to Extend

Delays outputting Weld Start signal by the set time for switching from retracted position to
extended position in the case of a 2-stroke retractable gun.
13-11
T4: Extending Signal Output Delay

Delays outputting Extending signal by the set time for switching the stopper type of
2-stroke retractable gun from retracted position to extended position.
T5: Retracting Signal Output Delay

Delays outputting Retracting signal by the set time for switching the stopper type of
2-stroke retractable gun from extended position to retracted position.
T6: Motion Start Delay after Weld

Robot starts motion to the next taught point with delay time of T2 after receiving weld
completion signal. When the next taught data is for retracted state, gun will switch from
extended position to retracted position.
13.6 CLAMP INSTRUCTION IN HANDLING OPERATION
When using this instruction to open/close the hand(s), set 2 to [Application] in Aux. 060501.
For the setting procedure, refer to Chapter 13.1.
Furthermore, in order to set more detailed conditions for the handling application, it is
necessary to set the properties of the handling clamp signal.
Refer to the External I/O Manual, a separate volume, for more details about input/output
signals.
13.6.1 SETTING OF HANDLING CLAMP DATA
Set output signals corresponding to each Clamp instruction that controls the valves that
open/close the hand(s), etc. Selecting [20. Handling Clamp Signal Definition] in Aux. 0605
displays the screen below.
13-12
1. For single solenoid valves
Consider actual wiring and hand mechanism, and define the clamp signal output either for
ON or OFF. A specified clamp signal for ON is output when the clamp instruction
becomes ON. Conversely, a specified clamp signal for OFF is output when clamp
instruction becomes OFF.
For example, if signal number 10 is set to [Output Signal for ON] in [Clamp 1], system
outputs OX10 when clamp1 instruction is ON, and the electric potential of OX10 becomes
high.
If signal number 11 is set to [Output Signal for OFF] in [Clamp 1], system outputs OX11
when clamp1 instruction is OFF, and the electric potential of OX11 becomes high.
2. For double solenoid valves:
Unlike single solenoid valves, define two signal numbers for each clamp instruction.
For example, if setting signal number 20 to [Output Signal for ON] in [Clamp 2], system
outputs OX20 when clamp2 instruction is ON, and the electric potential of OX20 becomes
high.
System outputs OX21 when clamp2 instruction is OFF and the electric potential of OX21
becomes high.
13.6.2 TIME CHART FOR HANDLING SIGNALS
The figure below is a time chart for a clamp signal taught for handling specification. At the
time of memory change to a step taught with ON for a clamp instruction, the clamp signal turns
ON and remains ON until the memory change to a step taught with OFF for the clamp
instruction. × ×
×
× ×
°
Robot
× Clamp OFF step
° Clamp ON step
ON
Clamp signal
OFF
13-13
13-14
E Series Controller 14. Multi Function OX/WX Specifications (Option)
14.0 MULTI FUNCTION OX/WX SPECIFICATIONS (OPTION)
This chapter describes optional specifications for OX and WX signals.
14.1 OX SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS
The following four types of OX signals can be set by Aux. 0604 (option) .
1. Step Type (Standard Type)

2. Keep Type
3. Double Type (XOR)
4. Pulse Type
The specifications for each are described below. For output timing of each signal, refer to
Chapter 14.3.
14.1.1 STEP TYPE
This is the standard type, teaching this OX instruction outputs a signal in step increments. After
robot reaches axis coincidence at a step, the memory changes, movement begins toward the next
step where OX is taught, and the OX signal turns ON. When the memory changes to a step
where OX is not taught, the signal turns OFF. To use Step Type, input 0 to [Type] in Aux. 0604
(option).
14.1.2 KEEP TYPE
The timing for turning ON the signal is the same as Step type, but Keep type signals remain ON
until the signals are turned OFF at an OFF taught step. To use Keep Type, input 1 to [Type] in
Aux. 0604 (option).
14-1
14.1.3 DOUBLE TYPE (XOR)
A pair of signals of this type turns one signal ON and the other OFF, or vice versa. To use
Double Type, input 2 to [Type] in Aux. 0604 (option).
For Double Type (XOR), it should be noted that the combination of signals is restricted. The
combination of OX1 and OX2, or OX3 and OX4 are possible, but combinations of OX2 and
OX3, or OX4 and OX5 are not allowed.
14.1.4 PULSE TYPE
This type of signal remains ON for the specified length of the pulse after the robot reaches axis
coincidence. To use Pulse Type, input 3 to [Type] and the length of pulse to [Pulse] in Aux.
0604 (option). Pulse length can be 0 to 9.9 sec, set in 0.1 sec increments. Even if setting 0, 0.4
seconds of pulse is output.
In Step Type and Keep Type OX signals, it is possible to change the output timing to output after
axis coincidence. Set OFF in [OX.PREOUT] in Aux. 0502 as shown below.
Double Type (XOR) and Pulse Type output after axis coincidence regardless of this setting.
14.2 WX SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS
There are two ways of detecting WX signals, when the signal turns OFF → ON, or ON → OFF.
In teaching, a signal number with minus (-) sign in front indicates detection at ON → OFF,
otherwise signal is detected at OFF → ON.
14-2
14.3 OUTPUT TIMING
Output timing of each type is illustrated in the figure below. As stated above, the memory
change occurs at every step change. (See also Chapter 14.1.1.)
Step Axis Step Axis Step Axis Step Axis

change coincidence change coincidence change coincidence change coincidence
Robot A point B point C point D point E point

OX none OX1 ON OX none OX1 OFF OX none
Step Type
(OX.PREOUT ON)
Step Type
(OX.PREOUT OFF)
Keep Type
(OX.PREOUT ON)
Keep Type
(OX.PREOUT OFF)
OX1
Double Type
OX2
Pulse Type
14-3
14-4
E Series Controller 15. Data Transformation (Option)
15.0 DATA TRANSFORMATION (OPTION)
This chapter describes procedures for transforming the pose data created in offline teaching into
data which online robots can use.
！ WARNING
Data transformation is a kind of teaching. Its usage is limited to

personnel who have completed special training and are qualified
for teaching or supervising robot operations.
15.1 OVERVIEW OF DATA TRANSFORMATION FUNCTION
There are two ways of teaching work contents to the robot: online and offline teaching.
Because online teaching uses a robot installed on the production line (online robot), motion
programs can be taught only when the line is not operating.
Offline teaching, on the other hand, does not use a robot on the production line, but instead uses
an offline robot or CAD (Robot simulator) system. Therefore, teaching is possible regardless of
the state of the production line.
Data transformation is a function that transforms the pose data taught with an offline robot or
CAD system into data that can be used by an online robot in actual operation.
In this function, the position data of four reference (base) points located on the workpiece is
essential for fixing the pose relation between workpiece and robot.
The time needed to teach motion programs in the actual production system takes far longer time
than the time for this data transformation operation. Therefore, this function can raise the
operating rate of the robot.
15-1
15.2 OFFLINE TEACHING DATA
！ CAUTION
When performing gravity compensation* and data transformation, the

original data (offline teaching data) is deleted and the transformed data is
written in the memory of the controller. Therefore, save any data that
should not be deleted in USB memory beforehand.
NOTE* For gravity compensation function, see Chapters 15.5.5.1, 15.5.7,

15.5.9.5.
When Aux. 0802 is set to [Inhibit], the original teaching data is not rewritten
by the gravity compensation and data transformation functions. Set it to
[Accept] to rewrite.
During execution of data transformation function, teaching data cannot be input nor output from/to
external device. (USB memory operation is not necessary.)
The following data is necessary before execution of data transformation function:
1. Offline Data for four reference points

2. Offline Teaching data These data need to be prepared with offline
3. Offline Data for measuring tool coordinates robot beforehand.
4. Online Data for four reference points For procedures on creating data, see
5. Online Data for measuring tool coordinates Chapter 15.5.3.
If any of the above data was saved to a USB memory, load the data from the USB memory.
Refer to Aux. 0202 for more details.
15-2
15.3 TOOL COORDINATES DATA
！ CAUTION
1. The tool coordinates data which is measured by the automatic tool measuring
function is valid only during the data transformation. The values set by Aux.
0304 in the robot controller are not changed.
2. Data of tool coordinates registered in this function are also valid only during the
data transformation. The data return to the values set by Aux. 0304 after
termination of the data transformation function.
3. The most recent position and pose data of tool coordinates (X, Y, Z, O, A, T)
which were used for data transformation are shown on screen.
Six kinds of tools can be used in data transformation function (each tool is specified with a
number 1- 6.)
For Tools 1 to 3, the position (X, Y, Z) and orientation (O, A, T) of the tool coordinates, with
respect to the null tool coordinates, must be set in Aux. 0304 before executing the data
transformation function.
For tools 4 to 6, the position (X, Y, Z) and orientation (O, A, T) of the tool coordinates, with
respect to the null tool coordinates, can be set using the data registered in this function on the
display. The initial values are set in Aux. 0304.
For Tools 1 to 6, each tool coordinates position data, with respect to the null tool coordinates, can
also be set automatically by the automatic tool measuring function in this data transformation
function.
15-3
15.4 DEFINITION OF TOOL POSTURE
Both the translation amount (mm) of the tool coordinates with respect to the null tool coordinates,
and the rotation angles (°) O, A, T, are registered as tool coordinates data. The figure below
shows the relations between the orientation of the tool coordinates (x,y,z) with respect to the null
tool coordinates (X,Y,Z) and Euler’s OAT angles.
X T
O O Y′
A
X′ T Y
x
X′′
As shown in the figure above, the three angles can be defined as follows.
O: The angle between Zz plane and XZ plane

A: The angle between z axis and Z axis
T: The angle between x axis and X″ *axis
NOTE＊ Refer to the order of rotation on next page.
[ NOTE ]
Sets O, A, and T as values from –180 to +180 deg. The value of
rotation is expressed as shown below depending on the direction:
Right : Positive value
Left : Negative value
15-4
The null tool coordinates (X, Y, Z) coincides with the tool coordinates (x, y, z) when it rotates in
the following order, according to the definition above.
1. O : rotation of the null tool coordinates ΣXYZ around Z axis. (This moves ΣXYZ to ΣX′Y′Z.)
2. A : rotation of ΣX′Y′Z around Y′ axis. (This moves ΣX′Y′Z to ΣX″Y′z.)
3. T : rotation of ΣX″Y′z around z axis. (This moves ΣX″Y′z to Σxyz.)
The setting procedures for X, Y, Z, O, A, T according to the actual gun shapes are as follows:
x
X When registering the gun shown in the left figure as tool 1:
Z
50
X, Y, Z, O, A, T ＝ 0, 50, 300, 0, 0, 0
z
(X axis faces down, vertical against this plane.)
Fixed 300
Y
point y
X
When registering the gun shown in the left figure as tool 2:
Z
50 X, Y, Z, O, A, T ＝ 0, 250, 50, 90, 90, 90
250
(X axis faces down, vertical against this plane.)
y
(O,A,T)=(0.0.0) (O,A,T)=(90.0.0) (O,A,T)=(90.90.0) (O,A,T)=(90.90.90)
Fixed Y X
point x X y
Z Z Ö Ö
O Ö A=90° T=90°
O=90° A Y
z T Y
X x
Y Z z
！ CAUTION
O, A, and T are displayed as values from –180° to 180°.

For example, inputting , , , 90, 150, 220 is expressed as:
O; 90.000
A; 150.000
T; -140.000
15-5
15.5 OPERATING PROCEDURES FOR DATA TRANSFORMATION FUNCTION
15.5.1 OPERATION FLOW
Operate as follows to execute the data transformation function:

Preparing data for transformation
1. Mounting tool
2. Setting workpiece
3. Loading an offline program for data transformation
4. Creating data for automatic measurement of tool coordinates for online robot
5. Measuring four reference points data by online robot
Ø
Executing online automatic tool measurement
1. Gravity compensation* for tool measuring data
2. Automatic measurement of tool coordinates for online robot
3. Displaying and recording tool coordinates data for online robot
Ø
Registering data of tool coordinates for online robot
1. Inputting tool coodinates data obtained by automatic measurement
Ø
Gravity compensation for four online reference points
1. Gravity compensation*
Ø
Registering data of tool coordinates for offline robot If offline tool
If online tool coord. data is
coord. data 1. Registering offline tool coordinates data not correct:
is not correct:
Ø
Executing data transformation
1. Verifying the data of tool coordinates for the 2. Verifying the data of tool
online robot coordinates for the offline robot If error
exceeds
3. Setting the four base points and tool numbers 4. Displaying distances and errors
allowable
between the four base points range:
5. Executing data transformation 6. Gravity compensation*
Ø
Confirming the transformed data after data transformation
If data transformation
1. In check mode, run program that includes transformed data error is large:
NOTE* Gravity compensation is necessary only when the offline teaching data is created by CAD.
15-6
15.5.2 PREPARING DATA FOR TRANSFORMATION
Finish mounting tools and workpieces before executing data transformation function. Then,
load the program for data transformation. For more details, refer to Aux. 0202.
1. Select [Aux. 0202 Load].
2. Connect the USB memory.
3. Select [All Data] or [Program] from the pull

down menu displayed by pressing <File
Type>.
画面貼り替え 4. Select the file name.
5. Pressing <Load> starts loading the file.
15.5.3 CREATING DATA FOR AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENT OF ONLINE TOOL

COORDINATES
Set up the measuring jig for the tool, and teach the robot’s pose data corresponding to four tool
poses for automatic tool measurement.
The angle between each pose should be within 45°- 90° as shown in the figure below. Follow
this guideline when recording, poses out of this range will enlarge errors during data
transformation.
In creating teaching data, move the robot by using AXIS, and position the distance between tool
coordinates origin and the jig origin within 1 mm as shown in the figure below.
Tool pose 2
Tool pose 3
Tool pose 1
Tool Tool pose 4

Measuring jig
Refer to Chapter 10 for more details about how to create the teaching data for automatic tool
measurement.
15-7
15.5.4 TEACHING FOUR REFERENCE POINTS BY ONLINE ROBOT
Teach the position data for four reference points on the workpiece using the online robot. Set
these points close to each corner so that all the teaching points in the program can be inside the
area that they define.
The position data of the four reference points are necessary for fixing the pose relation between
the workpiece and the online (or offline) robot. Select four points (A, B, C, and D) on
workpiece, teach them with online (or offline) robot, and record their step numbers
corresponding to point A, B, C, and D.
Robot
(online)
Z axis
Y axis
X axis Reference
point A Reference
Reference Workpiece
point C
point B Reference
point D
Line direction
Robot As an example, take a pose relation between the robot and

X axis
Y axis
workpiece as shown in the left figure. Recording two or more
points at the same position results in error.
B (Step :2) A (Step :1)
Workpiece
D (Step :4) C (Step :3)

The closer the angle ∠BAC is to 90 °, the more accurate the data
transformation is. If the angle is less than 45°, transformation
error becomes large.
15-8
The procedure for teaching the four reference points for online data is as follows. Create
data in point order, A → B → C → D.
1. Select the program name. Refer to Chapter 2.7.1.1 for more details about selecting a program
name.
2. Move the robot to the four reference points by pressing AXIS, and press REC at each point to
record the pose information.
15.5.5 EXECUTING AUTOMATIC TOOL MEASUREMENT
15.5.5.1 GRAVITY COMPENSATION
This function performs gravity compensation on the teaching data obtained by automatic
measurement, for the position (X,Y,Z) of the tool coordinates origin. This compensation is
necessary only when the offline data was created with CAD.
1. Select [Aux. 010304

Compensate for gravity].

desired program. Refer to
Chapter 2.7.1.1 for details about
selecting a program name.
3. Input data for each item. Set

[Load Weight] to [No-Load].
Press BS to clear the input data.
15-9
[ NOTE ]
When specifying step numbers:
Only the first step number is executed when the end step is set to 0.
Setting 0 for the first step number results in an input error.
If the end step number is set larger than the last step, all the program steps are
executed.
Example of input:
Start step number 0 0 1 3
End step number 0 5 0 3
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Error Error Executes Executes
only step1 only step3

Select [Yes] to execute the gravity
compensation. Registration is
finished when “Setting complete.”
is displayed.
[ NOTE ]
1. For [Load Position](X,Y,Z), input the center of gravity of the load in coordinate values
on null tool coordinate system.
2. When load mass value is negative, data with a load is transformed into data without load.
(This transformation is necessary when measuring robot data is used.) When load mass
value is positive, data without a load is transformed into data for robots with a load.
(This transformation is necessary when CAD data is used.)
3. If the load mass is set to 0 kg, the data created by CAD is transformed into data for
robots without load. If -1 kg is set, the data set for the robot with a load is transformed
into one for CAD.
15-10
15.5.5.2 AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENT OF TOOL COORDINATES FOR ONLINE

ROBOT
This procedure automatically calculates tool coordinates data for online robot. This operation
can be repeated any number of times. The last calculation result is valid.
1. Select [Aux. 010303 Measure Tool

Coordinates].
2. Select the appropriate tool number (1 -

6) by pressing <Prev Page>/<Next
Page>.
3. Press <Program> and select the desired

program* with the 4 reference points
position data. Refer to Chapter 2.7.1.1
for details about selecting a program
name.
NOTE* Inputting a program name in [A] copies the same program name into [B] to [D].
Inputting a program name in [B] to [D] does not copy the name to other fields.
4. Input step numbers in [Step] for

each reference point (A - D). If
5. The confirmation box is

displayed. Select [Yes] to
register the data. Tool
coordinates position data is
overwritten by the values
calculated from the teaching data
of each step. Registration is
finished when “Setting
15-11
[ NOTE ]
1. When the four step numbers are all set to 0, position data of this tool is
not calculated nor overwritten.
2. Position data for several tools can be calculated and overwritten at the
same time.
15.5.5.3 DISPLAYING AND RECORDING TOOL COORDINATES DATA FOR ONLINE

ROBOT
After verifying the tool coordinates data that is obtained from automatic measurement with
online robot, be sure to note down the X, Y, and Z values.* The values will be input and
registered in the following steps.
NOTE* The tool coordinates data obtained in Chapter 15.5.5.2 is deleted after completion of data
transformation. Be sure to note the X, Y, and Z values for tool 1.
Select Aux. 010301 and confirm the

displayed data.
[ NOTE ]
1. When the tool coordinates data is automatically measured, the tool
coordinates position is obtained as a calculated result.
2. When the tool data is not automatically measured, the tool data indicates the
set values (for Tool 1- 3) in Aux. 0304 and values (for Tool 4- 6) registered
in Aux. 010302.
15.5.6 TOOL COORDINATES DATA REGISTRATION FOR ONLINE ROBOT
This function registers the tool coordinates data that is obtained in automatic tool measurement.
Take note that because only X, Y, and Z can be calculated by automatic tool measurement, input
the values for O, A, and T by NUMBER.
15-12
1. Select [Aux. 0304 Tool Coord].
2. Select the appropriate tool

number by pressing <Next
Page>.
3. Input the tool data that was

obtained in Chapter 15.5.5.2.

The tool coordinates are
registered when "Setting
complete." is displayed.
15.5.7 GRAVITY COMPENSATION FOR FOUR ONLINE REFERENCE POINTS
This function performs gravity compensation on the four reference points data measured by
online robot. This compensation is only necessary when offline teaching data is created by
CAD.

Compensate for Gravity].

15-13

[Load Weight] to [No-Load].
To clear the input data, press BS.
4. The confirmation box is

displayed. Select [Yes] to
execute the gravity compensation.
Gravity compensation settings
are stored when “Setting
15.5.8 TOOL DATA REGISTRATION FOR OFFLINE ROBOT
This function sets the position (X, Y, Z) and orientation (O, A, T) of each tool coordinates for tool
numbers 4 to 6 on the offline robot.
1. Select [Aux. 010302.Register
Tool Coordinates].
2. Input data for each item. To clear

the input data, press BS. If the
setting is correct, press ↵. The
input data is now stored in the
memory.
15-14
！ CAUTION
1. When the data registration for tool 4 is complete, do not terminate

data transformation.
2. The tool data registered in this function is valid only during the data
transformation.
3. When data transformation mode is accidentally terminated, the tool
data will need to be set once again.
15.5.9 EXECUTING DATA TRANSFORMATION
15.5.9.1 VERIFYING THE TOOL DATA FOR THE ONLINE AND OFFLINE
Verify if tool data for the online and offline robot is the same as the values set in Aux. 0304.
1. Select [Aux. 010301 Start Data

Transformation].
2. Screen at left appears. Verify if

the data for each tool are the
same as the values set in Aux.
0304.
15.5.9.2 SETTING THE FOUR REFERENCE POINTS AND TOOL NUMBERS
Set the tool number of the tool which is used when teaching the four reference points by using
offline and online robots, and the program and the step numbers where the four base reference
points are taught.
1. Press <Next Page> in Aux.
010301 screen.
15-15

3. Input offline data.
4. Input online data. Set [Tool

Clearance Distance] if necessary.
To clear the input data, press BS.
5. Pressing <Calculate> displays the

confirmation box. Select [Yes]
to start calculating the data
transformation.
6. Transformation is finished when

Press <Next Page> to move to
the next screen.
15-16
[ NOTE ]
1. [Tool clearance distance] shifts the data in each axis direction of the base
coordinates by a set amount, after transformation based on four reference
points data for online robot. In this example, the data is transformed to a
position 10 mm above the workpiece (distance from tool-tip to taught-point=
dz= 10).
2. Set this data to move the tool away from the workpiece during the first repeat
operation to reduce risk of interference, etc. Set 0 in normal operation.
15.5.9.3 DISPLAYING DISTANCES AND ERRORS BETWEEN THE FOUR

REFERENCE POINTS
Next screen displays the deviation between the transformation position of point D obtained by the
calculation in Chapter 15.5.9.2 and the point D position measured by online robot. Deviations
are displayed as dx, dy, and dz distances.
Pressing <Next Page> in the screen

described in step 6 in Chapter 15.5.9.2
displays the screen on the left. Here,
verify the distance between four
reference points for [Offline]/[Online]
and the values of deviation in [dx],
[dy], [dz].
！ CAUTION
If values dx, dy, and dz are not within the range of ±3.0 mm, the
procedures up to this point can be thought as causing the error.
Remove the error causes and execute once again.
15-17
15.5.9.4 EXECUTING DATA TRANSFORMATION
This function performs data transformation based on offline data (program: pg7, for example).
1. Pressing <Next Page> on the

screen in Chapter 15.5.9.3
displays the screen on the left.

3. Tool numbers input in Chapter

15.5.9.2 are displayed. Specify
the first and last steps of the
program for data transformation,
and the tool number of the offline
robot. If the setting is correct,
press <Transform>.

Select [Yes] to register the data.
5. If data transformation performs

properly, the teaching data in the
step is rewritten and “Setting
15-18
15.5.9.5 GRAVITY COMPENSATION FOR OFFLINE DATA
Performs gravity compensation on the data to be used online (program pg7 for example).
This compensation is valid only when the offline teaching data is created by CAD. When
offline teaching data was created with an actual online robot, do not perform gravity
compensation.

Compensate for Gravity].


[Load Weight] to [Load]. To
clear the input data, BS. If the

Select [Yes] to register the set
data. Gravity compensation
settings are stored when “Setting
15-19
15.5.10 CONFIRMING TEACHING DATA AFTER DATA TRANSFORMATION
Execute a program (pg6, for example) which contains data transformed from offline data to
confirm if the data transformation has been performed correctly.
Point D (step: 4) Point C (step: 3)

・・
・
Taught point
(step: N)
・・
Point A (Step: 1) Y axis Point B (step: 2)
X axis
The procedure is as follows:
1. Select the desired program. Refer to Chapter 2.7.1.1 for more details about selecting a
program name.
2. Confirm that the first step is selected. Refer to Chapter 2.7.1.1 for more details about
3. Set check motion to Step Once by CONT on the TP.
4. Press A＋Motor ON on the TP to turn the motor power ON. Then, press A＋RUN or A＋
<HOLD> to enable the robot to move.
5. Press CHECK GO with DEADMAN engaged. The robot executes the first step and then
stops.
6. Repeat this operation to confirm each teaching point, and re-teach points with large deviation.
7. Check the operation for all steps.
This completes the series of operations for data transformation.
15-20
15.6 TRANSFORMATION ERRORS DURING DATA TRANSFORMATION
When online operations are not performed correctly, transformation of the data for the online
robot will not be executed accurately, even though the offline teaching data is correct.
Causes for transformation errors during online operation
Tool orientation when teaching four reference points
Data transformation errors caused by tool orientation difference do not occur if there is no error
in the tool data that is used when processing the offline and online data. However, errors
inevitably exist within the tool data, and data transformation error will occur and will be
affected by differences in the tool orientations for the four online reference points (A, B, C, and
D) and for actual teaching points. When setting tool orientation for the four online reference
points, the four offline reference points (A, B, C, and D), and those of the actual teaching
points to be the same, the error becomes relatively smaller. When tool orientations for the
four online reference points (A, B, C, and D), or those at the actual teaching points do not
match, the error becomes relatively larger. Aspects of this error are described with actual
examples below:
Graph A: Postures are not limited Graph B: Postures limited to 1/4 of

the postures in Graph A
Above graph describes transformation error with an error of ±0.5 mm against reference points X, Y, Z.
Remarks at operation
Note the following in order to make data transformation error smaller:
1. As much as possible, teach each of the four reference points for online robot to have
almost the same orientation, and teach so that their orientations also match those of the
actual teaching points for repeat operation.
2. When tool orientations at repeat mode differ dramatically at each point, group similar
orientations, teach four reference points for each group, and perform data transformation.
This makes data transformation errors smaller.
15-21
15.7 ERROR HANDLING
An error message may appear when some defect occurs during data transformation. In this case,
normally taught data is not rewritten, however, be advised that it may be rewritten for specific
errors. The following is a list of error messages.
Error messages Causes Ö Countermeasures
Step No. (XX) movement range Calculated result exceeds joint motion range.
over. (Press <CONTINUE> for Ø
rewrite.) Selecting [CONTINUE] on the confirmation box
rewrites the teaching data to be within motion range and
continues the processing.
Step No. (XX) interference range Calculated result exceeds joint interference range.
over. (Press <CONTINUE> for Ø
rewrite.) Selecting [CONTINUE] on the confirmation box
rewrites the teaching data and continues the processing.
Step No. (XX) JT. 4, 5, 6 has Axis value difference between before and after
changed over 45 deg. (Press transformation is more than 45° in any axis of wrist.
<CONTINUE> for rewrite.) (Normally there is no problem if this error occurs.)
Ø
Selecting [CONTINUE] on the confirmation box
rewrites the teaching data and continues the processing.
Auto measuring error. Calculation of tool data did not complete properly.
Ø
Check the settings of the four reference poses for auto
tool measurement and set the appropriate data again.
Numerical operation error. An error occurred in process of numeric calculation.
Ø
Check the set data and set the appropriate data again.
Data is incorrect. 1. Tool coordinates position (X, Y, Z) is set out of the

range of ±9999.9 mm in Aux. 010302
2. Tool coordinates orientation (O, A, T) is set out of
the range of ±360.0 °.
Ø
Set tool coordinates transformation values (X, Y, Z, O,
A, T) within the limit.
15-22
Message Detail
Normally Completed. Appears when calculation, etc. finishes properly.

Executing…. Appears while transformation matrix for data
transformation is being calculated in the setting screen
for four reference points and tool numbers in Aux.
010301.
15-23
15-24
E Series Controller 16. Sealing Specification (Option)
16.0 SEALING SPECIFICATION (OPTION)
Sealing spec. robots have various control function necessary for sealing operations. This chapter
describes how to set the data for sealing control.
！ WARNING
Setting of the sealing specification is a kind of teaching.

Usage of these functions is limited to only those who have
completed special training and are qualified for teaching
or supervising robot operations.
16.1 FLOWCHART FOR SEALING OPERATION
The flowchart below shows the sealing procedure for sealing spec. robots. Make the necessary
settings for sealing control on the screens in auxiliary function 060501 - 060530. Teaching and
the subsequent operations are the same as those in workpiece handling, etc.
Start
060501 Application Field
Modify if necessary.
060502 Gun Condition
060530 Painting Sealing Signal

Definition
Teaching
Check on teaching
Repeat operation
End
16-1
16.2 SETTING OF NECESSARY ITEMS BY AUXILIARY FUNCTION
To display the pull-down menu, activate B area on TP screen and press MENU, or press the B
area directly. Select [Aux Function] and input the auxiliary function number (605) directly with
NUMBER. Then, press ↵ to display the setting screen below.
To display each setting screen, move the cursor or input the function number directly and press ↵.
1 Application Field Selects the application field for the gun.

2 Gun Condition Specifies operation conditions for each code of gun condition (CC)*
that is auxiliary data of gun instruction.
30 Painting Sealing Signal Sets the signal numbers for painting/sealing gun ON/OFF.
Definition
NOTE* Refer to Chapter 16.2.2 for the gun condition setting procedure.
16-2
16.2.1 SETTING OF APPLICATION FIELD
Sealing spec. robots can use up to 4 guns. The application field of [Gun1] to [Gun4] are
specified here.
Select a gun from [GUN1] to [GUN4] using ↑/↓, and press ↵ after setting either 0, 2 or 3 for
each gun.
[ NOTE ]
1. For guns set to either [2: Handling] or [3: Painting Sealing], the gun
number will appear as the auxiliary data of the gun instruction on the
block teaching screen if it is taught ON. Nothing is displayed when it is
taught OFF.
2. For guns set to [3: Painting Sealing], the data specified in Aux. 060502
and Aux. 060530 becomes effective.
3. For guns set to [2: Handling], the data specified in Aux. 060502 becomes
effective.
0: Not used Gun is not used.

2: Handling Gun is used for handling specification.
3: Painting Sealing Gun is used for sealing specification.
16-3
16.2.2 SETTING OF GUN CONDITION FOR EACH CC NUMBER
Specify items shown in the screen below for each code of gun condition (CC) that is one of
auxiliary data of gun instruction. By setting [Gun Subroutine] to [Enable], the robot
automatically executes the set subroutine program after the gun ON/OFF signal has been output,
and then returns to the current step after the subroutine completes.
Range of setting: pg0 to pg999
Move cursor to each item using ↑/↓, and make necessary settings by ←/→ and NUMBER.
Pressing <Next Page> displays the data for codes 2 to 9 and to enable setting for these codes.
Pressing ↵ registers the data set for codes 1 to 9 at the same time.
16-4
16.2.3 DEFINING SIGNALS FOR PAINTING/SEALING
Sets the number of the output signal to be used to turn ON the gun (GUN1 - 4). This takes
effects only if that gun type number 3 (Painting Sealing) was specified for [Application] in Aux.
060501.
[ NOTE ]
1. In teach and check modes, pressing A+CL outputs the signal that turns
the Gun ON.
2. GS – Gun Schedule value which controls Gun Spray ON/OFF timing is
enabled for the output signals assigned here.
3. These signals are output in the same timing as OX signals if the GS
value is set to 0.
16-5
16.3 TEACHING SCREEN FOR SEALING SPECIFICATION
To switch to the gun instruction dedicated screen (Lower screen below), move the cursor to the
right of the Comment position by pressing A+→ or by → on the teach screen. Refer to 2.7.1.4
to display the teach screen.
Except for the auxiliary data of gun instruction, the configuration of the block teaching screen
and the auxiliary data of each instruction are the same as those displayed for handling
specification. Please refer to Chapter 5.3 for details.
On the gun instruction dedicated screen, three kinds of auxiliary data are set for each gun, from
left to right in the following order: ON/OFF, GS value, CC number (The fourth item is fixed to 0
in sealing applications.).
16.4 HOW TO TEACH AUXILIARY DATA OF GUN INSTRUCTION
To teach/edit auxiliary data of gun instruction, turn ON TEACH LOCK and input numerical data
directly via NUMBER. Teach/edit the following auxiliary data for each gun (max. four guns).
1. Setting of Gun ON/OFF

Display the gun instruction dedicated screen. The data of the selected gun changes “ON→
OFF→ON” each time CL1 (CL2) is pressed.
The signal also changes “ON→OFF→ON” by pressing CLn+NUMBER (0-8).
16-6
Example: Pressing CLn+3 sets ON/ OFF for Gun3.

The gun numbers appear for ON setting in the parameter values display are for gun instruction
on the block teaching screen, gun numbers set do not appear for OFF setting.
2. Setting of GS values
Pressing the F key of the desired gun number (<Gun1> or <Gun2>) displays the setting screen
for GS values. See the screens below.
Pressing ↵ after inputting the GS value (-999 to 999) prompts the setting of CC number (0-9).
3. Setting of CC number
Input CC number and press ↵. When 3 or more guns are used, pressing A + → changes
<Gun1>/<Gun2> to <Gun3>/<Gun4>.
To set the auxiliary data of the instructions other than gun instruction on block teaching screen,
refer to Chapter 5.3.
16-7
16.5 GS VALUE
The GS value sets the time for turning ON/OFF gun signals based on the taught value.
To advance ON/OFF timing: negative value (unit: mm)
To delay ON/OFF timing: positive value (unit: mm)
Specifying the GS value enables fine control of the ON/OFF timing.
The followings are examples for Gun1.
(Example 1)
A B C
・・・
100mm
When “GS100” and “Gun1ON” are taught at point B, the gun signal is output 100 mm after point
A.
(Example 2)
A B C
・・・
100 mm
When “GS-100” and “Gun1ON” are taught at point B, the gun signal is output 100 mm before
point A.
(Example 3)
A B C
・・・
100 mm 50 mm
To delay outputting the gun ON signal by 100 mm and advance output of the gun OFF signal by
50 mm as shown above, teach “GS100” and “Gun1ON” at point B, and “GS-50” and
“Gun1OFF” at point C.
(Example 4)
A B C
・・・
200 mm
To delay outputting the gun OFF signal by 200 mm as shown above, teach “GS200” and
“Gun1OFF” at point C.
16-8
(Example 5)
A200 mm B 100 mm C D
・・・・
OFF ON(200) ON(100) OFF
The above figure shows the output when Gun1 is taught as shown below and GunON is taught to
a series of points B, C.
“GS0” and “Gun1OFF” at point A
“GS200” and “Gun1ON” at point B
“GS100” and “Gun1ON” at point C
“GS0” and “Gun1OFF” at point D
[ NOTE ]
The gun can be kept ON continuously if negative
distances are taught to a series of points.
[ NOTE ]
1. Pressing ↵ after inputting a GS value sets the value and redisplays the
gun instruction dedicated screen.
2. Pressing R before/after inputting the GS value displays the gun
instruction dedicated screen without setting the value.
16-9
16.6 SPRAY ENABLE/DISABLE
This selection is effective both in teach and repeat modes. When selecting [Enable], material
cannot be applied in teach mode unless gun ON signal is output manually. When selecting
[Disable], in repeat mode, robot motion can be checked without spraying from gun.
To select Spray Enable/Disable, activate B area and press MENU, or press the B area directly,
and display the pull-down menu. Select [Aux Function] and input the auxiliary function number
(12) directly with NUMBER. Then, press ↵ to display the screen below.
The screen below is displayed by pressing ↵. Select either [Enable] or [Disable] and press ↵ to
register it.
16-10
Spray Enable/Disable can be selected via the pull-down menu in repeat speed display area, too.
To display the pull-down menu, press A + MENU, or press the repeat speed display area directly.
Move cursor to [Spray Enable/Disable]. Pressing ↵ toggles between: Enable → Disable →

Enable. SPRAY ON is displayed in status area when selecting [Enable].
16.7 MANUAL OUTPUT OF GUN ON SIGNALS
The gun signal can be output manually by pressing A+CL in teach mode.
When GunON is displayed Gun signal is ON while A+CL are pressed.

Timing of the gun signal ON is dependent on the auxiliary data
of gun instruction, such as GS and CC, currently displayed in
Teach Pendant.
When GunOFF is displayed Gun signal does not change even when A+CL are pressed.
If selecting [Disable], the gun ON signal cannot be output manually even if GunON is displayed.
16-11
16-12
E Series Controller 17. Troubleshooting
17.0 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes the basic procedures for troubleshooting.
17.1 BASIC PROCEDURE FOR TROUBLESHOOTING
Follow the procedure described below when an abnormal condition arises.
Check the error message, and

remove the cause of the error.
Press <RESET>.
Yes.
Check the robot and
Error resolved? the surroundings, and End
restart the operation. Restarting is
successful.
No.
Restarting is
Press EMERGENCY STOP unsuccessful.
to cut OFF the motor power.
Turn OFF the

CONTROLLER POWER.
Turn the Check the robot and

CONTROLLER POWER the surroundings, and End
ON again. restart the operation. Restarting is
successful.
Restarting is
Press EMERGENCY STOP unsuccessful.
Turn OFF the

CONTROLLER POWER.
17-1
Call up the initialization

Check the robot and
screen and set up without
the surroundings, and End
initializing. Refer to
Chapter 17.3.
successful.
Restarting is
unsuccessful.
Press EMERGENCY STOP
Save all data on the USB

memory.
Turn OFF the

CONTROLLER POWER.
Call up the initialization

screen and set up without
initializing. Refer to
Chapter 17.3.
Check the robot and

Load all data saved on the
the surroundings, and End
USB memory.
successful.
Restarting is
unsuccessful.
Contact maintenance member or Kawasaki.
[ NOTE ]
When contacting maintenance member or Kawasaki,
please provide all details, information, and operating
conditions at the time the error occurred.
17-2
17.2 CALLING UP THE INITIALIZATION SCREEN
Follow the procedure below to call up the initialization screen.
1. Turn OFF the CONTROLLER POWER.
2-1. Connect the PC. Turn ON the power and activate the AS monitor software.
2-2. Or, connect the TP.
3. Set dip switch No.8 of main CPU board to ON side.
4. Turning ON the CONTROLLER POWER displays the screen below.
17-3
17.3 SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
！ WARNING
Avoid using this function in normal state. Take note that

performing this function deletes all programs and variables
in memory.
Normally, input 0 in the screen in Chapter 17.2.
1. Selecting 1: Initialization of the system
Initialization resets system data and auxiliary data, including system switch settings, to their
default settings, but not to the factory setting*. Also, note that user programs and variables
data are cleared, but data inherent to the robot are not affected. Execute following the
procedure below.
(1) When the screen in Chapter 17.2 is displayed, input 1 by keyboard screen on PC or TP.
(2) Confirmation message is displayed as shown below. Inputting 1 (Yes) executes the
initialization of the system.
NOTE* To return system data or auxiliary data to the factory setting, save the data in external
device before initialization, and after initialization load the data or input the data on
the E controller setting list included with the robot at time of factory shipment.
17-4
2. Selecting 2: Setting to the shipment state*
Returns system data and auxiliary data, including data inherent to the robot and system switch
settings data, to their factory settings. But, user programs and variables data are cleared.
Execute following the procedure below.
resetting to the factory shipment state.
NOTE* This operation is possible only when a file with the factory setting data has been set
and stored at time of factory setting. This file is typically stored when robot is
shipped from the factory per customer order and specification.
3. Selecting 999: Initialization of all data
Resets the system data and auxiliary data, including data inherent to the robot and system
switch settings data, to their default settings. Also, user programs and variables data are
cleared. Follow the procedure below for the execution.
17-5
initialization of all the data.
Once initialized, all data must be reset, including robot model setting. In addition,
incompatibility error between the software and hardware/ robot arm may occur after initialization.
Therefore, to prevent inadvertent loss of data, save all data before executing initialization, and
then reload this data forcibly after initialization. After completion, turn the controller power
OFF then ON again.
17-6
E Series Controller Appendix. Error Message List
APPENDIX ERROR MESSAGE LIST
Code Error Message

P0100 Illegal input data.
P0101 Too many arguments.
P0102 Input data is too big.
P0103 Illegal PC number.
P0104 Illegal Robot number.
P0105 Illegal program.
P0106 Illegal priority.
P0107 Invalid coordinate value.
P0108 Syntax error.
P0109 Invalid statement.
P0110 Specify full spelling of command.
P0111 Cannot use this command/instruction in current mode.
P0112 Cannot execute with DO command.
P0113 Not a program instruction.
P0114 Illegal expression.
P0115 Illegal function.
P0116 Illegal argument of function.
P0117 Invalid variable (or program) name.
P0118 Illegal variable type.
P0119 Incorrect array suffix.
P0120 Incongruent num. of parenthesis.
P0121 Expected to be a binary operator.
P0122 Illegal constant.
P0123 Illegal qualifier.
P0124 Invalid label.
P0125 Missing expected character.
P0126 Illegal switch name.
P0127 Specified switch name needs full spelling.
P0128 Illegal format specifier.
P0129 Duplicate statement label.
P0130 Cannot define as array.
P0131 No. of dimensions in array exceeds 3.
P0132 Array variable already exists.
P0133 Non array variable exists.
A-1
Code Error Message

P0134 Array variable expected.
P0135 Local variable expected.
P0136 Unexpected suffix.
P0137 Mismatch of arguments at subroutine call.
P0138 Mismatch of argument type at subroutine call.
P0139 Illegal control structure.
P0140 Step:XX Wrong END statement.
P0141 Step:XX Extra END statement.
P0142 Step:XX Cannot terminate DO with END.
P0143 Step:XX No VALUE statement after CASE.
P0144 Step:XX Preceding IF missing.
P0145 Step:XX Preceding CASE missing.
P0146 Step:XX Preceding DO missing.
P0147 Step:XX Cannot find END of XX.
P0148 Step:XX Too many control structures.
P0149 Variable (or program) already exists.
P0150 Variable of different type already exists.
P0151 Internal buffer over due to complicated expression.
P0152 Undefined variable (or program).
P0153 Illegal clock value.
P0154 Missing '='.
P0155 Missing ')'.
P0156 Missing ']'.
P0157 Missing "TO".
P0158 Missing "BY".
P0159 Missing ':'.
P0160 Specify "ON" or "OFF".
P0161 Robot Num. must be specified.
P0162 Cannot modify position data in this instruction.
P0163 Name of program, variable, file, etc. misspecified.
P0164 Illegal Robot network ID.
P0165 Step:XX No SVALUE statement after SCASE.
P0166 Step:XX Preceding SCASE missing.
P1000 Cannot execute program because motor power is OFF.
P1001 Cannot execute program in TEACH mode.
P1002 Cannot execute program because teach lock is ON.
A-2
Code Error Message

P1003 Cannot execute program because of EXT. HOLD input.
P1004 Cannot execute program being reset.
P1005 Cannot execute program because of EXT. START ENABLE.
P1006 Cannot execute program because of EXT. START DISABLE.
P1007 Start signal was not input at a RPS_END step.
P1008 Cannot execute program, HOLD sw. engaged.
P1009 Program is already running.
P1010 Robot control program is already running.
P1011 Cannot continue this program. Use EXECUTE.
P1012 Robot is moving now.
P1013 Cannot execute because in error now. Reset error.
P1014 Cannot execute because program already in use.
P1015 Cannot delete, in use by another command.
P1016 Cannot delete, used in program.
P1017 Cannot delete a program in Editor.
P1018 KILL or PCKILL to delete program.
P1019 PC program is running.
P1020 Cannot operate, teach pendant in operation.
P1021 Cannot execute with DO command.
P1022 Cannot execute with MC instruction.
P1023 Cannot execute in Robot program.
P1024 Statement cannot be executed.
P1025 Cannot be executed, function not set.
P1026 Cannot KILL program that is running.
P1027 Cannot edit program, teach lock is ON.
P1028 Cannot paste.
P1029 Program name not specified.
P1030 Program interlocked by other procedure.
P1031 No free memory.
P1032 No program step.
P1033 Program name already exists.
P1034 This program is not editable.
P1035 Record inhibited. Set [Record Accept] and operate again.
P1036 Program change inhibited. Set [Accept] and operate again.
P1037 Program name cannot be called "calib_load_".
P1038 Program does not exist.
A-3
Code Error Message

P1039 Teach pendant is not connected.
P1040 Cannot execute this command in I/F panel.
P1041 Auto monitor command failure.
P1042 NUM program is running.
P1043 Cannot execute in REPEAT mode.
P1044 Cannot execute on because motor power is ON.
P1045 Set TEACH mode and teach lock ON.
P1046 Turn on trigger switch.
P1047 The disconnected robot cannot select the program/step.
P1048 Cannot operate during execution of brake check.
P1049 Program is locked.
P1050 Exist protected program.
P1051 Cannot unlock protection while program running.
P1052 Because the memory was full, could not copy the program.
P1053 Because the memory was full, the copy of program was suspended.
P1054 Turn off trigger switch.
P1055 Teach the axis lock instruction at the step of clamp ON.
P1056 Teach the axis unlocking instruction at the step of clamp ON.
P2000 Turn OFF motor power.
P2001 Turn HOLD/RUN sw. to HOLD.
P2002 There is no external axis.
P2003 Illegal positioner type.
P2004 Cannot change, user data already exists.
P2005 Graphic area error.
P2006 Option is OFF.
P2007 Cannot execute because executed by other device.
P2008 Device is not ready.
P2009 Illegal file name.
P2010 Disk is not ready.
P2011 Invalid disk format.
P2012 Disk is write-protected.
P2013 Disk full.
P2014 Too many files.
P2015 Cannot write on read-only file.
P2016 Cannot open the file.
P2017 Cannot close the file.
A-4
Code Error Message

P2018 Storage data logging now.
P2019 ADC function already in use.
P2020 Illegal device number.
P2021 Cannot execute on this terminal.
P2022 Cannot use DOUBLE OX.
P2023 In cooperative mode.
P2024 Invalid coordinate value X.
P2025 Invalid coordinate value Y.
P2026 Invalid coordinate value Z.
P2027 Cannot use signal, already used in I/F panel.
P2028 Arm ID board is busy.
P2029 Axis setting data is incorrect.
P2030 Unknown Aux. function number.
P2031 Deleted step was destination step of Jump, Call instruction.
P2032 Incorrect number input as WHERE parameter.
P2033 Logging is running.
P2034 Undefined memory.
P2035 Non data.
P2036 Memory verify error.
P2037 Real time path modulation is already running.
P2038 Matrix calculation error.
P2039 Cannot start cycle from FN instruction.
P2040 Card is not ready.
P2041 Wrong card loaded.
P2042 Card is write-protected.
P2043 Card battery is low voltage.
P2044 Card is not formatted.
P2045 Cannot format this card.
P2046 Card initialization error.
P2047 File is already open.
P2048 File does not exist in card.
P2049 Attempted to open too many files.
P2050 Unexpected error during card access.
P2051 Illegal sequence numbers for file I/O data.
P2052 [LSEQ]Program includes unavailable instruction.
P2053 [LSEQ]Too many steps exist.
A-5
Code Error Message

P2054 [LSEQ]Invalid type of signal variable.
P2055 [LSEQ]Program is already running.
P2056 [LSEQ]No.of signal is outside specifiable range.
P2057 [SerialFlash]Cannot open file.
P2058 [SerialFlash]Data read error.
P2059 [SerialFlash]Data write error.
P2060 [SerialFlash]File or directory doesn't exist.
P2061 File does not exist in floppy.
P2062 [FDD/PC_CARD]Failure in writing data per verify function.
P2063 [FDD/PC_CARD]Faulty response from verify function.
P2064 [FDD]No space available.
P2065 [Multi Disks]Invalid disk was loaded.
P2066 Boot flash state is write-disenable.
P2067 [Serial Flash]File directory error.
P2068 Cannot execute program being edited now.
P2069 [FDD/PC_CARD]Device already in use.
P2070 No more data can be registered.
P2071 C/S switch set to disable.
P2072 [LSEQ]Maximum cycles of execution.
P2073 [LSEQ]Other program is waiting execution.
P2074 Floppy disk is broken.
P2075 Channel number for JtXX is incorrect.
P2076 SAVE/LOAD in progress.
P2077 [Serial Flash]Access error occurred.
P2078 [Serial Flash]Upload or Download was aborted.
P2079 Card full.
P2080 Can not execute because of the channel assigned joint No.
P2083 User log is not created.
P2084 The number of registration of a user log was changed.
P2085 Cannot register user log, no free memory.
P2086 User log data is not registered.
P2087 The kind of user log data and specified data is different.
P2088 Cannot load the improper compensation parameter.
P2090 No servo data of the servo spec.
P2091 [Serial Flash]The file or directory already exists.
P2092 [Serial Flash]The directory is not yet empty.
A-6
Code Error Message

P2093 [Serial Flash]There is no space to write.
P2094 [Serial Flash]Cannot access the file for read only.
P2095 No response from option CPU board.
P2096 Cannot execute cycle start after palletizing motion aborted.
P2097 Cannot change steps during palletizing motion.
P2098 The axis is not for endless rotation.
P2099 Cannot change palletizing state into ON.
P2100 Macro error.
P2101 Nesting is too deep in include file.
P2102 File or folder is missing.
P2103 USB memory is not inserted.
P2104 Failed to download softwares.
P2105 Available USB memory is low.
P2106 Available compact flash memory is low.
P2107 System is now downloading the software.
P2108 There is no software in the USB memory.
P2109 Cannot execute program because of simultaneously operation sig. inputting.
P2110 [USB/CF]File write error.
P2111 Please return spin-axis to the original position.
P2112 File name is too long.
P2113 Cannot start cycle from KI instruction.
P4500 FIELD-BUS)Interface not enabled.
P4501 DEVNET)Node XX not in the scanlist.
P4502 DEVNET)Already in that mode.
P4503 Duplicate signal number.
P4504 FIELD-BUS)signals limit over.(max. XX)
P4505 CC-LINK)Version mismatch.
P4506 EN/IP-M)Already in specified mode.
P4507 FIELD-BUS)Cannot execute with old ANYBUS card firmware.
P4508 FIELD-BUS)Cannot communicate with interface card.
P4509 FIELD-BUS)Wrong interface card type error.
P4510 FIELD-BUS)Initialization of the card is not complete.
P5000 Waiting weld completion.
P5001 Waiting retract or extend pos. input signal.
P5002 Spot sequence is running.
P5003 External-axis type and Gun type data mismatch.
A-7
Code Error Message

P6000 Shifted location of STEPXX is out of range.
P6001 STEPXX in source program is out of motion range.
P6002 Specified painting data bank does not exist.
P6003 Cannot execute program because of suspend playback.
P6004 Cannot execute because of the Air Purge sequence.
P6005 Cannot execute because robot is disconnected.
P6006 Cannot specify circular move to end point of spraying path.
P6007 Number of taught points for spraying path exceeds the limit.
P6008 Number of instructions between points exceeds the limit.
P6009 Shortage in number of taught points for spraying path.
P6010 Selected program other than pgxxx.
P6011 Cannot move, change to joint interpolation or add points.
P6012 Cannot edit program, TEACH LOCK is OFF.
P6500 Cannot generate working line direction.
P6501 Illegal tool posture.
P6502 No weld database.
P6503 Cannot change weld condition.
P6504 Step:XX Preceding L.START missing.
P6505 The axis type is not set as the servo torch.
P6506 Shift function can not be used in CIR interp.
P7000 Cannot program reset, because not at home position 1.
P7001 In force meas. mode, only NOP Interp. avail.
P7002 Cannot change stroke because clamp on now.
P7003 Servo parameter file is not found.
P7500 Turn motor power on.
P7501 Because of repeat mode,wait to teach mode.
P7502 Over the number which can be registered in interruption.
P7503 Cannot execute program in error masking.
P7504 ONC/ONCI channel has already received.
P7505 Cannot execute in saving.
P7506 Cannot accept a record because robot is moving.
P7507 Amount of the data change is too large in repeat operation.
P8400 Cannot execute program because of CLAMP MODE sig. inputting.
P8800 The controller number is duplicated.
P8801 The IL robot number is duplicated.
P8802 The IL server is processing.
A-8
Code Error Message

P8803 The connection with the IL server is disabled.
P8804 IL server IP address is not yet set.
P8805 Set the mode to Teach.
P8806 Turn off servo.
P8807 ILL)Communication time out error.
P8808 ILL)Time out error for PC server processing.
P8809 ILL)PC server processing demand completion waiting is time out error.
P8810 ILL)Error in auto interlock setting system.
P8811 ILL)Could not release operation lock for slave controller.
P8812 ILL)Could not communicate with the PC server.
P8813 The IL robot number is unregistered.
P9000 Unacceptable control-direction.
P9001 Unacceptable control-distance.
P9002 Same data are specified for some reference points.
P9003 Reference points1,2,3 are on a straight line.
P9004 Reference point 4 is out of allowed range.
P9005 Cannot manipulate because teach lock is ON.
W1000 Cannot move along straight line JtXX in this configuration.
W1001 Over maximum joint speed in check. Set low speed.
W1002 Operation log information was cleared.
W1003 Calibration failed. Retry after changing posture.
W1004 JtXX out of motion range. Check operational area.
W1005 Illegal center of gravity, default parameter is set.
W1006 Incorrect load moment. Default parameter is set.
W1007 Application setting changed. Turn OFF & ON the control power.
W1008 Parameter changed. Turn OFF & ON the control power.
W1009 Position envelope error of JtXX at last E-stop.
W1010 RAM battery low voltage.
W1011 PLC alarm. (XX)
W1012 Servo parameter changed. Turn OFF & ON the control power.
W1013 Encoder battery low voltage. [Servo(XX)]
W1014 Number of axes changed. Reinitialize.
W1015 Possibility of failure.
W1016 Torque of motor is over limit. JtXX
W1017 Encoder battery low voltage.[External axis(XX)]
W1018 Network parameter is changed. Turn OFF & ON the control power.
A-9
Code Error Message

W1019 The registered value is beyond rated load.
W1020 Error sector was found.
W1021 The optimal posture can't be found at present location.
W1022 Not execute ZRPAADSET command.
W1023 Teach Plug Position wrong or P-N low voltage.[XX]
W1024 Deviation from last stop position exceeds the limit set.
W1025 (SSCNET)Excessive regenerative warning of JtXX.(CodeXX)
W1026 (SSCNET)Motor overload warning of JtXX.(CodeXX)
W1027 While lifter is locked, it cannot move.
W1028 The center of gravity for payload is over limit. Reduction gears could be broken.
W1029 The center of gravity for payload is over limit. Use the Jt5 at zero degree only.
W1030 Braking torque of JtXX has decreased.
W1031 Cannot move along straight line unless JtXX value is 0 degree.
W1032 Cannot move straight - the flange faces direction of upper sphere.
W1033 Cannot change orientation.
W1034 Encoder power voltage is low. JtXX
W1035 Encoder battery voltage is low. Check zeroing. JtXX
W1036 Step data is different.
W1037 The axis is not for endless rotation.
W1048 No. of encoder errors exceeded limit JtXX.
W1053 (FANXX-XX)Rotational speed of fan is below the limit. (ServoBoardXX)
W1054 AVR reaches the expected lifetime soon.
W1055 Vision cycle timer over.
W1056 [Main CPU board]CPU temperature exceeded the limit. (XX 1/1000 deg C)
W1057 Cannot move along straight line tool in this configuration.
W1058 Link3 interferes in ground.
W1059 Link5 interferes in base.
W1060 Link6 interferes in base.
W1061 TP changed. Confirm current pose, and operate the robot.
W1062 The TP backlight lighting time exceeded the limit.
W1063 The number of ON/OFF operations of MC relay exceeded the
limit.(SrvB'dXX)(MCXX)
W1064 Exceeded the limit.(Parts:XX)
W1072 Deviation of JtXX is too large.
W2901 SLOGIC ERROR MESSAGE #1
A-10
Code Error Message

A-11
Code Error Message

W2965 The max load is XX of a permissible torque.
W2966 Load exceeded permissible torque.
W2967 Load exceeded max torque.
W2968 Please set a group number as XX.
W3801 Because the brake has been released, it is not possible to move.
W3802 Maint. period elapsed, maint. is required.
W3803 Total power ON time exceeded limit, maint. is required.
W3804 Total robot connection time exceeded limit, maint. is required.
W3805 Total servo ON time exceeded limit, maint. is required.
W3806 Total JtXX the total travel dist. exceeded limit, maint. is required.
A-12
Code Error Message

W3807 Total times of MC ON exceeded limit, maint. is required.
W3808 Total times of servo ON exceeded limit, maint. is required.
W3809 Total times of E-stop exceeded limit, maint. is required.
W3810 JtXX total (curr)^3-motion dist. exceeded limit, maint. is required.
W3811 JtXX RMS value of current exceeded limit, maint. is required.
W3812 Power supply(1) for input to NO.XX I/O board is abnormal.
W3813 Power supply(2) for input to NO.XX I/O board is abnormal.
W3814 Power for output from NO.XX I/O board is abnormal or Fuse blown.
W4000 No response from PLC to Break down info writing.
W4001 Break down info cannot write on PLC[EC = XX].
W4002 Break down info writing cannot receive correct answer.
W4500 FIELD-BUS)Slave port OFFLINE.
W4501 FIELD-BUS)Master port OFFLINE.
W4502 CC-LINK)Data link error on Master board. XX
W5000 Release wait cond., in force measurement mode.
W5001 PLC communication error.
W5002 Weld controller XX not connected.
W5003 Weld controller XX no response.
W5004 Weld controller XX response error.
W5005 (Spot welding)No response from RWC XX.
W5006 (Spot welding)RWC response error XX.
W5007 (Spot welding)Weld fault XX.
W5008 (Spot welding)Cable disconnection error XX.
W5009 (Spot welding)Internal leak XX.
W5010 (Spot welding)Main cable exchange alarm XX.
W5011 (Spot welding)No connection with RWC XX.
W5012 Cannot achieve set force.
W5013 Tip wear over the limit. (MOVING SIDE)
W5014 Tip wear over the limit. (FIXED SIDE)
W5015 (Spot welding) Welding current has decreased.
W5016 Weld warning has arisen. (CodeXX)
W6000 Grease reduction gears and motor bearings.
W6001 Replace the robot main cable.
W6002 Replace the cooling fans in the controller.
W6003 Replace the DC power supply in the controller.
W6004 Replace the servo power unit.
A-13
Code Error Message

W6005 Replace the power amplifier for the robot arm.
W6006 Replace the power amplifier for the robot wrist.
W6007 Replace the power amplifier for the traveller.
W6008 Exp interlock is disabled by jumper wiring.
W6009 Not selected Internal pressure Explosion-proof.
W6010 Disable Gun Relative Distance Check (ID:XX).
W6011 Shutter release signal variable logging error.
W7000 Cannot operate excluding the servo welding gun axis. Because the pressure
measurement mode.
W7001 Detected board gap quantity error.
W7002 Detected board gap quantity error.
W7003 The foreign body was detected in the Tip Dress.
W7004 Value of auto collect exceeds work abnormality level.
W7500 Can't continue check motion because separated from last pos.
W7501 Cannot execute a program because of LOW voltage.
W8400 Cannot achieve set force of JtXX.
W8800 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(SphereXX, LineXX)
W8801 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(SphereXX, ZUpper)
W8802 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(SphereXX, ZLower)
W8803 Command value almost invades restricted space.(SphereXX, Part.XX LineXX)
W8804 Command value almost invades restricted space.(SphereXX, Part.XX ZUpper)
W8805 Command value almost invades restricted space.(SphereXX, Part.XX ZLower)
W8806 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(ToolBox, LineXX)
W8807 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(ToolBox, ZUpper)
W8808 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(ToolBox, ZUpper)
W8809 Command value almost invades restricted space.(ToolBox, Part.XX)
W8810 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(LinkXX, LineXX)
W8811 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(LinkXX, ZUpper)
W8812 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(LinkXX, ZLower)
W8813 Command value almost invades restricted space.(LinkXX, Part.XX LineXX)
W8814 Command value almost invades restricted space.(LinkXX, Part.XX ZUpper)
W8815 Command value almost invades restricted space.(LinkXX, Part.XX ZLower)
W8851 Detected area interference.
W8852 Detected arm interference.(XX, XX)
W8853 ILL)Detected arm interference.(XX, XX)
W8854 ILL)Communication time out error.
A-14
Code Error Message

W8855 ILL)Sequence processing demand completion waiting is time out error.
W8856 ILL)Sequence processing completion waiting is time out error.
W8857 ILL)Sequence processing system error.
W8858 ILL)Create/Set processing completion waiting is time out error.
W8859 ILL)Inter lock less function system error.
W8860 [ARM CONTROL b'd]Data received from IL server is invalid.
W8900 Can not operate because motion limitation signal was input.
E0001 Unknown error.
E0002 [Servo boardXX]CPU BUS error.
E0100 Abnormal comment statement exists.
E0101 Nonexistent label.
E0102 Variable is not defined.
E0103 Location data is not defined.
E0104 String variable is not defined.
E0105 Program or label is not defined.
E0106 Value is out of range.
E0107 No array suffix.
E0108 Divided by zero.
E0109 Floating point overflow.
E0110 String too long.
E0111 Attempted operation with neg. exponent.
E0112 Too complicated expression.
E0113 No expressions to evaluate.
E0114 SQRT parameter is negative.
E0115 Array suffix value outside range.
E0116 Faulty or missing argument value.
E0117 Incorrect joint number.
E0118 Too many subroutine calls.
E0119 Nonexistent subroutine.
E0120 No destination program.
E0121 Cannot specify the jump source program as jump destination.
E0900 Block step instruction check sum error.
E0901 Step data is broken.
E0902 Expression data is broken.
E0903 Check sum error of system data.
E1000 ADC channel error.
A-15
Code Error Message

E1001 ADC input range error.
E1002 PLC interface error.
E1003 Built-in PLC is not installed.
E1004 INTER-bus board is not ready.
E1005 Spin axis encoder difference error.
E1006 Touch panel switch is short-circuited.
E1007 Power sequence board is not installed.
E1008 Second Power sequence board is not installed.
E1009 No.XX I/O board is not installed.
E1010 Power sequence detects error.
E1011 Built-in sequence board is not installed.
E1012 RI/O board or C-NET board is not installed.
E1013 INTER-BUS board is not installed.
E1014 Dual port memory for communication is not installed.
E1015 Amp Interface board is not installed.(Code=XX)
E1016 No.XX CC-LINK board is not installed.
E1017 PLC error.Error code is Hex.XX.
E1018 INTER-BUS status error.
E1019 Power sequence board for safety unit is not installed.
E1020 External equipment is abnormal.
E1021 Arm ID board error. (CodeXX)
E1022 Power sequence board error. (CodeXX)
E1023 Communication error in robot network.
E1024 EXT.AXIS release sequence error.(CodeXX)
E1025 EXT.AXIS connect sequence error.(CodeXX)
E1026 Main CPU ID mismatch.
E1027 Safety circuit was cut OFF.
E1028 JtXX motor overloaded.
E1029 Encoder rotation data is abnormal.(JtXX)
E1030 Encoder data is abnormal.(JtXX)
E1031 Miscount of encoder data.(JtXX)
E1032 Mismatch ABS and INC encoder data(JtXX).
E1033 Encoder line error of (JtXX).
E1034 Encoder initialize error (JtXX).
E1035 Encoder response error(JtXX).
E1036 Encoder communication error.(JtXX)
A-16
Code Error Message

E1037 Encoder data conversion error.(JtXX)
E1038 Encoder ABS-track error.(JtXX)
E1039 Encoder INC-pulse error.(JtXX)
E1040 Encoder MR-sensor error. (JtXX)
E1041 Limit switch (JtXX) is ON.
E1044 Destination position is out of the specified area.
E1045 (Spot welding)Gun-clamp mismatch.
E1046 Too short distance between start point and end point.
E1047 Axis number is not for conveyor follow mode.
E1048 Offset data of zeroing is illegal value.
E1049 Current position is out of the specified area.
E1050 Encoder and brake power off signal not dedicated.
E1051 Incorrect double OX output.
E1052 Work sensing signal is not dedicated.
E1053 Work sensing signal already input.
E1054 Cannot execute motion instruction.
E1055 Start point position error for circle.
E1056 MASTER robot already exists.
E1057 Check to which robot MASTER/ALONE were instructed.
E1058 SLAVE robot already exists.
E1059 Not an instruction for cooperative motion.
E1060 Cannot execute in check back mode.
E1061 Cannot execute in ONE program.
E1062 Jt2 and Jt3 interfere during motion to start pose.
E1063 Jt2 and Jt3 interfere during motion to end pose.
E1064 Illegal pallet number.
E1065 Illegal work number.
E1066 Illegal pattern number.
E1067 Illegal pattern type.
E1068 Illegal work data.
E1069 Illegal pallet data.
E1070 ON/ONI signal is already input.
E1071 XMOVE signal is already input.
E1072 Home position data is not defined.
E1073 Illegal timer number.
E1074 Over maximum signal number.
A-17
Code Error Message

E1075 Illegal clamp number.
E1076 Cannot use negative time value.
E1077 No value set.
E1078 Illegal signal number.
E1079 Cannot use dedicated signal.
E1080 Not RPS mode.
E1081 Cannot use negative value.
E1082 Out of absolute lower motion range limit.
E1083 Out of absolute upper motion range limit.
E1084 Out of set lower motion range limit.
E1085 Out of set upper motion range limit.
E1086 Start point for JtXX beyond motion range.
E1087 End point for JtXX beyond motion range.
E1088 Destination is out of motion range.
E1089 Cannot do linear motion in current configuration.
E1090 External modulation data is not input.
E1091 External modulation data is abnormal.
E1092 Modulation data is over limit.
E1093 Incorrect motion instruction to execute modulate motion.
E1094 Illegal joint number.
E1095 Cannot execute motion instruction in PC program.
E1096 Incorrect auxiliary data settings.
E1097 Missing C1MOVE or C2MOVE instruction.
E1098 C1MOVE(CIR1)instruction required before C2MOVE.
E1099 Unable to create arc path, check positions of the 3 points.
E1100 Cannot execute in sealing specification.
E1101 Can only execute in sealing specification.
E1102 Option is not set, cannot execute.
E1103 Over conveyer position.
E1104 Too many SPINMOVE instructions.
E1105 Start/Destination point is in protected space.
E1106 Cannot execute in this robot.
E1107 Cannot use SEPARATE CONTROL.
E1108 Duplicate robot network IDs.
E1109 Conveyor I/F board is not installed.
E1110 GROUP is not primed.
A-18
Code Error Message

E1111 Due to motion restriction, JtXX cannot move.
E1113 Work sensing signal is not detected.
E1114 Interruption in cooperative control.
E1115 Forced termination of cooperative control.
E1116 Spin axis is not stopped on every 360 degrees.
E1117 Process time over.
E1118 Command value for JtXX suddenly changed.
E1119 Command value for JtXX beyond motion range.
E1120 Current command causes interference betw Jt2 and Jt3.
E1121 Other robot is already in the interference area.
E1122 Unexpected motor power OFF.
E1123 Speed error JtXX.
E1124 Deviation error of JtXX.
E1125 Velocity envelope error JtXX.
E1126 Command speed error of JtXX.
E1127 Command acceleration error of JtXX.
E1128 Uncoincidence error betw destination and current JtXX pos.
E1129 External axis JtXX moved while holding them.
E1130 JtXX collision was detected.
E1131 JtXX unexpected shock is detected.
E1132 Motor power OFF. Measurement stopped.
E1133 Conveyor has reached max. value position.
E1134 Abnormal work transfer pitch of conveyor.
E1135 Motor power OFF.
E1136 Standard terminal is not connected.
E1137 Cannot input/output to teach pendant.
E1138 Aux. terminal is not connected.
E1139 DA board is not installed.
E1140 No conveyor axis.
E1141 Conveyor transfers beyond sync. zone.
E1142 No traverse axis.
E1143 Conveyor axis number is not set.
E1144 No Arm control board.
E1145 Cannot use specified channel, already in use.
E1146 [LSEQ]Aborted by processing time over.
E1147 Cannot open setting file, so cannot set to shipment state.
A-19
Code Error Message

E1148 Cannot read setting file, so cannot set to shipment state.
E1149 Cannot open setting data, so cannot set to shipment state.
E1150 Cannot read setting data, so cannot set to shipment state.
E1151 Too much data for setting to the shipment state.
E1152 Name of setting data for shipment state is too long.
E1153 Power sequence board detected error.(Code=XX)
E1154 Option SIO port not installed.
E1155 A/D converter is not installed.
E1156 [ARM CONTROL BOARD]Processing time over.
E1157 Arm ID I/F board error. (CodeXX)
E1158 (SSCNET)Servo error in JtXX.
E1159 (SSCNET)Error code for servo is (XX).
E1160 (SSCNET)Servo error and monitor setting error of JtXX.
E1161 Automatic Tool Registration not supported by robot model.
E1162 Buffer overflow occurred in the gravity comp. value channel XX.
E1163 Robot stopped in checking operational area.
E1164 [LSEQ]Program execution error at control power ON.(CodeXX)
E1165 Unable to download ext. axis parameter.(Jt-A)
E1166 Num. not assigned to specified channel.(Jt-A)
E1167 Unable to download ext. axis parameter.(Jt-B)
E1168 Num. not assigned to specified channel.(Jt-B)
E1169 Error in servo parameter change sequence.(CodeXX)
E1170 Slave is not ready.
E1171 CC-LINK communication board is not installed.
E1172 Weld communication board is not installed.
E1173 Servo communication error JtXX.
E1174 AD board No.0 is not installed.
E1175 Offset data of zeroing is illegal value.(RobotXX)
E1176 (SSCNET)Download error of external axis parameter.
E1177 (SSCNET)Joint number is not assigned to the channel.
E1179 The current under bending compensation is too large.(JtXX)
E1180 Download error of external axis parameter.(JtXX)
E1181 Encoder battery low voltage.[Servo(XX)]
E1182 Encoder battery low voltage.[External axis(XX)]
E1183 Because Jt5 is not zero degree, cannot move along straight line.
E1184 Illegal configuration for motion.
A-20
Code Error Message

E1185 Jt1 and Jt2 is interfered at start location.
E1186 Jt1 and Jt2 is interfered at end location.
E1187 Current command between Jt1 and Jt2 is interfered.
E1188 (SSCNET)Error in servo parameter change sequence.(CodeXX)
E1189 (SSCNET)Regenerative error of JtXX.(CodeXX)
E1190 (SSCNET)Speed error of JtXX.(CodeXX)
E1191 (SSCNET)Motor overload of JtXX.(CodeXX)
E1192 (SSCNET)Deviation error of JtXX.(CodeXX)
E1193 (SSCNET)Encoder battery of JtXX is low voltage.(CodeXX)
E1194 (SSCNET)Parameter warning of JtXX.(CodeXX)
E1195 (Dual servo)Deviation error between master joint and slave joint.
E1196 While lifter is locked, it cannot move.
E1197 Compensation LS signal is not dedicated.
E1198 Brake check sequence error.
E1199 Brake check function is not supported by servo software ver.
E1200 (Dual servo)Cannot compensate current error (deviation XX).
E1201 Interference check board is not installed.
E1202 Voice recorder cannot stop.
E1203 LS location is not registered.
E1204 Current stretch over the limit.
E1205 Total stretch over the limit.
E1207 The type of I/O board on arm ID board is wrong.
E1208 Download error of servo parameter.(JtXX)
E1209 Upload error of servo parameter.(JtXX)
E1210 Cannot execute program because unprotected.
E1211 Because the memory was full, could not copy the program.
E1212 Because the memory was full, the copy of program was suspended.
E1213 Jt4 and robot arm interfere during motion to start pose.
E1214 Jt4 and robot arm interfere during motion to end pose.
E1215 Current command causes interference between Jt4 and robot arm.
E1216 Jt5 and Jt6 interfere during motion to start pose.
E1217 Jt5 and Jt6 interfere during motion to end pose.
E1218 Current command causes interference between Jt5 and Jt6.
E1219 Exceeds allowable No. of output instructions for the path.
E1220 Signal output point is out of the path.
E1221 Too many signal numbers are specified.
A-21
Code Error Message

E1222 Motion instruction to start/end point of path not set.
E1223 No pose data in last/next motion instruction.
E1224 Several signal output points detected at the same point.
E1225 Correction end instruction is missing.
E1228 Jt4 value in the start point is not 0 degree.
E1229 Jt4 value in the target point is not 0 degree.
E1230 Flange faces direction of upper sphere in start point.
E1231 Flange faces direction of upper sphere in target point.
E1232 Option CPU board is not installed.
E1233 IJoint/ILinear signal not specified.
E1234 IJoint/ILinear signal not detected.
E1235 Separate control I/O board is not installed.
E1236 Distance is too long to correct.
E1237 Vision recognition error.
E1238 Vision communication error.
E1239 Cannot use this instruction in frame correction mode.
E1240 BASE FRAME is not sent from vision unit.
E1241 Improper parameter for FN481.
E1242 Cannot create more than 99 BASE FRAME.
E1243 Cannot execute because cameraXX is disconnected.
E1244 Jt1 and Jt2 and floor interfere during motion to start pose.
E1245 Jt1 and Jt2 and floor interfere during motion to end pose.
E1246 Current command causes interference between Jt1, Jt2 and floor.
E1247 Calculation of encoder absolute data is not completed.(JtXX)
E1248 EEPROM access flag in encoder is busy.(JtXX)
E1249 Temperature in encoder is over the limit.(JtXX)
E1250 Rotation speed of encoder is over the limit.(JtXX)
E1251 EEPROM access error occurred in encoder.(JtXX)
E1252 Encoder rotation data (internal) is abnormal.(JtXX)
E1253 Uncoincidence error between request and response in encoder. (JtXX)
E1254 Cannot operate because a MC of a group XX is off.
E1255 The motor power of unchosen robot was turned on.
E1256 Internal valve , sensor and error reset I/F board missing.
E1257 MC of groupXX turned off during individual repeat operation.
E1258 MC turned off during operation.
E1259 Invalid Structure of palletizing instruction.
A-22
Code Error Message

E1260 Cannot execute instruction during palletizing motion.
E1261 Palletising motion aborted.
E1262 Encoder rotation speed exceeded limit. (JtXX)
E1263 Encoder temperature exceeded limit. (JtXX)
E1264 Velocity envelope error in endless rotation axis.(JtXX)
E1267 The initial setting of Encoder is abnormal. (JtXX)
E1268 Breakage in the encoder line or faulty setting of encoder baud rate. (JtXX)
E1269 The program is for other robot.
E1270 The pose variable is for other robot.
E1271 Interference between arm and floor at start pose.
E1272 Interference between arm and floor at end pose.
E1273 Command causes interference between arm and floor.
E1274 JtXX Over speed in heavy load mode.
E1275 JtXX Beyond the motion range in heavy load mode.
E1276 Start point JtXX is beyond the motion range in heavy load mode.
E1277 End point JtXX is beyond the motion range in heavy load mode.
E1278 Can't slant wrist any more.
E1279 Wrist does not face vertically down at start point.
E1280 Wrist does not face vertically down at end point.
E1281 Command to Jt4 over limit.
E1282 Cannot operate because a MC of a groupXX(JtXX) is off.
E1283 analysis)The E1035 error occurs frequently.JtXX
E1284 analysis)The E1035 and E1029 error occur at the same time.JtXX
E1287 Power module error JtXX (UPPER).
E1288 Power module error JtXX (LOWER).
E1289 [Servo boardXX]Synchronous error.(Servo FPGA)
E1290 JtXX Voltage of the current sensor exceeded the upper limit.
E1291 JtXX Current sensor is disconnected or out of order.(U)
E1292 [Servo boardXX]Abnormal signal input from MCXX.
E1293 [Servo boardXX]Current feedback gain is abnormal.
E1294 [Servo boardXX]I/O 24V is low.
E1295 [Servo boardXX]24V for internal valve is low.
E1296 [Servo boardXX]Mismatch in safety circuit LS conditions.
E1297 [Servo boardXX]Mismatch in jumper wiring for detecting internal pressure.
A-23
Code Error Message

E1298 [Servo boardXX]Mismatch in contact condition of LS override switches.
E1299 [Servo boardXX]Jumper wiring for detecting internal pressure is disconnected.
E1300 [Servo boardXX]DC 24V is abnormal.
E1301 [Servo b’dXX]Encoder type mismatch between software and servo board.
E1302 [MCXX]OFF check is abnormal.(Servo boardXX)
E1303 [MCXX]OFF check of safety relay is abnormal.(Servo boardXX)
E1304 [MCXX]Incorrect operation of K1.(Servo boardXX)
E1305 [MCXX]Incorrect operation of K2.(Servo boardXX)
E1306 [MCXX]Incorrect operation of inrush current control relay.(Servo boardXX)
E1307 [MCXX]Incorrect operation of safety relay KS1.(Servo boardXX)
E1310 [MCXX]Incorrect operation of motor ON relay.(Servo boardXX)
E1311 [MCXX]Incorrect operation of safety circuit motor OFF relay.(Servo boardXX)
E1312 [MCXX]Mismatch in safety circuit motor OFF relay.(Servo boardXX)
E1313 [MCXX]Mismatch in individual MC control of safety circuit.(Servo boardXX)
E1314 [MCXX]Thyristor Thermal is abnormal.(Servo boardXX)
E1315 Watchdog error in NoXX I/O board.
E1316 [I/O board(No.XX)]Access Error.[Address:XX][Code:XX]
E1317 [Servo Board(NoXX)]Response from monitor is abnormal. [Code:XX]
E1318 [MCXX]DC 20V is abnormal.(Servo boardXX)
E1319 Internal valve, sensor and error reset I/F board No.2 is not installed.
E1321 [Main CPU board]Servo board(XX) communication error. (CodeXX)
E1322 Setting num. of safety circuits differs betw. powerseq.b'd and MCXX. (Servo
b'dXX)
E1323 Setting num. of safety circuits differs betw. servo b'dXX and MCXX.
E1324 Safe circuit disconnected between power sequence board and servo boardXX.
E1325 Safe circuit disconnected between servo boardXX and MCXX.
E1326 Safety fence is open.
E1327 [Power sequence board]Miscompare in motor off relay condition on safety
circuit.
E1328 [Power sequence board]Error of motor off relay on safety circuit.
E1329 [Power sequence board]Error in TEACH/REPEAT switch on safety circuit.
E1330 [Power sequence board]IO 24V is low.
E1331 [Power sequence board]Thermal error.
E1332 [Power sequence board]Power error signal was input from servo boardXX.
A-24
Code Error Message

E1333 Motor power ON signal has turned off.(Servo boardXX)(MCXX)
E1334 TEACH/REPEAT switch is abnormal.(Mode differs betw. safety circuit and
monitor.)
E1335 Unexpected motor powerOFF.(Servo boardXX)(MCXX)
E1336 [Servo boardXX]Communication error with Main CPU board.
E1337 [MCXX]Brake power is abnormal.(Servo boardXX)
E1338 [MCXX]P-N low voltage.(Servo boardXX)
E1339 [MCXX]P-N high voltage.(Servo boardXX)
E1340 [MCXX]Regenerative time over.(Servo boardXX)
E1341 [MCXX]Regenerative resistor overheat.(Servo boardXX)
E1342 Motor harness disconnected or robot temperature exceeded limit.(MCXX)
E1343 Mismatch betw connected place of brake harness and software setting. (JtXX)
E1344 JtXX Current sendor is disconnected or out of order.(V)
E1345 [Servo boardXX]Limit switch signal line is disconnected.
E1346 JtXX Failed to get encoder full data.
E1347 [MCXX]Destination spec is incorrect.(Servo boardXX)
E1348 [MCXX]Robot arm spec/separate control spec is incorrect. (Servo boardXX)
E1349 [MCXX]Explosion proof setting is mismatch.(Servo boardXX)
E1350 [MCXX]MC specification error.[CodeXX](Servo boardXX)
E1351 [MCXX]MC OFF delay specification is incorrect.(Servo boardXX)
E1352 JtXX Codes set in software and power block do not match.
E1353 [Main CPU board]CPU temperature is abnormal.
E1355 Error in servo I/F command communication.(Code:XX)
E1356 The tool shape is not set.
E1357 Failed to download ext. axis parameter data.(Jt-C)
E1358 Axis No. is not assigned to the specified channel.(Jt-C)
E1359 JtXX axis U phase overcurrent.
E1360 JtXX axis V phase overcurrent.
E1361 JtXX axis W phase overcurrent.
E1362 [Servo boardXX]Speed of tool center point exceeded safety speed.
E1363 [Servo boardXX]Speed of flange center point exceeded safety speed.
E1365 TEACH KEY SWITCH is ON in two or more places.
E1366 Watchdog error in NoXX ANYBUS interface board.
E1367 Improper parameter for KI481.
E1377 [Main CPU board] Speed of tool center point exceeded safety speed.
E1378 [Main CPU board] Speed of flange center point exceeded safety speed.
A-25
Code Error Message

E1379 [Main CPU board] Deviation error of JtXX.
E1382 [Servo boardXX] Internal valve/sensor interface board is not installed.
E1392 Servo software does not support deviation alarm function.
E1409 [MCXX]Error of gate power output in MC control board[Diagnostic pulse]
(Servo board XX)(CodeXX)
E1411 [MCXX]Error of gate power output in MC control board[mismatch between
output and feedback](Servo board XX)(CodeXX)
E1412 [MCXX]Error of brake power output in MC control board[Diagnostic pulse]
E1414 [MCXX]Brake release switch was pushed during motor power ON, or error of
break power output(Servo board XX)(CodeXX)
E1415 [MCXX]Error of motor ON output in MC control board[Diagnostic pulse](Servo
board XX)(CodeXX)
E1416 [MCXX]Error of motor ON output in MC control board[mismatch between
outputs](Servo board XX)(CodeXX)
E1417 [MCXX]Error of motor ON output in MC control board[mismatch between
E1418 [MCXX]Error of MC shutoff output in MC control board[Diagnostic pulse]
E1419 [MCXX]Error of MC shutoff output in MC control board[mismatch between
outputs](Servo board XX)(CodeXX)
E1420 [MCXX]Error of MC shutoff output in MC control board[mismatch between
E1421 [MCXX]Mismatch in safety circuit inputs (Servo board XX)(CodeXX)
E1422 [MCXX]Short circuit in safety circuit inputs or 24V power drop (Servo board
XX)(CodeXX)
E1423 [MCXX]MC control board error[Diagnostic pulse of safety circuit input](Servo
board XX)(CodeXX)
E1424 [MCXX]Mismatch in MC shutoff inputs (Servo board XX)(CodeXX)
E1425 [MCXX]Short circuit in MC shutoff inputs or 12V power drop (Servo board
XX)(CodeXX)
E1426 [MCXX]MC control board error[Diagnostic pulse of MC shutoff input](Servo
board XX)(CodeXX)
E1427 [MCXX]Relay connected to motor ON output is welded or error of weld
diagnostic circuit(Servo board XX)(CodeXX)
E1428 [MCXX]MC connected to MC shutoff output is welded or error of weld
diagnostic circuit(Servo board XX)(CodeXX)
A-26
Code Error Message

E1429 [MCXX]Failure of MC in MC unit (Servo board XX)(CodeXX)
E1430 [MCXX]Error of PFC board(Servo board XX)
E1431 [MCXX]Voltage drop of power for power module in MC power board(Servo
board XX)
E1432 [MCXX]Communication error for PN voltage sensor(Servo board XX)
E1433 [MCXX]Mismatch between software setting and Off-delay DIP-SW setting on
MC control board (Servo board XX)
E1434 [MCXX]MC power board is wrong(Servo board XX)
E1436 [MCXX]P-N low voltage.(Servo boardXX)（CodeXX)
E1437 [MCXX]Mismatch in state of ind, shutoff contacts of safety circuits.(SrvB'dXX)
(CodeXX)
E1438 [MCXX] PFC board does not working.(Servo board XX)(PN voltage = XXV)
E3808 Motor power OFF (EXT_EMG).
E3809 Brake release signal error.
E3810 Power sequence ready off.
E3811 JtXX axis amp command value suddenly changed.
E3900 Mismatch moving tool data and selected tool data.
E4000 Data communication error.
E4001 Data reading error.
E4002 Data write error.
E4003 Unexpected error in file access.
E4004 Communication retry error.
E4005 Communication process was stopped.
E4006 Receive no data after request.
E4007 Receiving data is too long(MAX=255 characters).
E4008 Abnormal data (EOT) received in communication.
E4009 Communication time out error.
E4010 Terminal already in use.
E4011 Communication port already in use.
E4012 Waiting for input of PROMPT. Connect input device.
E4013 TELNET)SEND error. Code=XX
E4014 TELNET)RECV error. Code=XX
E4015 TELNET)IAC receive error. Code=XX
E4016 TELNET)Close failure. Code=XX
E4017 TELNET)Main socket close failure. Code=XX
E4018 TELNET)System error. Code=XX
A-27
Code Error Message

E4019 TCPIP)Socket open failure. Code=XX Dst.IP=XX.XX.XX.XX
E4020 TCPIP)Socket close failure. Code=XX Dst.IP=XX.XX.XX.XX
E4021 TCPIP)Communication Error. Code=XX Dst.IP=XX.XX.XX.XX
E4022 TCPIP)Message is too long.
E4023 TCPIP)Cannot reach the Host.
E4024 TCPIP)Communication Time Out. Dst.IP=XX.XX.XX.XX
E4025 TCPIP)Connection aborted.
E4026 TCPIP)No Buffer Space.
E4027 TCPIP)Bad Socket.
E4028 FTP)Data receive error.(Code=XX)
E4029 FTP)Data send error.(Code=XX)
E4030 FTP)Server does not recognize command.(Code=XX)
E4031 FTP)Failed to disconnect with FTP server.(Code=XX)
E4032 FTP)Unregistered OS detected.
E4033 FTP)Failed to connect with server.(Code=XX)
E4034 FTP)Failed to receive HOST OS information.(Code=XX)
E4035 FTP)TCP/IP not initialized.
E4036 FTP)FTP service busy now.
E4037 FTP)Failed AUTO-SAVing.
E4053 Channel error.
E4054 TCPIP)Cannot execute because Ethernet board not installed.
E4055 TCP)Cannot create a socket.
E4056 TCP)This port is not in LISTEN (SOCK).
E4057 TCP)Illegal Socket ID.
E4059 ASCYCLE communication receive error.(Code:XX)
E4060 [ARM CONTROL BOARD]ASCYCLE communication receive
error.(Code:XX)
E4061 Received gauge hole data exceeds allowable range.
E4062 Master/slave data is not registered.
E4063 Reference point data is not registered.
E4064 3D calibration/measurement modes are both ON.
E4065 Unregistered variable specified to receive data.
E4066 Variable specified to receive data is broken.
E4067 Received data is broken.
E4068 Start code is not correct.
E4069 End code is not correct.
A-28
Code Error Message

E4070 3D camera group No. not specified.
E4071 Incorrect 3D camera group No.
E4072 Communication beginning wait time out error.
E4073 No servo off signal from ARM I/F board.
E4074 [Servo boardXX]No response from MCXX.(Code:XX)
E4075 [Servo boardXX]Error in communication with MCXX.(Code:XX)
E4076 [MCXX]Servo boardXX communication error.(Code:XX)
E4077 [Servo boardXX]Error in communication with main CPU board.(Code:XX)
E4078 [Servo boardXX]Error in command communication with the main CPU
board.(Code:XX)
E4500 ANYBUS)IN-AREA request timeout.XX
E4501 ANYBUS)OUT/FB.CTRL release timeout.XX
E4510 DN)Master status.XX
E4511 DN)Node status.XX
E4512 ABM-DN)Mailbox error.
E4520 ABMA-PDP)Status STOP.XX
E4521 ABMA-PDP)Status OFFLINE. XX
E4522 ABMA-PDP)I/O data Communication error.XX
E4523 ABMA-PDP)Sending of timed out I/O data.XX
E4524 ABMA-PDP)Timeout of receiving I/O data.XX
E4525 ABMA-PDP)Timeout of sending message.XX
E4526 ABMA-PDP)Timeout of receiving message.XX
E4527 ABMA-PDP)Check configuration data.XX
E4528 PROFIBUS)Slave Diag-error response detected.XX
E4529 PROFIBUS)Statistic counter-error response detected.XX
E4530 DN)DeviceNet cable is disconnected.
E4531 CC-LINK)Communication has been disconnected. XX
E4532 CC-LINK)Initial condition setting is incorrect.
E4533 CC-LINK)Watch dog timeout error.
E4534 CC-LINK)Parameter setting error. XX
E4535 CC-LINK)Time out on setting parameter.
E4536 CC-LINK)Master board is abnormal. XX
E4537 CC-LINK)Initialization error on master board . XX
E4538 CANopen)Network is disconnected.
E5000 Connected permission signal has not been turned ON.
E5001 RWC type is not process control type.
A-29
Code Error Message

E5002 1GS board is not process control type.
E5003 Illegal extend (retract) output signal.
E5004 Weld completion signal already input.
E5005 (Spot weld)Weld schedule setting data is abnormal.
E5006 CLAMP SPEC is not set as PULSE.
E5007 Servo weld gun not connected or wrong gun connected.
E5008 Tip wear measurement (STAGE1) was not executed.
E5009 Work sensing signal(gun_tip touch signal) is not set.
E5010 Servo weld gun mechanical parameter is not set.
E5011 This clamp number already set for servo weld gun axis.
E5012 Cannot change the gun because offset data is abnormal.
E5013 Cannot change multiple guns at the same step.
E5014 Cannot execute, gun connected to another joint.
E5015 Gun status data disagrees with clamp condition.
E5016 Data of SRVPRESS is wrong.
E5017 Wear base data is not registered.
E5018 Weld completion signal has not been detected.
E5019 Weld fault signal is detected.
E5020 Retract pos. monitor error.
E5021 Extend pos. monitor error.
E5022 Current gun retract position differs from a destination.
E5023 Wear is abnormal, cannot take measurement.
E5024 Pressurization comp. signal has not been detected.
E5025 Gun opening comp. signal has not been detected.
E5026 (Spot welding)RWC error. XX
E5027 Robot stopped in welding.
E5028 Cannot achieve set force.
E5029 Gun tip stuck.
E5030 Copper plate wear exceeds limit. step=XX
E5031 Weld completion signal is not turned OFF.
E5032 Calibration did not end normally.
E5033 Cannot weld because of abnormal thickness.
E5034 Tip wear exceeds limit. (MOVING SIDE)
E5035 Tip wear exceeds limit. (FIXED SIDE)
E5036 Incorrect gun status data.
E5037 Tip wear exceeds limit. XX
A-30
Code Error Message

E5038 Arc detection signal did not turn OFF.
E5039 No response from RWC communication I/F board.
E5040 Cannot connect gun because gun is already connected.
E5041 Cannot disconnect gun because gun is already disconnected.
E5042 Gun No is not defined or Gun type is not servo gun.
E5043 Communication error in welder. (CodeXX)
E5044 Failed to get weld data. (timer XX)
E5045 Failed to change weld data. (timer XX)
E5046 Weld error has arisen.
E5047 Receiving weld items now, wait till completion.
E5048 Weld controller is unconnected or weld items are not received. (timer XX)
E5049 Serial number signal error.
E5050 This welder is without Traceability.
E5051 Cannot calibrate because tool change axis is disconnected.
E5052 The pressurizing power measurement value is abnormal.
E5053 The pressurizing power sensor is disconnected or it breaks down.
E5054 The selector switch on TP is set to manual operation.
E5055 The selector switch on TP is set to automatic operation.
E5056 No Initialization Weld board.
E5057 Initialization failure in Initialization Weld board.
E5058 Welder(DENGEN COMPANY) not connected. (welder XX)
E5059 Welder(DENGEN COMPANY) response error. (welder XX)
E5060 Initialization Weld board protected. (welder XX)
E5061 Welder(DENGEN COMPANY) data process not execute. (welder XX)
E5062 Welder(DENGEN COMPANY) data process error.(welder XX)
E5063 Weld error has arisen. (CodeXX)
E5064 Welder(DENGEN COMPANY) of weld was aborted. (welder XX)
E5065 Welder(DENGEN COMPANY) error has arisen. (welder XX)
E5066 Waiting weld completion time out.(welder XX)
E5067 Magnet control is abnormal.(welder XX)
E5500 Vision board is not installed.
E5501 (Vision)Camera not connected.
E5502 (Vision)Incorrect parameter.
E5503 (Vision)Incorrect Symbol.
E5504 (Vision)Incorrect name.
E5505 (Vision)Incorrect image memory.
A-31
Code Error Message

E5506 (Vision)Incorrect histogram data.
E5507 (Vision)Incorrect mode.
E5508 (Vision)Incorrect density(/color).
E5509 (Vision)Incorrect camera input assignment.
E5510 (Vision)Incorrect camera ch.number.
E5511 (Vision)Incorrect Window No.
E5512 (Vision)Incorrect coordinates data.
E5513 (Vision)Incorrect number.
E5514 (Vision)Incorrect image code(binary/multi).
E5515 (Vision)Incorrect threshold.
E5516 (Vision)PROTO(/TEMPLATE) not registered or already exists.
E5517 (Vision)Cal. data not registered.
E5518 (Vision)Graphic cursor is not initialized.
E5519 (Vision)Too many samples from PROTO object.
E5520 (Vision)Too many targets detected.
E5521 (Vision)Vision command not initiated.
E5522 (Vision)System registered with abnormal data.
E5523 (Vision)Error in processing image(s).
E5524 (Vision)Sound port assigned another function.
E5525 (Vision)Lack of data storage area.
E5526 (Vision)Incorrect synch. mode.
E5527 (Vision)Vision processing now.
E5528 (Vision)Image capture error.
E5529 (Vision)Time out or Buffer overflow.
E5530 (Vision)Failed to write on flash memory.
E5531 (Vision)Proto data abnormal, so initialized.
E5532 (Vision)Work detection failure.
E5533 (Vision)Initialization error. Code = XX
E5534 (Vision)Vision system error.
E5535 (Vision)Specified motion mode is incorrect.
E5536 (Vision)Inappropriate camera/projector parameters.
E5537 (Vision)Incorrect camera switch assignment.
E5538 (Vision)This plane is assigned to another camera.
E5539 (Vision)Edge was not found.
E5540 (Vision)Inappropriate HSI data.
E5541 (Vision)H data range width is over 128.
A-32
Code Error Message

E5542 (Vision)Distance image input unit not set for camera.
E5543 (Vision)Cannot calculate the set edge points.
E5544 (Vision)Check color conversion table type in set config.
E5545 (Vision)Incorrect area size.
E5546 (Vision)Slit image does not exist.
E5547 (Vision)Incorrect no. of correlation vectors.
E5548 (Vision)Inappropriate vector data.
E5549 (Vision)X-Fit environment was not set.
E5550 (Vision)Mouse is not initialized.
E5551 (Vision)Camera switcher board is not installed.
E6000 Explosion proof teach pendant is not connected.
E6001 Step after XD(2)START must be LMOVE or HMOVE.
E6002 Signal condition already input.
E6003 Door open detect signal is not dedicated.
E6004 Location data was not detected.
E6005 Incorrect setting of barrier unit.
E6006 Signal not detected.
E6007 Wrist can't be straightened any more (Singular point 1).
E6008 Wrist can't be bent any more (Singular point 2).
E6009 Purge air flow is insufficient.
E6010 Out of XYZ MOVING AREA LIMIT.
E6011 Pressure within enclosure is low.
E6012 Relative distance between guns is too near (ID:XX).
E6013 No free memory in program queue.
E6014 No free memory in delayed start queue.
E6015 Special signal is not specialized.
E6016 Robot arm stretching out (Singular Point 3).
E6017 Out of mechanical XYZ motion limits.
E6018 Painting equipment control board error. (CodeXX)
E6019 Painting equipment control board is not installed.
E6020 Monitoring Robot ID is duplicate.
E6021 (Mutual-Wait)There is no response from the other party robot.
E6022 Duplicate Mutual-Wait IDs.
E6023 (Mutual-Wait)Communication error in Mutual-Wait.
E6024 Wrist can't bend any further left/right (Singular Point 1).
E6025 (Conveyer synchronous communications)It is a conveyer position reception
A-33
Code Error Message

error.
E6026 Guns are too near in X direction. (ID:XX)
E6027 Guns are too near in Y direction. (ID:XX)
E6028 Guns are too near in Z direction. (ID:XX)
E6029 [Servo boardXX]Mismatch in internal pressure in safety circuit.
E6030 [Servo boardXX]Pressure within enclosure is low.
E6031 Monitoring Robot ID is invalid.
E6032 [Purge control board]Pressure within enclosure is low.
E6033 Painting equipment control process error. (CodeXX)
E6034 Cartridge table rotate command is abnormal.
E6500 No welding Interface board.
E6501 No.2 welding Interface board not found.
E6502 Arc failure.
E6503 Wire stuck.
E6504 Arc start failure.
E6505 Arc weld insulation defect.
E6506 Torch interference.
E6507 Illegal interpolation data.
E6508 No D/A board for polarity ratio control.
E6509 No work detected.
E6510 Undefined sensing direction.
E6511 Insufficient num. of sensing points.
E6512 Undefined mother or daughter work.
E6513 Too many sensing points.
E6514 Work specification incorrect.
E6515 Incorrect sensing point specified.
E6516 Wire check failure.
E6517 Incorrect weld condition number.
E6518 No weld condition data set.
E6519 Weld condition data is out of range.
E6520 Laser sensor tracking value exceeded.
E6521 Beyond Laser sensor tracking ability.
E6522 Laser sensor cannot detect welding joint.
E6523 Calibration data between torch and camera is not ready.
E6524 Error in data calculated using Laser sensor.
E6525 Cannot detect weld joint, Laser sensor tracking set already.
A-34
Code Error Message

E6526 No response from Laser sensor controller.
E6527 Laser sensor communication error. Code is XX.
E6528 Start point not found by Laser sensor.
E6529 Finish point not found by Laser sensor.
E6530 Cannot use circular interp. with Laser sensor function.
E6531 Cannot turn Laser ON because motor power is OFF.
E6532 No communication board to Laser sensor.
E6533 No RTPM board.
E6534 Too many taught points for RTPM.
E6535 RTPM arc sensor error.
E6536 RTPM current deviation error.
E6537 RTPM tracking value is out of range.
E6538 Beyond RTPM tracking ability.
E6539 AVC tracking value is out of range.
E6540 Beyond AVC tracking ability.
E6541 No AVC board.
E6542 AVC voltage deviation error.
E6543 Too many taught points for AVC.
E6544 Hyper Arc tracking value is out of range.
E6545 Beyond Hyper Arc tracking ability.
E6546 Bead end is not found.
E6547 Finish end is not found.
E6548 Hyper Arc revolution beyond normal deviation.
E6549 Hyper Arc torch calibration error.
E6550 Hyper Arc Z phase index error.
E6551 No Hyper Arc board.
E6552 Hyper Arc board error. Code is XX.
E6553 Hyper Arc current sensor error.
E6554 Hyper Arc voltage sensor error.
E6555 Hyper Arc current deviation error.
E6556 Hyper Arc amplifier error. Code is XX.
E6557 No Wire feeding Control board.
E6558 Wire feeding control error, code is XX.
E6559 Wire feeding speed deviation error.
E6560 Cannot re-calibrate weld in progress.
E6561 Cannot weld, re-calibration in progress.
A-35
Code Error Message

E6562 Electric pole stuck.
E6563 KHITS tracking system error. (Code = XX)
E6564 The arc weld instruction sequence is incorrect.
E6565 Arc welding Interface board(1LN) is not installed.(robot XX)
E6566 FN instructions not executed in the correct order.
E6567 KLS tracking system error.(Code=XX)
E6568 Failed in executing command to tracking system.(cmd=XX)
E6569 Taught data exceeds inclination limit for compensation.
E6570 Cannot execute because welding now.
E6571 Cannot execute because wire inching/retracting now.
E6572 Teach point for circular motion is missing.
E6573 The welding machine is abnormal.(Code=XX)
E6574 Sensing of groove: cannot detect edge.
E6575 Sensing of groove: gap error.
E6576 Welder is not ready for operation. (Code=XX)
E6577 Deviation is too large. Reset allows non-correction movement.
E6578 Sensing was interrupted due to power OFF. Restore step and retry.
E6579 KI instructions not executed in the correct order.
E7000 Servo weld gun disconnected.
E7001 Location data includes released gun status data.
E7002 Destination is far from target point.
E7003 The clearance distance of gunXX is set to 0mm.
E7004 Gun tip wear change over the limit. (MOVING SIDE)
E7005 Gun tip wear change over the limit. (FIXED SIDE)
E7006 Clamp number or gun number is not servo weld gun.
E7007 Cannot change tip base data in 1 Stg. because tip wear rate is not set.
E7008 Independent Gun control is not completed.
E7009 Current limit for servo welding gun is abnormal.
E7500 JtXX Collision is detected.
E7501 JtXX Unexpected shock is detected.
E7502 AC Fail Process Error = XX
E7503 POWER SEQUENCE setting data incorrect.
E7504 Angle between JtXX is out of range at start location.
E7505 Angle between JtXX is out of range at end location.
E7506 Angle between JtXX is out of range.
E7507 SC1MOVE or SC2MOVE instruction is required after SC1MOVE.
A-36
Code Error Message

E7508 SC1MOVE instruction is required before SC2MOVE.
E7509 Cannot execute, interpolation conditions are not fulfilled.
E7510 Cannot move with current posture.
E7511 Brake control bit number is duplicated.
E7512 L3C1MOVE or L3C2MOVE instruction is required after L3C1MOVE.
E7513 L3C1MOVE instruction is required before L3C2MOVE.
E7514 Specified parameter is not consistent.
E8200 Not in cooperative mode.
E8201 Unmatch the total of motion instruction in cooperative mode.
E8202 Unmatch step of motion instruction in cooperative mode.
E8203 Cannot use this instruction in cooperative mode.
E8204 Invalid cooperative group No.
E8205 No JMASTER robot.
E8206 TouchSensing in Cooperative mode is no supported.
E8207 JMASTER robot already exists.
E8208 WSLAVE robot already exists.
E8209 Fixed Point Motion in Cooperative mode is no supported.
E8210 No WSLAVE robot.
E8211 Out of sync.
E8212 Cannot continue non-cooperative instruction in cooperative mode.
E8213 No MASTER robot.
E8214 No SLAVE robot.
E8400 Servohand opened in clamp ON step.(CLAMP=XX)
E8401 Clamping position of servo Hand is error.(CLAMP=XX)
E8402 Cannot achieve set force of JtXX.
E8403 NC Joints lock signal not off.
E8404 Interpolation other than joint int. is unavailable.
E8405 It tries to move the Matehan axis with the axis locked.
E8600 （FSJ)Processing condition error.XX
E8601 Gap was over the lower pos. limit.
E8602 Reached the Penetration depth within min.processing time.
E8603 It could not reach the set Penetration depth within the appointed period.
E8604 Pressure cable disconnected.
E8605 Please input two set pressure or more.
E8606 Please input data in ascending order.
E8607 FSJ COUNTER ALARM.XX
A-37
Code Error Message

E8608 (FSJ)FSJ schedule setting data is abnormal.
E8609 Setting tip force is over limit.
E8610 Setting rotation speed is over limit.
E8611 FSW Logging buffer is full.
E8800 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(SphereXX, LineXX)
E8801 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(SphereXX, ZUpper)
E8802 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(SphereXX, ZLower)
E8803 Command value almost invades restricted space.(SphereXX, Part.XX LineXX)
E8804 Command value almost invades restricted space.(SphereXX, Part.XX ZUpper)
E8805 Command value almost invades restricted space.(SphereXX, Part.XX ZLower)
E8806 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(ToolBox, LineXX)
E8807 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(ToolBox, ZUpper)
E8808 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(ToolBox, ZUpper)
E8809 Command value almost invades restricted space.(ToolBox, Part.XX)
E8810 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(LinkXX, LineXX)
E8811 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(LinkXX, ZUpper)
E8812 Command value almost exceeds virtual safety fence.(LinkXX, ZLower)
E8813 Command value almost invades restricted space.(LinkXX, Part.XX LineXX)
E8814 Command value almost invades restricted space.(LinkXX, Part.XX ZUpper)
E8815 Command value almost invades restricted space.(LinkXX, Part.XX ZLower)
E8820 Current value exceeded virtual safety fence.(SphereXX, LineXX)
E8821 Current value exceeded virtual safety fence.(SphereXX, ZUpper)
E8822 Current value exceeded virtual safety fence.(SphereXX, ZLower)
E8823 Current value invaded restricted space.(SphereXX, Part.XX LineXX)
E8824 Current value invaded restricted space.(SphereXX, Part.XX ZUpper)
E8825 Current value invaded restricted space.(SphereXX, Part.XX ZLower)
E8826 Current value exceeded virtual safety fence.(ToolBox, LineXX)
E8827 Current value exceeded virtual safety fence.(ToolBox, ZUpper)
E8828 Current value exceeded virtual safety fence.(ToolBox, ZLower)
E8829 Current value invaded restricted space.(ToolBox, Part.XX)
E8830 Current value exceeded virtual safety fence.(LinkXX, LineXX)
E8831 Current value exceeded virtual safety fence.(LinkXX, ZUpper)
E8832 Current value exceeded virtual safety fence.(LinkXX, ZLower)
E8833 Current value invaded restricted space.(LinkXX, Part.XX LineXX)
E8834 Current value invaded restricted space.(LinkXX, Part.XX ZUpper)
E8835 Current value invaded restricted space.(LinkXX, Part.XX ZLower)
A-38
Code Error Message

E8850 Disabled robot motion.
E8851 Detected area interference.
E8852 Detected arm interference.(XX, XX)
E8853 Failed to predict trajectory.
E8854 Detected near miss.(XX, XX)
E8855 No response from interference check board.
E8856 Communication error between interference check board and ARM CONTROL
board.
E8857 The number of robots is too many.
E8860 [ARM CTRL BOARD]Cannot receive data from INTERFERENCE CHECK
BOARD.
E8861 Communication error between IL server and ARM CONTROL board.
E8862 Cable disconnected between IL server and ARM CONTROL board.
E8900 Detected torque for load presence is abnormal.
E8901 Detected torque for load absence is abnormal.
E8902 Stopped because motion limitation signal was input.
E9300 Cannot rotate JtXX. Because disconnected axis.
E9301 Cannot rotate JtXX. Because invalid axis.
E9302 Rotation speed setting for JtXX is abnormal.
D0001 CPU error.(PC=XX)
D0002 Main CPU BUS error.(PC=XX)
D0007 [Servo boardXX]CPU error. (CodeXX)
D0008 [Servo boardXX]Floating point exception. (CodeXX)
D0009 [Servo boardXX]CPU exception. (PC=XX)
D0900 Teach data is broken.
D0901 AS Flash memory sum check error.
D0902 Servo Flash memory sum check error.
D0903 IP board memory error. (XX)
D0904 Memory is locked due to AC_FAIL.
D1003 Init. error of servo control software.
D1011 As or servo software is not compatible with the robot model.
D1012 Servo type mismatch. Check the settings.
D1014 Servo system error.(Code=XX)
D1015 The servo data file does not exist.
D1016 Data applicable to the robot model not in servo data file.
D1017 Error of download of servo data.
A-39
Code Error Message

D1018 Servo software version mismatch.
D1020 [ARM CONTROL BOARD]Synchronous error between CPUs.
D1021 Servo FPGA configuration data not found.
D1022 Configuration error in servo FPGA.(CodeXX)
D1023 Current mismatch betw. m-plexer&software. JtXX
D1025 [Servo boardXX]Detected Watch dog error.(Servo FPGA)
D1026 [Servo boardXX]Abnormal signal input from power sequence board.
D1027 [MCXX]Detected Watch dog error.
D1028 [Servo boardXX]DC power is abnormal.(Servo FPGA)
D1029 [Servo boardXX]AC primary power is abnormal.(Servo FPGA)
D1030 Cannot start communication with the servo boardXX.
D1031 Read error of servo software.
D1032 [Servo boardXX]Download error of servo software.(CodeXX)
D1033 Connection Port No(XX) and Servo board No(XX) mismatch.
D1034 The servo data file is missing or not acceptable.(CodeXX)
D1035 [Servo boardXX]Init. error of servo software.(CodeXX)
D1036 [Servo boardXX]Download error of servo data.(CodeXX)
D1037 [Servo boardXX]Configuration error in servo FPGA.(CodeXX)
D1038 [Servo boardXX]Upload error of servo software initial data.(CodeXX)
D1039 [Servo boardXX]Download error of servo software initial data.(CodeXX)
D1040 [Servo boardXX]Device check error. (CodeXX)
D1041 JtXX axis brake release circuit is abnormal.
D1044 [MCXX] Detected Watch dog error.(Servo board XX)(codeXX)
D1500 Encoder misread error. JtXX
D1501 Defective gun changer connection or encoder comm. error.
D1502 Amp overcurrent. JtXX
D1504 Abn. curr feedback JtXX. (Amp fail, pwr harness disconnect)
D1507 AC primary power OFF.
D1512 Brake line error for JtXX.
D1516 Mismatch betw hard/software settings for HOLD backup time.
D1517 Blown fuse on safety circuit emergency line.
D1518 Mismatch in the Emer. Stop condition on safety circuit.
D1520 Mismatch in safety circuit TEACH/REPEAT condition.
D1521 Mismatch in safety circuit safety-fence condition.
D1522 Mismatch in cond. of safety circuit enabling device.
D1523 Mismatch in cond. of safety circuit ext.enabling device.
A-40
Code Error Message

D1528 Controller temperature is out of range.
D1529 Signal harness disconnected or encoder power error.
D1530 Abnormal current limit of JtXX.
D1532 (SSCNET)EnCoder communication error.(JtXX)(CodeXX)
D1533 (SSCNET)Absolute position of JtXX is erased.(CodeXX)
D1534 (SSCNET)Parameter error of JtXX.(CodeXX)
D1535 (SSCNET)Alarm of JtXX.(CodeXX)
D1536 JtXX does not move normally.
D1539 Power supply circuit for PWM signal output malfunctioned.
D1541 Encoder type set in software and arm control board mismatch.
D1542 No Rotation data from multidrop encoder at initialize.
D1543 [Servo boardXX]DC 5V is abnormal.
D1544 [Servo boardXX]DC 3.3V is abnormal.
D1545 [Servo boardXX]DC 12V is abnormal.
D1549 [Servo boardXX]Primary power source is too low.
D1550 [Servo boardXX]Primary power source is too high.
D1551 [Servo boardXX]AC primary power OFF.
D1552 [MCXX]DC 3.3V is abnormal.
D1553 [MCXX]DC 5V is abnormal.
D1557 [Power sequence board]DC 3.3V is abnormal.
D1558 [Power sequence board]DC 5V is abnormal.
D1561 [Power sequence board]AC primary power OFF.
D1562 [Power sequence board]AC primary power voltage is too high.
D1563 [Power sequence board]AC primary power voltage is too low.
D1564 [Power sequence board]Remote power off signal was detected.
D1565 Cannot access power sequence board.(CodeXX)
D1566 P-N capacitor has not discharged.(Servo board XX)(MCXX)
D1567 [Servo boardXX]Primary Power source is error.
D1568 [Servo boardXX]Power supply circuit for PWM signal output malfunctioned.
D1572 [MCXX]MC control board error[clock](Servo board XX)(CodeXX)
D1573 [MCXX]MC control board error[reset IC] (Servo board XX)(CodeXX)
A-41
Code Error Message

D1575 [MCXX]Setting error of Dip-SW for Off-delay setting(Servo board
XX)(CodeXX)
D1576 [MCXX]Error reset for MC control board is input over the fixed time(Servo
board XX)(CodeXX)
D1577 [MCXX]Error of gate power output in MC control board[detected ON during
OFF condition](Servo board XX)(CodeXX)
D1578 [MCXX]Error of brake power output in MC control board[detected ON during
OFF condition](Servo board XX)(CodeXX)
D1579 [MCXX]P-N Capacitor is not connected.(Servo board XX)
D2000 No response from Comm. board for Laser sensor.
D2001 RI/O or C-NET board initialize error.
D2002 No response from the Arm ID board.
D2003 No data in the Arm ID board.
D2004 Mismatch data in the Arm ID board.
D2005 CC-LINK software version mismatch.
D2006 Watch dog error on communication board for Explosion proof TP.
D2007 No response from the built-in sequence board.
D2008 Magnet is Contactor of groupXX is stuck.
D2009 Sensor for detecting pressure in enclosure is abnormal.
D2010 Sync. error between User I/F and Arm control board.
D2011 Parameter download error betw User I/F & Arm control boards.
D2012 Soft Absorber error. Turn OFF & ON the control power.
D2013 Change gain error. Turn OFF & ON the control power.
D2014 Robot network initialize error.
D2016 No response from the Arm control board.
D2021 Arm data file is not found.
D2022 Arm data is not found.
D2023 Failed to load arm data.
D2024 [ARM CTRL BOARD]Robot type setting failed.
D2025 Robot codes set in software and Arm ctrl board do not match.
D2026 Codes set in software & curr. sensor I/F b'd do not match.
D2027 Codes set in software and power block do not match.
D2028 (SSCNET) Initialization error. (CodeXX)
D2035 Program execution error.
D2036 (SSCNET)System error occurred in 1LP I/F board. (CodeXX)
D2037 Safety unit circuit is abnormal.
A-42
Code Error Message

D2038 (SSCNET)Interface board is not installed.
D2039 (SSCNET)Communication error of JtXX on initialization.
D2040 (SSCNET)Initialization error of JtXX.(CodeXX)
D2041 Connection of the signal harness is wrong.
D2042 Servo amp and robot arm are mismatched.
D2043 Arm I/F board detects AC-Fail.
D2044 [ARM CONTROL BOARD]No response from Servo FPGA software.
D2045 [ARM CONTROL BOARD]Device check error. (CodeXX)
D2046 Relay error on purge control board. (relay XX)
D2047 Jumper setting error or Safety relay failure on Servo CPU board.
D2048 DC 12V Voltage source error on purge control board.
D2049 Over current error in interlock relay drive circuit(1) for purge control board.
D2050 Over current error in interlock relay drive circuit(2) for purge control board.
D2051 Communication error on purge control board.
D2052 Hardware setting for the external axis amplifier has discrepancy. robot=n
D2053 (FANXX-XX)Rotational speed of fan is abnormal.(Servo boardXX)
D2054 Codes set in software and power block do not match.(Code:XX)
D2055 [Power sequence board]Watchdog error was detected.
D2056 [I/O board(No.XX)]Several boards have same ID address.
D2057 [Servo boardXX]No response from Servo FPGA device.
D2058 [Main CPU board]DC power supply is abnormal.(XX mV)
D2064 [Purge control board]Pressure within enclosure is low.(during purging)
D2065 Safety relay is abnormal which cut off brake power when inner pressure is low.
D2066 [Purge control board]DC is abnormal.(12V)
D2067 [Main CPU board]Communication with purge control board is abnormal.
D2068 [IO board No. XX]Device check failure.(CodeXX)
D2069 [ANYBUS interface board(No.XX)]Several boards have the same ID address.
D3800 Communication board memory error. (XX)
D3822 Motor parameter is not consistent with controller. JtXX
D3823 FAN NO. XX in Controller is out of order.
D3824 Fuse NO.XX on IO board NO.1 is open.
D3825 Fuse NO.XX on IO board NO.2 is open.
D3826 Robot DC voltage error.
D3828 Controller type error.
D4000 [DIAG]Error is detected in RS232C.(Code:XX)
D4001 [DIAG]Error is detected in Ethernet.(Code:XX)
A-43
Code Error Message

D4500 Fieldbus interface board is not detected.
D4501 ABMA-PDP)I/F module error. XX
D4502 FIELD-BUS-INIT)Error reply. XX
D4503 FIELD-BUS-INIT)Reply timeout. XX
D4504 ANYBUS)OUT/FB.CTRL request timeout. XX
D6000 Over temperature error in Barrier unit.
D6001 Mutual-Wait initialize error.
A-44
Kawasaki Robot Controller E Series
OPERATION MANUAL
February 2009 : 1st Edition

December 2012 : 4th Edition
Publication : KAWASAKI HEAVY INDUSTRIES, LTD.
90203-1104DED
Copyright © 2012 KAWASAKI HEAVY INDUSTRIES, LTD. All rights reserved.

90203-1104DED E Operation Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

90203-1104DED E Operation Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

90203-1104DED E Operation Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

E Series Controller

Kawasaki Robot Operation Manual

Failure to comply with indicated matters can result in

Failure to comply with indicated matters may possibly lead

Failure to comply with indicated matters may lead to

1. The accuracy and effectiveness of the diagrams, procedures, and detail

1. HARDWARE KEYS AND SWITCHES (BUTTON)

ENTER: expresses the hardware key “ENTER”.

2. SOFTWARE KEYS AND SWITCHES

1.0 General ............................................................................................................................... 1-1

2.0 Switches, Keys and Displays.............................................................................................2-1

2.12 Help Screen ......................................................................................................................2-60

4.0 Manual Operation of Robot...............................................................................................4-1

5.0 Teaching ............................................................................................................................. 5-1

5.4.1 Normal Recording Procedure..........................................................................................5-15

6.0 Repeat Operation................................................................................................................ 6-1

7.0 Checking and Modifying Programs .................................................................................. 7-1

7.3.3.1 Modifying both Pose and Auxiliary Data .......................................................................7-10

8.0 Auxiliary Functions ........................................................................................................... 8-1

9.0 Interface Panel.................................................................................................................... 9-1

10.0 Automatic Tool (Coordinates Data) Registration............................................................10-1

10.3 Cautions for Teaching Base Poses...................................................................................10-3

11.0 Robot Motion Parameter Values Settings ....................................................................... 11-1

12.0 Auto Load Measurement .................................................................................................12-1

13.0 Dedicated Instructions for Specific Fields of Robot Applications .................................13-1

13.4.3 Setting of Spot Welding Controller .................................................................................13-7

14.0 Multi Function OX/WX Specifications (Option) ...........................................................14-1

15.0 Data Transformation (Option) .........................................................................................15-1

15.5.10 Confirming Teaching Data after Data Transformation.................................................15-20

16.0 Sealing Specification (Option) ........................................................................................16-1

17.0 Troubleshooting ...............................................................................................................17-1

Appendix Error Message List......................................................................................................... A-1

1.1 MODELS OF E SERIES CONTROLLERS

For arm models to be connected, refer to Chapter 1.4.

1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

1. North America spec. robot

ANSI/RIA R15.06 Industrial Robots and Robot Systems -

ANSI/RIA/ISO Robots for Industrial Environment -

ANSI/UL 1740 Standard for Robots and Robotic Equipment,

NFPA 79 Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

CSA Z434-03 Industrial Robots and Robot Systems -

2. Europe spec. robot

EN ISO 10218-1 Robots for industrial environments -

EN ISO 13849-1 Safety of machinery - Safety related parts of

EN 60204-1 Electrical equipment of industrial machines

EN 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-4:

EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2:

1.3 SPECIFICATIONS OF E SERIES CONTROLLERS

Main specifications of E series controllers are as follows.

1. Controller for Japan spec.

1. Model E10/E12/E13/E14 (with Insulating Transformer)

2. Controller for North America spec.

3. Controller for Europe spec.

1.4 ROBOT ARMS TO BE CONNECTED

E70/73/76 E71/74/77 E91/E94/ E10/20/ E12/22/ E13/23/ E14/24/

1.5 RELEVANT OPERATION MANUALS

2.0 SWITCHES, KEYS AND DISPLAYS

2.1 OVERVIEW OF CONTROLLER